THE 


ANATO  MIS  T’s 

V A D E-M  E C U M: 


CONTAINING  THE 

ANATOMY  AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

OF  THE 

HUMAN  BO  DU 


By  ROBERT  HOOPER, 

Of  PEMBROKE  COLLEGE , OXFORD,  M.  D.  F.  L.  S.  &"<■ 


Nifi  utile  eft  quad  facimus,  ftulta  eft  gloria. 


FIRST  AMERICAN,  FROM  THE  THIRD  LONDON,  EDITION'S 


BOSTON: 

PRINTED  BY  DAVID  CARLISLE, 

Tor  THOMAS  & ANDREWS,  WEST  & GREENLEAF, 
JOHN  WEST,  and  CALEB  BINGHAM, 

1801-. 


J T is  the  intention  of  the  writer,  in  the  fol- 
lowing Compendium,  to  prefent  to  the  itu- 
dent  a ufeful  anatomical  confpectus,  or  pock- 
et manual  of  anatomy  and  phynology  ; giv- 
ing a lhort  but  accurate  defcription  of  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  human  body  and  their 
functions  ; with  a gloffary,  or  explanation  of 
the  principal  terms  ufed  in  that  fcience. 

The  utility  of  fuch  a performance  will  be 
generally  acknowledged,  efpecially  when  it  is 
confidered  that  there  is  no  fuch  work  written 
upon  a fimilar  plan. 

The  motive  that  induced  the  author  to  form 
and  collect  together,  in  one  fmall  pocket  vol- 
ume, this  elementary  production,  was  his  hav- 
ing himfelf  experienced  the  want  of  fuch  an 
affiftant  when  applying  to  that  branch  of  phi- 
lofophy.  He,  therefore,  folicits  permiffion  to 
recommend  it  to  ftudents,  not  as  a work 
wherein  any  thing  new  is  to  be  met  with,  but 
merely  as  their  occafional  companion  in  the 
profecution  of  their  ftudies. 

St.  Marylebone  Infirmary, 

September  23,  1800. 


( 5 ) 


CONTENTS. 


-Introduction 
Anatomy,  Divifion  of 
Osteology  - 

Table  of  the  Bones 
Bones  of  the  Cranium 
Face  - - - 

Comities  of  the  Face 
Bones  of  the  Trunk 
Cbefi 

— ■ ■ Loins 

Pelvis 

- upper  Extremity 

— " lower  Extremity 

Periosteum 
Cartillages 
Osteogeny 

Connexion  of  Bones 
Syndesmology  * 

Myology 

Mufcles  of  the  Cranium 
——————  Eyelids 

- — Eyeball 

„ Nofe  and  Mouth 

— — external  Ear 

■ ■■■  — — internal  Ear 

lower  Jaw 

Mufcles  about  the  Neck 

— — Fauces 

Pharynx 

of  the  Abdomen 

" ■ Male  Organs 

— Anus 

' Female  Organs 


66. 


7 a. 


Mu fU 


Thorax 

upper  Extremity 

' of  the  Os  Humeri 

- on  the  Fore-arm  - 
Hand 

- of  the  lower  Extremity 

- on  the  Thigh 

A a 


Page 

3 

9 

a. 

it 

*3 

a6 

3* 

33 

37 

38 

ib. 

40 

44 

47 
ib. 

48 

JO 

ja 

38 

60 

/£. 

61 

a. 

(>3 

64 

63 

78 

O 

70 

74 

76 

73 

74 

75 

77 
83 

85 

86 

89 

90 
93 


C 6 ) 


Mufcles  on  the  Leg  - - 

Foot 

Physiology  and  Phenomena  of  muscular  Mo- 
tion 
Bursalogy 
Angiology 
Arteries 

Action  of  Arteries 

Veins  - - 

Anion  of  Veins  - 

Abforbents 

Fhyfology  of  Abforption  - « 

Sanguif.cation 
^Neurology 

Nerves  of  the  Brain 

■■  fpinal  Marrow 

Great  intercofial  Nerves 

Fhyfology  of  the  Functions  of  the  nervous  Syfem 

Smelling 

Seeing 

Hearing 

‘Tailing  »• 

Touching 

Adenology 

Glands  of  the  Shin  - 

Cranium 

Neck 

. ■ ■ - Thora-.t 

« ...  — Abdomen 


— Male  Organs, 

— Female  Organs 


Fhyfiology  of  Secretion 
Splanchnology 
Common  Integuments 
Fhyfiology  of  Pcrfpiration 
y fccra  of  the  Head 

Dura  Mater  * ' 

Membrana  arachnoidea 
Fia  Mater 
Brain  _ 

Cerebellum 
Medulla  oblongata 

Anion  of  the  Cerebrum,  Cerebellum , Medulla  oblongata , 
and  Medulla  fpinalis 

Bye 

Bar  « 

' ifc  : . 5 


Page 

94 

96 

98  ' 
100 
107 
ib. 

117 

Il8 

123 

124 
128 

129 
ib* 

130 

136 

140 

141 

142 

ib. 

143 

144 
ib. 

145 

146 
ib . 

148 

149 

ib. 

150 

1 si 
15 * 

*J3 

154 

155 

156 

157 

ib. 

158 
ib. 

IS  9 
ib. 
ib. 

160 

161 

163 

164 
MotttA 


( 7 > 


Mouth 

Pbyfiology  of  Mafication 

' Tongue 

Fauces 

Pharynx 

Oefopbagus  ~ “ 

Pbyfiology  of  Deglutition 
Larynx  - 

Pbyfiology  of  the  Voice 
Speech 

Ventriloquifm 

Trachea 

Breafs 

Pleura 

Diaphragm 

Lungs 

Phyfology  of  Refpiration 

Pericardium 

Heart 

Circulation  of  the  Blood  - 

Of  the  Abdomen  and  its  Vifcera 
Peritoneum 

Omentum  ~ — 

Stomach 

Digefion,  or-  Cbymif  cation 
Intefines  - 

Chylif cation  - 

Expulfisn  of  the  Faces 
Mefentery 
Liver 

Gall-bladder 

Spleen 

Pancreas 

LaHeals 

Kidneys 

Excretion  of  the  Urine 

Supra-renal  Capfule  - 

Of  the  Pelvis 

Urinary  Bladder 

Male  Organs  of  Generation 

Penis 

‘Teficles 

Secretion  and  Excretion  of  the  Semen 

Vefcula  feminales 

Female  Organs  of  Generation 

Vagina 

Uterus 

Phyfology  of  Menfruation 


P-ACE 

164 

165 
ib. 

l66 

ib- 

ihj 

ib. 

168 

169 
ib. 
ib. 
ib. 

170 
171 

ib. 

17  a 
*73 
i74 
ib. 
i77 

179 
ib. 
lb. 

180 

181 

.18  a 

184 
ib. 
il. 

185 

186 
ib • 

187 
ib. 

188 
ib. 

189 
ib, 
ib. 

190 
ib. 

191 
19Z 
193 
J94 

ib. 

ib. 

*9S  . 

Pbyfiology 


Plyjiotogy  of  Conception  ■-  . 

Of  the  gravid  Uterus  - 

Placenta  - „ 

Funiculus  umbilicalis 
Membranous  Ovum  of  the  Fatus 
Liquor  Amnii  - 

Fatus  . 

Peculiarities  in  the  arterial  and  venal  Syfcm  of  the 
Fatus  - i _ 

Circulation  of  tie  Flood. in  tbe  Fatus 
Hvgrology 

The  Blood  ~ _ 

The  Lymph 

The  Vapour  of  the  Sheaths  of  tBi  Nerves. 

Fluids  in  the  Cavity  of  the  Cranium 

— — — — Nofrils 

— Mouth  _ 

Fauces 


Fyes 


Neck 


Ears 

Thorax 


Er.eafs 
■ Abdomen 

Farts  of  Generation  in  Men 

- — Women 


Articulations 

Bones 


A Glossary 


of  the  comyson  Integuments. 


Page 

196 

*9r 

4 

198 

si. 

ib. 

199 

ib. 

200 

ib. 

20 1 
202 

ib. 

ft. 

203 

ib. 

ib. 

ib. 

205 

ib. 

206 

ib. 

20 7 

20  3 

209 

210 
ib. 
ib. 

2X3, 


ANATOMY 


ANATOMY, 


A SCIENCE  which  explains  the  ftm&ure 
and  ufe  of  every  part  of  the  human  body. 

The  examination  of  brute  animals,  fillies, 
reptiles,  plants,  polypi,  &c,  in  order  to  illus- 
trate more  clearly,  or  to  demonftrate  by  anal- 
ogy the  ftru&ure  and  fun&ions  of  man,  is 
called  Comparative  Anatomy. 


Anatomy  is  divided  into  nine  parts — namely. 


Ofleology, 

r 

Syndefmology, 

<D 

Myology, 

Burfalogy, 

o 

CL) 

Angiology, 

Ls  i 

J— 1 

Neurology, 

dj 

Adenology, 

o 

u 

Splanchnology, 

o 

Hygrology, 

V. 

Bones. 

Ligaments. 

Mufcles. 

Burfae  mucofse. 
Veffels. 

Nerves. 

Glands. 

Vifcera. 

Fluids. 


OSTEOLOGY, 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  BONES. 

Bones  are  hard  fubftances  compofed  of 
animal  earth  and  gluten,  which  Support  and 

form . 


( 16  ) 

form  the  ftature-of  the  body,  defend  -its  vif- 
cera,  and  give  adhefion  to  its  mufeles.  Sub- 
stance. Compact,  as  in  the  bodies  of  the 
long  bones ; fpongy , as  in  the  extremities  of 
the  long  bones' ; and  reticular , called  alio  the 
cancelli  of  bones,  as  in  the  cavities  of  bones 
which  have  marrow.  Colour.  Whitiih.  Fig- 
ure. Various.  Division.  Long  and  irregular 
lhaped  bones  are  divided  into  a body  and  ex- 
tremities ; and  flat  bones  into  body  and  mar- 
gins. Bones  are  varioully  named  ; fome  from 
their  fituation,  as  the  frontal,  parietal,  occipi- 
tal, nafal,  malar,  &c.  ; others,  from  their  fig- 
ure, as  the  ethmoid  bone,clavicle,  os  cuboides 
naviculare,  tibia,  &c.  ; and  fome  from  their 
ufe,  as  the  fphaenoid  bone,  the  maxillary  bone, 
the  femur,  &c.  The  procejjes  and  cavities  of 
bones  are  named  after  their  figure,  as  the  ace- 
tabulum of  the  os  innominatum,  the  odontoid 
procefs  of  the  fecond  cervical  vertebra,  the 
coracoid  procefs  of  the  fcapula,  Sec.  ; or  from 
their  ufe,  as  the  trochanters  of  the  thigh  bone  ; 
or  from  their  fituation,  as  the  nafal,  palatine,; 
orbitar  procelfes,  &c.  See. 

When  the  bones  are  deprived  of  their  foft 
parts,  and  hung  together,  in  their  natural  fitu- 
ation, by  means  of  wire,  the  whole  is  termed 
an  artificial  Jheleton  : but  when  they  are  kept 
together  by  means  of  their  ligaments,  it  is  call- 
ed a natural  fkeleton. 


A Table 


Bones  of  the  Tk.uk  k . B ones  of  the  HeAd. 


( » ) 


/}  Table  of  the  Bones. 


r 


The  bones  of  the 
cranium,  or  Jkull 


The  bones 
face 


of  the 


' Os  frontis 
Offa  parietaiia 
Os  occipitis 
Offa  temporalia 
Os  ethmoides 

— fphaenoides 
Offa  maxillaria  fup. 

jugalia 

nafalia 

lachrymalia  - 

— r — palatina 

fpongiofa  infer. 

Os  vomer  * 

— maxillare  infer. 


f Incifores 
| Cufpidati 

Dentes,  or  teeth.  <j  Bicufpides 
I Molares 
[_  Sapientias 

Bone  of  the  tongue , or  Os  hyoides 


No 

1 

2 

1 

2 
I 

1 

2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
I 
I 
8 


Bones  of  the  internal  f" Malleus 

2 

ear,  fituated  with-  \ Incus 

2 

in  the 
bone 

temporal  J Stapes 

f^Os  orbiculare 

2 

2 

f Cervical 

7 

f Vertebra  -j  Dorfal 

12 

The  fplnt 

I L Lumbar 

j Sacrum 

5 

i 

h Os  coccygis 

i 

The  thorax 

J Sternum  - 

l Ribs 

i 

H 

The  pelvis 

Ofia  innominata 

2 

Bote* 


*i  4*  00  004*. 


( *2  ) 


w 

p 

S 

W 

Dl 

b 

K 

w 


The  Jhoulder 
The  arm 
The  fore-arm 


f Clavicula 
I Scapula 
Os  humeri 
f Ulna 
Radius 

f Os  naviculare 
lunare 


e 

o 

FQ 


<U  n 

' ‘s  S 

H 

g H 

o M 

CQ  a< 

^ w 

•s 

o 

J-] 


The  hand 

' The 
The  leg 

The  feet 


’ Carpus,  or  rvrijl  < 


Metacarpus 

Phalanges 


cuneiforme 

orbiculare 

trapezium 

trapezoides 

magnum 

unciforme 


Tarfus 


I Metatarfus 
[_  Phalanges 


Os  femoris 
f Patella 
4 Tibia 
Fibula, 

Os  calcis 
aftragalus 
cuboides 
naviculare 
L cuneiformia 


No. 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

IO 

28 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

* 

6 

io 

28 


240 


Sefamotd  hones  of  the  thumb  and  great  toe,  occa-7  o 
fionally  found  - - - j 

Total  248 


The  fkeleton  is  divided  into  head,- trunk,  and  Extremi- 


ties. 


OF 


( J3  ) 


OF  THE  HEAD. 

The  head  is  divided  into  the  cranium  and  face. 
OF  THE  CRANIUM,  OR  SKULL. 

Shape.  Various,  according  to  the  cuftoms 
of  different  nations,  the  bones  of  the  chiid  be- 
ing fo  tender  as  to  be  moulded  into  almoft  any 
form.  It  is  composed  of  eight  bones— viz.  one 
os  frontis,  which  forms  the  forehead  ; two 
offa  parietalia,  fituated  at  the  upper  part  and 
fides  of  the  head  ; two  offa  temporum,  placed 
below  the  parietal  bones  ; one  occipital,  form- 
ing the  back  part  of  the  head  ; one  jphaenoidal, 
placed  in  the  middle  of  the  bans  of  the.  crani- 
um ; and  one  -ethmoid,  fituated  behind  the 
root  of  the  nofe. 

Upon  viewing  the  fuperior  part  of  a fkull  ex- 
ternally, feveral  zigzag  lines  are  obfervable  «■ 
that  which  extends  from  one  temple  aero fs 
over  the  head  to  the  other  temple  is  term- 
ed the  coronal  future;  it  unites  the  frontal, 
bone  to  the  two  parietal : that  which  proceeds 
from  behind  one  ear  upwards  acrcfs  to  the  oth- 
er is  the  occipital  or  lambdoidal  future  ; it  unites 
the  occipital  bone  to  the  two  parietal  : and 
the  future  which  extends  upon  the  crown  of 
the  head j from  the  lamb c! c m to 'he  coro- 
nal, uniting  the  two  park.  ' , h call- 

ed  the  paginal.  They  are  s . : ! * 

the  true  future e.  ro  <f  :\ 

B . ' * two  • 


( H ) 

two  fpuriom  or fquamous , which  are  found,  one 
on  each  fide  of  the  cranium,  extending  from 
the  temple  backwards,  in  the  form  of  an 
arch,  and  uniting  part  of  the  temporal  bone 
to  the  parietal.  There  are,  fometimes,  one  or 
more  triangular  fhaped  bones  obferved  in  the 
courfe  of  fome  of  the  futures ; thefe  are  called 
vjficula  triquetra , triangularia , or  Wormiana . 
Befides  thefe  futures,  there  are  feveral  promi- 
nences upon  the  upper  part  of  the  cranium ; two 
in  the  frontal  bone,  one  immediately  over  each 
eye  between  it  and  the  future  •,  one  in  the 
middle  of  each  parietal  bone ; and  one  in 
the  middle  of  the  occipital  : thefe  eminences 
point  out  the  centre  of  olfification  of  thofe 
bones. 

Upon  the  internal  furface  of  the  tipper  part 
of  the  cranium  there  are  a number  of  grooves, 
in  an  arborefeent  form  ; they  are  made  by  the 
fpinous  artery  of  the  dura  mater.  The  fu- 
tures are  here  feen  in  the  form  of  a line,  not 
dove-tailed,  and  the  whole  furface  appears 
more  polilhed  than  the  external. 

The  bones  forming  the  upper  part  of  the 
lku.il,  or,  as  it  is  fometimes  called,  the  calvaria, 
are  compofed  of  an  external  and  an  internal 
table,  which  are  of  a compact  ftrudture,  and 
of  a fpongy  intervening  fubftance,  cailed  the 
medituUium , or  diploei 

The  internal  furface  of  the  bafts  of  the 
cranium  is  divided  naturally  into  eight  confider- 
able  deprej/lons , adapted  to  the  lobes  of  the 
brain  and  cerebellum.  The  two  anterior  are 

immediately 


( *5  ) 

immediately  over  the  orbits,  an'cl  are  feparated 
from  each  other  by  an  obvious  eminence, 
above  the  root  of  the  nofe,  called  crijla  ^ galli . 
Immediately  before  this  eminence  is  a fmall 
hole,  called  the  foramen  caecum  ; and  on  each 
fide  of  it  are  a number  of  perforations,  which 
tranfmit  the  olfactory  nerves  into  the  nofe  ; 
they  are  called  the  foramina  cribrofi.  Faffing 
backwards,  there  are  two  round  holes,  near 
each  other,  one  going  to  the  bottom  of  each  or- 
bit ; thefe  are  for  the  paffage  of  the  optic- 
nerves,  and  are  called  foramina  optica  : beyond 
thefe  holes  there  is  a fmall  cavity,  which  will 
admit  the  end  of  one’s  little  finger,  fur- 
rounded  by  four  proceffes,  two  of  which  are- 
anterior  and  two  pofterior  ; thefe  are  termed 
clinoid  proceffes , and  the  cavity  in  their  middle, 
which  contains  the  pituitary  gland,  the  fella 
turcica.  Under  each  anterior  clinoid  procefs 
is  a confiderable  fiffure,  the  foramen  lacerum 
orbitale  fuperius , which  communicates  with 
the  orbit,  and  tranfmits  the  third,  fourth, 
the  firlt  branch  of  the  fifth,  and  the  fixth  pak 
of  nerves,  and  the  ophthalmic  artery.  Be- 
yond this  fiffure,  proceeding  backwards,  there 
is  a round  and  then  an  oval  hole  ; the  firfc  is 
the  foramen  rotund  ton,  through  which  the 
fecond  branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves 
paffies  ; the  other,  the  foramen  ovale , for  the 
paifage  of  the  third  branch  of  the  fifth 
pair  of  nerves.  Contiguous  to  the.  foramen 
ovale  is  a fmall  hole,  the  foramen fpinofum , 
through  which  the  fpinous  artery  of  the 

dura- 


( I«  ) 

dura  mater  enters.  Between  the  foramen 
ovale  and  the  pofterior  clinoid  procefs,  on 
each  fide  of  the  fella  turcica,  there  is  a con- 
siderable ragged  aperture,  the  carotid  canal , 
which  is  partly  filled  up  with  cartillage  in  the 
frefh  fubjedt,  and  is  for  the  entrance  of  the 
carotid  artery  and  the  exit  of  the  great  inter- 
coftal  nerve.  A projecting  portion  of  bone 
next  prefents  itfelf,  called  the  petrous  portion  of 
the  temporal  bone  : it  has  upon  its  pofterior 
furface  an  oval  opening,  the  meatus  auditorius 
interims , through  which  the  nerve  for  the 
organ  of  hearing,,  and  the  facial  nerve,  enter. 
Immediately  below  this  is  an  irregular  oval 
opening,  formed  by  the  junction  of  the  oc- 
cipital with  the  temporal  bone  ; this  is  the  fo- 
ramen lacerum  in  bafi  cran'd  : through  the  ante- 
rior parts  pa fl'es  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves, 
mid  the  pofterior  part  tram'rnits  the  blood 
from  the  lateral  ftnus  of  the  dura  mater, 
v/hofe  courfe  is  marked  by  a deep  groove  lead- 
ing to  the  foramen  lacerum,  into  the  jugular 
vein.  The  portion  of  bone  which  proceeds 
backwards  from  the  pofterior  clinoid  proc- 
eifes,  between  the  petrous  portions  of  the 
temporal  bone,  is  the  cuneiform  procefs  of  the 
occipital  bone ; it  is  fomewhat  hollowed  for 
the  reception  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  which 
lies  upon  it.  At  the  bottom  of  this  procefs 
of  bone  is  a conftderable  opening,  called  the 
foramen  magnum  occipitale  ; it  tranfmits  the 
fpinal  marrow,  the  vertebral  arteries,  and  the 
acceffory  nerves  cf  Willis,  and  a procefs 


( n ) 

of  the  fecond  vertebra  of  the  neck  lies 
in  its  anterior  part.  Between  this  opening 
and  the  foramen  lacerum  in  bad  cranii  is  the 
foramen  condyloideum  anterius , which  gives 
paflage-to  the  lingual  pair  of  nerves.  Beyond 
the  great  occipital  foramen  is  a crucial  emi- 
nence., to  which  proceifes  of  the  dura  mater 
are  attached  ; the  horizontal  eminence  fega- 
rates  the  two  fuperior  occipital  cavities  from 
the  two  inferior. 

FRONTAL  BONE. 

Situated  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  IkuIJ, 
forming  the  forehead  and  upper  part  of  the  or- 
bits. Figure  like  a cookle-theH.  Processes. 
Two  frontal  eminences , which  mark  the  centres 
of  offification  ; two  frontal  tuber  of  ties  ^ which 
arefituated  over  the  frontal  fmufes;  two  ftper - 
ciliary  ridges  or  arches , which  give  origin  to 
the  frontal  mufcles,  and  whole  extremities  are 
called  the  angular  or  orbital*  proceiTes  ; an  ex- 
ternalfrontal ' fpine , upon  which  the  ofia  nan 
reft;  an  internal  frontal  fpine , to  which  the  dura 
mater  adheres  ; and  two  orbitar  plates , which 
feparate  the  orbits  from  the  cavity  of  the  cra- 
nium. Cavities.  The  cerebral  cavity  which 
contains  the  anterior  portions  of  the  hemii- 
pheres  of  the  brain  : a large  notch  between  the 
orbitar  plates  for  the  Situation  of  the  cribriform 
plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone  ; two  frontal  ox  pitui- 
tary fmufes  within  the  bone,  above  the  root  of 
the  nofe ; two  orbital  cavities , in  which  are  two 
B 2 deprefiions 


( to  ) 

tlepreflions  for  the  fituation  of  the  lachrymal 
gland  ; a notch  in  each  fuperciliary  ridge  for 
the  trochlea  of  the  fuperior  oblique  mufcle  j 
a fuperciliary  foramen,  through  which  paffes  the 
frontal  artery  and  nerve  ; the  foramen  c cecum , 
fituated  below  the  beginning  of  the  internal 
frontal  fpine.  Connexion.  The  frontal  bone 
is  conneded  with  the  two  parietal  by  means  of 
the  coronal  future  ; with  the  two  offanali,  the 
two  fuperior  maxillary  bones  and  the  two  lach- 
rymal bones,  by  means  of  what  is  called  the 
cranfuerfe future  ; with  the  fphasnoid  bone  by 
means  of  harmony,  called  harmonia  fpheenoid- 
a'lis  ; with  the  ethmoid  bone  by  harmonia  eth- 
moidalis , and  with  the  os  jugale,  by  means  of 
future.  The  use  of  the  frontal  bone  is  to 
conftitute  the  forehead,  pituitary  finufes,  part 
of  the  orbit,  and  to  contain  and  defend  the 
anterior  lobes  of  the  brain. 

PARIETAL  BONES. 

Situation.  One  on  each  fide  of  the  fupe- 
rior part  of  the  cranium.  Figure.  Arched,  and 
fomewhat  quadrangular.  Division.  Into  an 
external  and  an  internal  furface  and  four  an- 
gles, viz.  the.  frontal,  fphamoidal,  called  aJfo  the 
fpinous  procefs,  the  occipital  and  mafloid.  Cavi- 
ties. A femicircular  ridge,  from  which  the  tem- 
poral mufcle  originates ; and  the  foramen  par i- 
etale , which  is  near  the  fagittal  future,  and 
tranfmits  an  artery  and  a vein  of  the  dura  ma- 
ter. Upon  its  internal  furface  are  the  grooves 


( l9  ) 

of  the  fpinous  artery  ; and  when  the  two  bones 
are  united,  there  is  a deep  cavity  extending  a- 
long  the  fagittal  future,  for  the  longitudinal 
finus  of  the  dura  mater.  Each  parietal  bone  is 
connected  with  its  fellow  by  means  of  the 
fagittal  future  ; with  the  frontal  bone  by  the 
coronal  future ; with  the  occipital  by  the  lamb- 
doidal  future  ; and  with  the  temporal  by  the 
fquamous  future.  The  use  of  thefe  bones  is, 
to  form  the  fuperior  part  of  the  cranium.— 
Synonims.  Olfa  verticis,  fyncipitis,  vertical^ 
vel  bregmatis. 


occipital  bone. 

Situation.  In  the  poflerior  part  of  the  era- 
nium.  Figure.  Quadrate  oblong.  Exter- 
nal processes.  The  occipital  tubercle , in  the 
middle  of  the  bone  to  which  the  ligamentum, 
nuchae  adheres  : a iranfverfe  fpine , proceed- 
ing from  each  fide  of  the  tubercle,  to  which 
the  trapezius  and  complexus  mufcles  are  at- 
tached ; a lejfer  tranfverfe  fpine , below’  the 
former,  for  the  infertion  of  the  refti  mufcles  ; 
a prominent  ridge  running  downwards  from 
the  occipital  tubercle,  and  forming,  with  the  a- 
bove-mentioned  ridges,  a crucial  fpine  ; the 
cuneiform  or  bafilary  procefs , fituated  before  the 
great  foramen  ; two  condyloid  proceffes  or  con- 
dyles',  which  are  united  to  the  fir  ft  vertebra  of 
the  neck.  Internal  processes.  An  inter- 
nal crucial  fpine ; the  fuperior  branch  gives 
adhefioa  to  the  longitudinal  finus  of  the  dura 

mater, 


( 20  5 

mater,  the  two  lateral,  to  the  lateral  fmttfes 
and  the  inferior  to  the  feptum  cerebelli. 
Cavities.  The  foramen  magnum  occipital?, 
through  which  the  fpinal  marrow  proceeds 
into  the  fpine,  and  the  vertebral  arteries  and 
acceflbry  fpinal  nerves  into  the  cranium  ; 
two  anterior  condyloid  foramina , for  the  paf- 
fage  of  the  lingual  pair  of  nerves  ; two  pofterior 
condyloid foramina  (which  are  fometimes  want- 
ing), for  the  paflage  of  the  occipital  vein  into 
the  lateral  firms  ; two  notches , which,  with  two 
correfponding  notches  of  the  temporal  bones, 
form  that  foramina  lacera  in  baft  cranii , for  the 
paftage  of  the  blood  from  the  lateral  finufes 
into  the  jugular  vein  and  the  exit  of  the  par 
vagum  ; a confiderable  groove  leading  to 
the  above  notches,  in  which  the  lateral 
fmufes  are  fituated.  The  internal,  furface 
has  alfo  four  confiderable  depreffons  formed 
by  the  crucial  fpine  ; the  two  fuperior  con- 
tain the  pofterior  lobes  of  the  brain,  and 
the  two  inferior,  the  two  lobes  of  the 
cerebellum.  Connexion.  The  occipital 
bone  is  connected  by  the  cuneiform  procefs 
to  the  fphasnoid  bone,  in  the  adult  by  fyn- 
oftofis  ",  hence  Profeffor  Soemmering  de- 
feribes  them  as  one  bone,  os  occipito-fphanoi- 
dalc  ; but  in  youth  by  fynchondrofis ; with 
the  two  parietal  and  two  temporal  bones  by 
the  lambdoidal  future  ; with  the  firft  vertebra 
of  the  neck  by  ginglymus,  and  with  the 
feconcl  by  fyndefmofis.  The  use  of  the  oc- 
cipital bone  is  to  conftitute  the  pofterior 


C 21  ) 

and  inferior  part  of  the  cranium  ; to  contain 
the  pofterior  lobes  of  the  brain,  the  cerebel- 
lum and  me  dulla  oblongata,  and  to  ferve  for 
the  articulation  of  the  head  with  the  fpine. 
Synonims.  Os  bafilare,  os  memorise,  and  os 
nervofum. 

SPHJEKOID  BONE. 

Situated  in  the  middle  of  the  bafis  of 
the  cranium,  extending  underneath  from  one 
temple  acrofs  to  the  other.  Figure.  Irregu- 
lar, compared  to  a bat  with  its  wings  extend- 
ed. External  processes.  Two  alee  ma- 
jores , whofe  anterior  part  forms  a portion  of 
the  orbit ; the  inner  furface  has  lying  upon 
it  a portion  of  the  middle  lobe  of  the  brain, 
and  the  -whole  external  furface  is  covered  by 
the  temporal  mufcle.  Two  fpinous  procejfes , a 
narrow  point  projecting  behind  each  foramen 
fpinofum.  The  fphanoidal  fpine , or  azygous 
procefs , upon  which  the  bafis  of  the  vomer 
lies.  Two  pterygoid  procejfe. r,  each  of  which  is 
diftinguifhed  into  a root  and  two  extended 
plates,  or  wings  ; one  external,  which  gives 
origin  on  its  external  furface  to  the  pterygo- 
ideus  extemus  mufcle,  and  on  its  internal 
furface  to  the  pterygoideus  internus  mufcle  j 
and  the  other  internal.  Two  hamular  or  hook- 
likk  precedes,  one  on  the  end  of  the  internal 
wing  of  each  pterygoid  procefs,  over  which 
the  tendon  of  the  circumflexus  or  tenfor 
spalati  mufcle  turns.  Internal  processes. 

Two 


( 22  ) 

Two  ala  minores , which  form,  the  upper 
part  of  the  fuperior  orbital  Mures.  Four 
clinoid  procejfes , two  anterior  and  two  pof- 
terior.  External  cavities.  The  fphano- 
idal  pituitary  ftnus , which  is  in.  the  middle  of 
the  bone,  has  a communication  with  the  nof- 
trils,  and  is  divided  by  an  intermediate  feptum. 
Two  pterygoid  deprejjions , one  between  each 
greater  and  leffer  wing,  for  the  reception  of  a 
part,  of  the  palate  bone.  Two  foramina,  each 
leading  to  a canal,  called  the  pterygoid  or  Vi- 
ditan  canal , in  the  root  of  the  pterygoid  proc- 
efs,  through  which  the  recurrent  or  Viduan 
branch  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves  palfes  into 
the  cranium.  Internal  cavities.  Th t fel- 
laturcica , or  ephippium , which  is  furrounded  by 
the  four  clinoid  procelfes,  and  contains  the  pit- 
uitary gland.  Two  foramina  optica , one  be- 
fore each  anterior  clinoid  procefs,  which  tranf- 
mit  the  optic  nerves.  Two  grooves,  one  on 
each  fide  of  the  fella  turcica,  betv/een  the  ante- 
rior and  pofterior  clinoid  procelfes,  formed  by 
the  pttlfation  of  the  carotid  arteries.  Two  fo- 
ramina lac  era  orbit  alia  fuperior  a,  between  each 
greater  and  leffer  wing,  through  which  the 
third,  fourth,  fil'd  branch  of  the  fifth,  and  the 
fixth  pair  of  nerves,  and  the  ophthalmic  artery 
pafs  out  of  the  cranium.  Two  foramina  ro- 
tunda., for  the  pipage  of  the  fecond  branch  of 
the  fifth  pair  of  nerves.  Two  foramina  ovedia , 
for  the  third  branch  of  the  fifth  pair,  Two 
foramina  fpinofa , through  which  the  fpinou.s 
^1'tery  of  the  dura  mater  enters  the  cranium, 

Thi 


C 23  ) 

The  Iphaenoid  bone  is  connected  'with  all 
the  bones  of  the  cranium  ; with  the  frontal, 
the  ethmoid,  the  two  parietal,  and  the  two 
temporal  by  harmony,  and  with  the  occipital 
by  fynoftofis : it  is  alfo  united  to  the  two  cheek 
bones,  the  two  fuperior  maxillary  bones,  and 
the  two  palate  bones,  by  harmony,  and  to  the 
vomer  by  gomphofis.  Its  use  is  to  form  the 
balls  of  the  cranium,  to  concur  in  forming 
the  orbits,  the  pituitary  fmufes  of  the 
nofe,  the  temples,  Sec.  and  to  contain  the 
middle  lobes  of  the  brain. — Synonims.— 
Os  multiforme,  03  cuneiforme,  os  ptery- 
goideum. 

TEMPORAL  BONES. 

Situation.  At  the  Tides  and  inferior 
part  of  the  cranium.  Figure.  Irregular. 
Division.  Into  a fquamous  portion,  which 
is  flat,  and  forms  the  fquamous  future  ; and 
a petrous  portion,  which  is  very  irregular, 
and  is  fiiuated  in  the  bafis  of  the  Audi. 
Processes.  The  zygomatic  proccfs , which, 
with  a procefs  of  the  os  jugaie,  forms  the 
zygoma , yoke,  or  arch  of  the  temples,  un= 
derneath  wThich  the  temporal  mufcle  movqs, 
and  from  whofe  lower  edge  feveral  mufcles  of 
the  face  arife,  particularly  the  mafieter  and 
zygomatic.  The  majloid  or  mammary  procefs , 
which  projects  from  under  the  ear,  and 
has  inferted  into  its  anterior  part  the  fterno- 

deido-maftoideus 


( 24  ) 

cleido-maftoideus  mufde,  and  into  its  pofte- 
rior  part  the  cciiiplexus,  the  obliqutis  and 
trachelo-maftoideus.  The Jiyloidprocefs , which 
is  long  and  pointed,  and  gives  origin  to  a 
ligament  of  the  os  hyoides,  alfo  to  the  ftylo- 
hyoideus,  ftylo-pharyngeus,  and  ftylo-gloffus 
mufcles.  The  -vaginal  procefs , which  fur- 
rounds  the  root  of  the  ftyloid.  The  auditory 
procefs , or  outer  bony  circle  of  the  auditory 
paffage,  to  which  the  membrana  tympani  and 
cartilage  of  the  ear  are  fixed.  Cavities. 
The  meatus  auditorius  externus , which  leads 
to  the  cavity  of  the  organ  of  hearing.  The 
meatus  auditorius  interims,  which  begins  on 
the  internal  and  pofterior  furface  of  the 
petrous  portion,  and  tranfmits  the  feventh 
pair  of  nerves  ; it  has  immediately  within  it 
the  internal  opening  of  the  aquedudt  of  Fal- 
lopius. Each  temporal  bone  is  connected 
with  the  parietal  by  the  fquamous  future  ; 
with  the  occipital  by  the  lambdoida!  future 
with  the  fphrenoid  and  jugal  bones  by  har- 
mony, and  with  the  lower  jaw  by  arthrodia. 
Substance.  The  fquamous  portion  confifts 
of  two  tables  and  a diploe  ; the  mammary 
procefs  of  cells  which  communicate  with  the 
cavity  of  the  organ  of  hearing  ; and  the  pe- 
trous portion  is  very  hard  and  compact. 
Use.  To  contain  the  middle  lobes  of  the 
brain,  and  the  organ  of  hearing  ; and  to  con- 
cur in  forming  the  temples  and  the  bafis  of 
the  cranium. 


ethmoid 


( ) 


ETHMOID  BONE. 

'Situation.  In  the  anterior  part  of  the 
"bafts  of  the  cranium,  above  the  root  of  the 
nofe  and  between  the  orbits.  Figure.  Cube- 
like. Processes.  A cerebral  or  cribriform 
plate , which  lies  horizontally  above  the  root 
of  the  nofe  within  the  cavity  of  the  cranium  : 
it  is  every  where  perforated  by  a number  of 
fmall  foramina,  through  which  the  olfactory 
nerves  pafs  into  the  cavity  of  the  noftrils. 
The  crifta  galli,  a procefs  fomewhat  like  a 
cock’s  comb,  which  proceeds  upwards  from 
the  middle  of  the  cribriform  plate,  and  has 
attached  to  it  the  falciform  procefs  of  the 
dura  mater.  Two  orbitar  plates , called  alfo 
of  a plana , and  plana  papyracea , which  are 
very  fmooth  externally,  and  form  the  inner 
fide  of  the  orbits.  The  feptum  ethmoidale , 
r.afal  plate , azygous  procefs , or  perpendicular 
lamina , a confiderable  procefs,  defeending  di- 
rectly under  the  crifta  galli  into  the  cavity  of 
the  nofe,  and  forming  with  the  vomer  the 
feptum  narium.  Two  cavernous  fubjlances , 
which  are  curled,  like  a piece  of  parchment, 
one  on  each  fide  of  the  feptum,  called  the 
fuperior  turbinated,  or  fpongy  bones.  Cavi- 
ties. A number  of  cribriform  foraminula , 
fituated  on  each  fide  of  the  crifta  galli.  Two 
foramina  orbitalia  nafi , one  fituated  in  the  line 
of  union  between  the  frontal  bone  and  erbitar 
plate  of  the  ethmoid,  for  the  pafiage  of  the 
C nafal 


( *6  ) 

nafhl  branch  of  the  orbital  nerve.  A num- 
ber of  cells,  which  compofe  the  internal  part 
of  the  bone,  and  form  the  pituitary  finufes 
of  the  ethmoid  bone.  The  ethmoid  bone  is 
connected  with  the  os  frontis,  the  two 
nafal  bones,  the  two  fuperior  maxillary,  the 
two  palatine,  the  fphaenoid  bone,  and  the 
vomer  by  harmony.  Use.  To  form  an  ex- 
tenfive  furface  for  the  organ  of  fmell,  to 
confiilute  part  of  the  nofe,  orbits,  and  cra- 
nium. 

OF  THE  FACE. 

The  bones  of  the  face  are  fourteen  in 
number,  and  are  divided  into  thofe  of  the 
upper  and  under  jaw.  The  upper  jaw  is 
formed  of  thirteen  bones,  viz.  two  fuperior 
maxillary,  two  nafal,  two  palatine,  two  jugal, 
or  malar,  two  inferior  fpongy,  'two  lachrymal, 
and  the  vomer,  which  are  united  to  the 
cranium,  and  with  one  another,  by  harmony. 
The  under  jaw  con  fids  of  one  bone. 

There  is  an  obvious  line,  beginning  at  the 
external  angle  of  the  orbit,  where  the  frontal 
bone  is  united  to  the  cheek  bone,  which  leads 
to  the  inferior  opening  in  the  orbit,  proceeds 
upwards  to  the  nofe,  whofe  root  it  croffes, 
and  then  traverfes  the  other  orbit  to  the  ex- 
ternal angle  : this  is  called  the  tranfverjc 
future.  The  other  harmonies  of  the  face 
are  named  after  the  bones  which  they  unite, 
as  the  zygomatic,  nafal,  palatine  harmonies,  &c. 

SUPERIOR 


s 27  ) 


SUPERIOR  MAXILLARY  BOXES. 

Situated  in  the  anterior  and  middle  part 
of  the  face.  Figure.  Irregular.  Process- 
es. The  nafal  procefs,  which  forms  the  fide 
of  the  nofe.  The  orbitar  procefs , or  plate , 
which  forms  part  of  the  orbit.  The  via lea- 
procefs , by  which  it  is  united  to  the  cheek- 
bone. The  alveolar  procefs , in  which  the 
teeth  are  lituated.  The  palate  procefs , which 
forms  the  palate.  A fpine,  formed  by  the 
union  of  each  palate  portion,  upon  which  the 
vomer  reifs.  The  orbital  margin.  Cavities. 
The  antrum  maxillare ; called  alfo,  ant  run 
Highmori  and  fonts  maxillaris  pituitarius , in 
the  body  of  the  bone,  between  the  orbital  and 
palate  proceffes  ; it  has  an  opening  into  the 
noflrils.  The  infra-orbital  canal, , which  opens 
under  the  margin  of  the  orbit,  and  tranfmits 
the  infra-orbital  nerve.  The  lachrymal  de- 
preffton , fituated  in  the  fuperior  and  internal 
part  of  the  nafal  procefs,  for  the  fituation  of 
the  lachrymal  fac  ; it  leads  to  the  canalis  na- 
falis , which  conveys  the  tears  into  the  noflrils. 
The  pofterior  palatine  foramen , near  the  lalt 
tooth  on  the  infide,  for  the  paflage  of  the 
alveolar  nerve.  A notch  on  the  anterior  part 
of  the  palatine  procefs,  which  with  the  cor- 
refponding  notch  of  the  other  fuperior  max- 
illary bone,  forms  the  foramen  palatinum  anti- 
rum.  or  foramen  incifivum , which  tranfmits  the 
anterior  palatine  nerve  and  artery.  Con- 
nexion. 


C 23  ) 

nexion.  Each  fuperior  maxillary  bone  is 
connected  with  its  fellow,  with  the  os  fronds, 
one  os  nafi,  one  lachrymal  bone,  the  ethmoid, 
fphsenoid,  one  os  jugale,  one  palatine  bone, 
and  one  inferior  fpongy  bone,  by  harmony, 
and  with  the  vomer  and  teeth  by  gomphofis. 
Use.  The  ufe  of  thefe  bones  is  to  form  part 
of  the  face,  palate,  nofe,  noftrils  and  orbits, 
and  to  afford  a convenient  fituation  for  the 
organ  of  maftication.. 

JUGULAR,  OR.  MALAR  BONES. 

Situation.  At  the  fides  of  the  face.  Fig- 
ure. Almolt  quadrate.  Processes.  The 
upper  orbit  ary  procefs , which  forms  part  of  the 
orbit  and  the  fharp  edge  of  the  temple.  The 
inferior  orbit  ary  procefs , oppofite  to,  the  for- 
mer, and  conlfitudng  in  part  the  bottom  of 
the  orbit  and  the  edge  of  the  cheek.  The 
internal  orbiiary  procefs , which  alfo  forms  a 
part  of  the  orbit.  The  maxillary  procefs  by 
which  it  is  joined  to  the  fuperior  maxillary 
bone.  The  ■zygomatic  procefs , which  is  joined 
to  the  temporal  bone,  to  form  the  zygoma. 
Connexion.  The  os  jugale  is  united  to  the 
frontal,  fuperior  maxillary,  fphasnoid  and 
temporal  bone.  The  use  of  thefe  bones  is  to 
affift  in  forming  the  face  and  orbits. 


os  9 A 


( 29  ) 


OSSA  NASI,  OR  BONES  OF  THE  NOSE. 

Situated  in  the  fuperior  and  middle  part 
of  the  nofe.  Figure.  Quadrangular  and 
oblong.  Substance.  Compadt.  Use.  To 
form  the  bridge  and  external  part  of  the 
nofe.  Each  bone  is  connected  with  its 
fellow,  and  the  fuperior  maxillary  bone  by 
harmony  and  with  the  frontal  and  ethmoid 
by  the  tranfverfe  future. 

LACHRYMAL  BONES. 

Situation.  In  the  internal  angle  of  the 
orbit.  Figure,  like  the  nail  of  the  finger. 
Cavities.  A groove,  which  holds  the  lach- 
rymal fac.  Synonim.  Os  unguis.  Con- 
nexion. Each  bone  is  connected  with  the 
frontal,  ethmoid,  fuperior  maxillary  and  in- 
ferior fpongy  bone  by  harmony. 

INFERIOR  spongy  bones. 

Situated  in  the  fide  and  lower  part  of 
the  noftriis.  Figure.  Spiral,  and  convoluted. 
Use.  To  augment  the  furface  of  the  organ 
of  fmelling.  Connexion.  Each  bone  is 
united  with  the  fuperior  maxillary,  the  palate, 
lachrymal  and  ethmoid  bone  by  harmony. 
Synonims.  Ona  turbinata  inferiora,  conchas 
inferiores. 

palatine  bones. 

Situated  in  the  poflerior  part  of  the 
C 2 nofe. 


( 30'.  5' 

nofe,  from  which  they  afcend  laterally  to  the 
orbits.  Figure.  Irregular.  Division.  In- 
to palatine,  pterygoid,  nafal,  and  orbital  por- 
tions.' Processes.  The  palatal  plate,  which 
forms  the  pofterior  part  of  the  roof  of  the 
mouth.  The  pterygoid  procefs , which  is  fitu- 
ated  behind  the  laft  grinder.  The  nafal  proc -■ 
€js,  which  arifes  perpendicularly  from  the 
palate,  and  covers  a part  of  the  antrum  of 
Highmore.  The  orbitary  procefs , which  is 
Situated  in  the  orbit.  Cavities'.  The  pala- 
tine cells , which  communicate  with,  and  form 
part  of  the  fphsenoid  cells.  Use.  To  form 
the  pofterior  part  of  the  palate  and  part  of 
the  nofe  and  orbit.  Each  bone  is  con- 
nected with  its  fellow,  with  the  fuperior 
maxillary  bone,  the  fphcenoid,  ethmoid,  in- 
ferior fpongy  bone  and  vomer  by  harmony. 

VOMER. 

Situated  in  the  middle  of  the  cavity  of 
the  noftrils,  which  it  divides  into  two  parts. 
Figure.  It  refembles  a ploughfhare.  Use, 
To  fuftain  and  divide  the  cavity  of  the  nof- 
Trils.  Connexion.  Superiorly  it  is  united 
with  the  fphcenoid  bone  by  gomphons,  and 
with  the  ethmoid  by  harmony  ; inferiorly 
with  the  fuperior  maxillary  and  palatine  bones 
by  harmony  : anteriorly  it  is  united  to  the  car- 
tilaginous feptum  of  the  nofe. 


LOWER, 


( 31  ) 


LOWER  JAW  B^NE. 

Situation.  In  the  Inferior  and  anterior 
part  of  the  face.  Figure,  like  an  horfefhoe. 
Processes.  Tavo  condyloid , or  articulatory 
_ proceffes , which  are  received  into  the  articulato- 
ry cavities  of  the  temporal  bones.  Two  corono - 
id  proceffes , which  are  fharp  pointed,  and  give 
adhefion  to  the  temporal  mufcles.  The  alveo 
lar  procefs , in  which  the  teeth  are  fixed.  The 
fymphyfis  of  the  jaw,  in  the  middle  of  the  chin* 
The  inferior  margin,  wrhofe  ends  form  the  an- 
gles of  the  jaw.  Cavities.  A femilunar 
notch , between  each  coronoid  and  condyloid, 
procefs.  Two  poflerior  maxillary  foramina, 
one  above  each  angle,  on  the  inner  furface  of 
the  jaw,  which  tranffnit  the  lower  maxillary 
nerve  and  artery  into  a canal  in  the  middle  of 
the  bone, called  canalis  Mentalis,  which  conducts 
the  fame  artery  and  nerve  to  the  anterior  max- 
illary foramina , upon  the  external  furface  of 
the  bone,  one  on  each  fide  of  the  chin,  from 
whence  the  artery  and  nerve  again  emerge 
upon  the  chin.  Use.  To  retain  the  roots  of  the 
teeth  in  the  alveolar  margin ; to  conftitute 
the  inferior  fegment  of  the  cavity  of  the 
mouth,  and  to  afford  a point  of  adhefion  to 
the  mufcles  of  the  face,  neck,  larynx,  and 
tongue.  Connexion.  The  lower  jaw  is 
connected  with  the  temporal  bones  by  gingly- 
rnus,  with  the  teeth  by  gomphofis,  and  with 
the  cs  hyoides  and  other  parts  by  fyffarcofis. 
Svnonim,  Mandibula, 

' - OF 


( 32  ) 


OF  THE  CAVITIES  OF  THE  FACE  IN 
PARTICULAR, 

ORBITS, 

Situated  under  the  forehead,  at  the  root 
of  the  nofe.  Figure,  canoid.  The  angles 
of  the  orbits  are  called  canthi.  Cavities. 
A deprejfion  for  the  lachrymal  gland  ; a notch 
of  the  orbital  trochlea  ; a deprejfion  for  the 
lachrymal  fac  ; the  canalis  nafalis  for  the  paf- 
fage  of  the  tears ; a fuperior  and  inferior , or 
fphasno-maxillary  orbital  fijfure.  The  fupercili- 
ary  foramen ; the.  infra-orbital  canal',  the  fo- 
ramen nafale , and. the  optic  foramen . Com- 
posed of  feven  bones ; the  frontal,  maxillary, 
jugal,  lachrymal  ; ethmoid,  palatine,  and 
fphasnoid.  Use,  to  contain  and  defend  the 
organ  of  fight  and  its  adjacent  parts. 

CAVITY  OF  THE  NOSTRILS, 

Situated  under  the  anterior  part  ’of  the 
cranium,  in  the  middle  of  the  face.  Figure, 
pyramidal.  Prominences.  The  feptum  na- 
rium  ; the  cavernous  fubfance  of  the  ethmoid 
bone,  improperly  called  the  fuperior  fpongy 
bones  : and  the  inferior  fpongy  bones.  Cavi. 
ties.  Three  pair  of  pituitary  finufes , namely, 
the  frontal,  fphasnoid,  and  maxillary  ; the 
caverns  of  the  ethmoid  labyrinth  ; the  anteri- 
or foramina  of  the  noftrils  ; the  duclus  nafa- 
lis j the  fph  mo-palatine  foramina?  and  the  an- 

lernr 


terior  palatine  foramina.  Composed  of  14 
bones,  viz.  the  frontal ; two  maxillary  ; two 
nafal ; two  lachrymal : two  inferior  fpongy  5 
the  fphsenoid,  vomer,  ethmoid,  and  two  pala- 
tine bones.  Use,  to  form  the  organ  of  fuell- 
ing and  the  pituitary  fmufes  of  the  noftrils, 
and  to  ferve  alfo  for  fpeech  and  refpiration. 

CAVITY  OF  THE.  MOUTH. 

Situated  between  the  upper  and  under 
jaw.  Figure,  anteriorly  ovate.  Divided 
into  upper  and  under  jaw.  Composed  of 
five  bones,  viz.  two  fuperior  maxillary  ; two 
palatine  ; the  lower  jaw-bone,  and  32  teeth. 
Use,  for  mafdcation,  fpeech,  and  refpiration* 

TEETH. 

Situated  in  the  alveoli  or  fockets  of  the 
jaws.  Number,  commonly  32,  16  in  each 
jaw.  Divided  into  four  kinds,  incifores , or 
front  teeth,  four  in  each  jaw  $ cufpidati , one 
on  each  fide  of  the  incifores  ; bici/fpides , two 
on  the  fide  of  each  cufpidatus  ; and  molares , 
or  grinders.  Each  tooth  is  divided  into  a 
crown,  neck,  and  root.  The  substance  of 
the  root  and  internal  part  of  the  crown  is 
compact ; the  external  furface  is  very  hard, 
of  a Ihining  white  colour,  and  is  called  the 
enamel.  Use,  for  maftication,  and  pronun- 
ciation, of  dental  fyliables.  The  teeth  are 
connected  with  the  jaws  by  gomphofis. 

cavity 


( 34  5 


CAVITY  OF  THE  FAUCES. 

Situated  under  the  bafts  of  the  cranium, 
within  the  fuperior  bodies  of  the  vertebrae  and 
poilerior  part  of  the  noftrils.  Figure,  fupe- 
riorly  quadrate.  Composed  of  10  bones, 
viz,,  the  occipital  ; two  palatine  ; the  vomer  ; 
the  bodies  of  the  three  ftrft  vertebrae  j the  os 
hyoides,  and  the  two  temporal  bones.  Use, 
for  the  fttuation  of  the  fauces,  larynx,  pha- 
rynx, and  os  hyoides. 

♦ 

OS  HYOIDES. 

Situated  in  the  fauces,  between  the  bafts 
of  the  tongue  and  larynx.  Figure,  femi- 
lunar.  Prominences,  two  cornua  major  a , 
and  two  cornua  minora.  Use,  to  ferve  for 
the  adhefton  of  the  tongue  ; for  deglutition  ; 
and  for  a point  of  adhefton  to  many  mufcles. 
Synonim.  Os  linguale.  Connexion.  It 
is  connected  with  the  ftyloid  procefs  of  the 
temporal  bone,  the  fcapulse,  lower  jaw,  and 
fternum,  by  various  mufcles,  and  with  the  la- 
rynx by  ligament. 

CAVITY  OF  HEARING. 

Situated  internally  in  the  petrous  por- 
tion of  each  temporal  bone.  Division,  into 
meatus  auditorius  externus  ; cavity  of  the 
tympanum  5 labyrinth  $ and  meatus  audito- 
rius interims.  In  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum 

are, 


C 35  ) 

are,  the  orifice  of  the  Euftachian  tube  ; the 
mafloid  finuofity  ; the  feneftra  ovalis ; the  fe- 
neftra  rotunda,  and  the  officula  auditus.  The 
labyrinth  confifts  of  the  cochlea,  veftibulum 
and  femicircular  canals.  The  cochlea  l\as  a 
bafis,  apex,  modiolus,  fcala  veftibula,  icala 
tympani,  and  a fpiral  lamina.  The  vcjlibu - 
lum  has  a foramen  ovale,  and  the  orifices  of 
the  femicircular  canals.  Use.  The  cavity 
of  hearing  is  the  organ  in  which  hearing  is 
performed. 

QSSICULA  AUDITUS. 

Situated  in  the  cavity  of  the  tympanum. 
Number  4,  viz.  malleus  ; incus  ; fiapes,  and 
os  orbiculare.  Substance,  compact.  Use, 
for  hearing. 

OF  THE  TRUNK. 

The  trunk  of  the  fkeleton  is  divided  into 
the  fpine,  cheft,  loins,  and  pelvis. 

SPINE. 

A long  column,  or  pillar,  which  extends 
in  the  posterior  part  of  the  trunk  from  the  oc- 
cipital bone  to  the  os  facrum.  Composed  of 
24  bones,  called  vertebra,  viz.  7 of  the  neck, 

1 2 of  the  back,  and  5 of  the  loins.  Each  ver- 
tebra is  divided  into  a body , and  7 procejfcs , 
viz.  the  fpinous,  2 fuperior  oblique,  2 inferior 
oblique,  and  0s-  tranfverfe  proceffes.  Cavi- 
ties. The -f final  canal,  called  fpecus , or  theca 

vertcbralis  ; 


( 36  ) 

*vertebra!is  ; and  the  lateral  foramina  of  the 
vertebras.  Connexion.  The  firft  bone 
of  the  fpine  is  connected  with  the  occipital 
bone  by  ginglymus.  The  fecond  vertebra  is 
united  with  the  firft  by  trochoides,  and  with 
the  occipital  bone  by  lyndefmofis.  The  bod- 
ies of  the  vertebrae  are  connected  with  one 
another  by  a peculiar  intervertebral  fubftance ; 
and  pofteriorly  by  a yellow  elaftic  ligament 
and  by  their  oblique  precedes.  Use,  to  flip- 
port  the  head  and  trunk,  and  to  contain  and 
defend  the  fpinal  marrow.  Synonims.  Spina 
dorfi,  columna  fpinalis,  columna  vertebralis. 

CERVICAL  VERTEBRAE. 

The  firft  vertebrae  is  called  atlas.  Pecu- 
liarities. No  body  nor  fpinous  proceiTes, 
but  forms  an  arch , which  anteriorly  furrounds 
the  dentiform  procefs  of  the  fecond  vertebra. 
Inftead  of  upper  oblique  precedes,  there  are 
two  articular  ftnufes.  The  fecond  vertebrae  is 
termed  epiftrophseus,  or  dentatus.  Peculi- 
arities. An  odontoid  or  dentiform  proccfs 
at  the  upper  part  of  the  body.  All  the  tranf- 
verfe  precedes  of  the  remaining  cervical  verte- 
brae have  a peculiar  foramen  for  the  paftage  of 
the  vertebral  arteries. 

DORSAL  VERTEBRA?. 

Peculiarities.  At  the  Tides  of  the  bod- 
ies is  a deprcjfion , and  a fuperficial  one  in  the 
points  of  the  tranfverfe  precedes,  for  the  at- 
tachment of  the  great  and  little  heads  of  the  ribs, 

LUMBAR 


( 37  ) 


LUMBAR  VERTEBRA. 

Peculiarities.  They  are  much  larger 
than  the  dorfal,  and  the  tranfverfe  proceffes 
have  no  depreffions. 

OF  THE  CHEST,  OR  THORAX. 

The  thorax  is  compofed  of  12  dorfal  verte- 
brae,  24  ribs,  and  the  fternum. 

RIBS. 

Situated  obliquely  from  the  dorfal  verte- 
bra to  the  fternum.  Figure,  femicircular. 
Number  24,  twelve  on  each  fide.  Division, 
into  7 true,  which  are  uppermoft,  and  5 fpu- 
r io us . Eminences.  The  great  head , whic h 
is  connected  to  the  bodies  of  the  dorfal 
vertebra  ; the  neck  ; the  lejfer  head , which  is 
joined  to  the  tranfverfe  proceffes  of  the  dorfal 
vertebrae  ; and  the  angle  of  the  rib.  Cavi- 
ties, a longitudinal  groove,  for  the  intercoftal 
artery.  Substance,  anterior  part  cartilagin- 
ous , reft  bcivj  and  compadt.  Connexion. 
Anteriorly  with  the  fternum,  and  pofteriorly 
with  the  bodies  and  tranfverfe  proceffes  of  the 
dorfal  vertebra.  Use,  to  form  the  thorax  ; 
to  ferve  for  refpiration  ; to  defend  the  vital  vif- 
cera,  and  to  give  adhefton  to  mufcles. 

STERNUM. 

Situated  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  tho- 
rax, between  the  true  ribs.  Figure,  fome- 
D ' ' what 


( 3S  ) 

What  like  a dagger.  Cavities,  the  jugular 
finus , at  the  fuperior  and  inner  part ; two  clav* 
icular  finufes , for  the  attachment  of  the  clav- 
icles ; and  7 coftal  depreffions , to  which  the 
libs  adhere.  Substance,  fomewhat  fpongy. 
Use,  to  form  the  thorax,  and  give  adhelion  to 
the  mediaftinum.  Connexion.  The  fternuin 
is  conne&ed  by  arthrodia  with  the  clavicle, 
and  with  the  feven  true  ribs  by  fynchondrofis. 

OF  THE  LOINS. 

The  bones  bf  the  loins  are  five  lumbar 
vertebra. 

OF  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  PELVIS. 

Situated  in  the  lower  region  of  the  trunk. 
Figure,  fomewhat  like  a barber’s  bafom 
Composed  of  4 bones,  viz.  two  offa  innomi- 
nata,  the  os  facrum,  and  os  coccygis.  Use,  to 
contain  the  organs  of  generation  ; the  bladder  5 
inteflinum  redtum  ; and  to  fupport  the  fpine. 

OSSA  innominate 

S 1 tuated  at  the  fides  of  the  pelvis.  Fig- 
ure, irregular.  Division,  each  bone  into 
three  portions,  viz.  ilium  the  uppermoft,  if- 
chium  the  lowed:,  and  pubis  the  anterior. 
Eminences.  The  crifka  of  the  ilium j from 
which  the  oblique  and  tranfverfe  mufcles  of 
the  abdomen  arife — at  its  poflerior  part  are 
two  fpinous  procejfes , which  give  adhefion  to 
ligaments — at  its  anterior  part  are  alfo  two 


( 39  ) 

fpinous  process,  the  fuperior  gives  adhefion  to 
the  fartorius,  tenfor  vaginas  femoris,  and  the 
ligament  of  the  thigh  ; the  inferior  anterior 
fpinous  procefs,  about  an  inch  from  the  former 
has  arifing  from  it  the  recius  femoris.  The 
external  furface  of  the  iliac  portion  is  covered 
by  the  glutasi  mufcles  ; the  internal  by  the  in- 
ternal iliac.  Upon  the  internal  furface  there 
is  a line  even  with  the  pubis ; this  is  called  //- 
nea  innoninata , or  rim  of  the  pelvis  ; it  divides 
the  cavity  of  the  abdomen  from  the  pelvis. 
Upon  the  ifchiatic  portion  or  ifchium  are,  the 
tuberojity  of  the  ifchium,  upon  which  we  fit 
the  fpinous  procefs  of  the  ifchium,  which  pro- 
jects backwards,  and  gives  adhefion  to  the  up- 
permofl  facro-fciatic  ligament ; the  ramus  if 
chii , which  joins  the  pubis.  Upon  the  public 
portion,  or  pubis,  are  the  body , near  the  fock- 
et ; the  angles  and  arches  of  the  pubis.  Cav- 
ities, a notch  between  the  anterior  fpines  of 
the  ilium  : an  anterior  and  pofterior  ifchiatic 
notch  ; the  acetabulum , which  receives  the  head 
of  the  os  femoris,  and  th & foramen  thyroideum , 
or  ovale.  Each  os  kinominatum  is  con- 
nected with  its  fellow  anteriorly  by  fym- 
phyfis,  with  the  facrum  pofteriorly  by  ftrong 
cartilages  and  ligaments,  and  with  the  head 
of  the  thigh  bone  by  enarthrofis.  Use,  to 
form  the  pelvis  ; to  retain  the  gravid  uterus  in* 
its  utuation,  and  to  conftitute  the  acetabulum 
for  the  thighs. 


oa 


( 40  ) 


OS  SACRUM. 

Situated  at  th-e  pofterior  part  of  the  pel- 
vis. Figure,  triangular,  bent  forwards. 
Eminences,  two  fuperior  oblique proceffes  ; ap- 
pearances of  the  fpinous  procefies ^appearanc- 
es of  the  oblique  and  tranfverfe  procefies,  and 
the  appearances  of  the  vertebral  bodiesh  Cav- 
ities, four  pair  of  external , and  four  pair  of 
internal foramina , and  five  longitudinal  middle 
canals.  Use,  to  conftitute  the  pelvis,  and  fuf- 
tain  the  fpirxe.  Connexion.  Superiorly 
with  the  laft  lumbar  vertebras,  laterally  with 
the  offa  innominata,  and  inferioriy  with  the  os 
coccygis. 

os  COCCYGIS. 

Situated  at  the  apex  of  the  facrunw 
Figure,  irregular.  Use,  to  fuftain'  the  rec- 
tum, and  prevent  the  rupture  of  the  perinoeum 
in  parturition.  It  is  connected  to  the  apex 
of  the  facrum. 

OF  THE  SUPERIOR  EXTREMITIES. 

The  bones  of  the  upper  extremities  are,  on 
each  fide,  the  clavicle,  fcapula,  humerus,  ra- 
dius, ulna,  bones  of  the  carpus,  metacarpus, 
and  fingers- 

CLAVICLE. 

Situated  obliquely  in  the  upper  and  lat- 
eral parts  cf  the  thorax.  Figure,  like  the 
letter  f.  Cavities,  a furrow,  or  groove  of 
the  fubclavian  veiTels  on  the  inferior  furface. 

Use* 


Use,  to  connect  the  feapula  and  humerus  to  tug 
thorax,  and  to  defend  the  fubclavian  ye  dels. 
Connexion.  Anteriorly  it  is  articulated  to 
the  fternum,  and  pofteriorly  to  the  feapula,  by 
arthrodia. 

SCAPULA. 

Situated  in  the  upper  and  lateral  part  of 
the  back.  Figure,  triangular.  Eminenc- 
es. The  /pine,  which  is  in  the  middle  of 
the  external  furface.  Its  anterior  termination, 
is  called  the  acromion.  The  coracoid  procefs 
which  hands  out  oppofite  to  the  acromion. 
The  borders  of  the  bone  are  called  cojlce,  and 
the  corners  angles..  The  circle  below  the  ar- 
ticular cavity  is  called  the  neck.  Cavities. 
The  articular  or  glenoid  cavity,  which  receives 
the  head  of  the  humerus.  The  feapula  is 
united  with  the  clavicle  by  arthrodia,  with 
ribs  and  os  hyoides  by  mufcle,  and  with  the  hu- 
merus by  arthrodia.  Use,  to  defend  the 
back,  and  give  articulation  to  the  humerus, 
Synonim.  Oinoplata. 

OS  HUMERI,  OR  OS BRACHID 

Situated  between  the  feapula  and  fore- 
arm. Figure,  long.  Eminences,  the  head , 
which  is  rounded  on  its  fuperior  part  ; the 
neck,  which  is  immediately  below  the  head  ; 
the  greater  tubercle , near  the  neck,  which  re- 
ceives the  fupra  fpinatus  mufeies;  and  the  lejfer 
tubercle,  which  is  near  the  former,  and  has  fix- 
ed to  it  the  fubfcapularisi  On  the  inferior  ex- 
tremity are  three  condyles,  namely,  an  external 

D 2 • and 


C 42  ) 

and  an  internal  condyle,  which  give  origin  to 
the  flexor  and  extenfor  mufcles  of  the  arm  ; 
and  the  trochlea  of  the  humerus.  Cavities, 
a furrow  between  the  tubercles,  for  the  long 
tendon  of  the  biceps.  In  the  inferior  extremi- 
ty, a pofleriar foffa  for  the  anconoid  procefs  of 
• the  ulna,  and  an  anterior  deprejjion , for  the 
coronoid  procefs.  Use,  to  constitute  the  arm. 
Connexion.  The  humerus  is  connected 
with  3 bones  ; with  the  fcapula  by  arthrodia, 
and  the  cubit  and  radius  by  ginglymus. 

CUBIT,  or  ulna. 

Situated  in  the  infide  of  the  fore-arm, 
towards  the  little  finger.  Figure,  long,  and 
thicker  above  than  below.  Eminences,  the 
®hcr  anon , or  anconoid  procefs,  upon  which  we 
lean,  and  the  coronoid  procefs  which  is  oppo- 
site to  it.  In  the  lbwer  extremity  are  the 
lower  head , the  neck , and  the  flyloid  procefs , 
which  gives  a Strong  adhefion  to  the  ligament 
which  Secures  the  wriSt.  Cavities,  the  Sig- 
moid cavity,  at  the  upper  end.  Use,  to  con- 
ftitute the  chief  fupport  of  the  fore-arm.  Con- 
nexion. Superiorly  with  the  trochlea  of  the 
humerus  by  arthrodia,  inferiorly  with  the  car- 
pus by  arthrodia,  and  with  the  radius  by 
irochoides,  as  .in  pronation  and  fupination. 

radius. 

Situated  in  the  external  fide  of  the  fore- 
arm, towards  the  thumb.  Figure,  long. 

Eminences* 


C 43  ) 

Eminences,  upper  head,  which  is  excavated  j 
the  little  head  and  the  Jlyloid  procefs  at  the  in- 
ferior extremity.  Cavity,  the  glenoid  cavity. 
Use,  to  aflift  in  forming  the  fore-arm,  and  to 
ferve  for  flexion,  fupination  and  pronation. 
The  radius  is  connected  to  the  humerus 
by  ginglymus,  to  the  cubit  by  an  interoffeous 
ligament  and  trochoides  j and  to  the  carpus 
by  arthrodia. 

CARPUS,  OR  WRIST. 

Composed  of  8 bones,  which  lie  clofe  to 
each  other,  in  a double  row.  Situated 
between  the  fore-arm  and  metacarpus.  Di- 
vision, into  two  rows,  fuperior  and  inferior. 
Jn  the  fuperior  row  are  (from  the  thumb  to 
the  little  finger),  os  fcaphoides,  or  naviculare ; 
os  lunare  ; os  euneiforme  ; and  os  orbiculare, 
or  fub-rotundum.  In  the  lower  row , os  trape- 
zium, os  trapezoides,  os  magnum,  and  os  un» 
caforme. 

METACARPUS. 

Situated  between  the  carpus  and  fingers. 
Composed  of  5 longitudinal  bones  ; one  of  the 
thumb,  and  four  metacarpal  bones  of  the  fin- 
gers. Use, to  form  the  middle  part  of  the  hand. 

FINGERS. 

Situated  at  the  inferior  extremity  of  the 
metacarpus.  Composed  of  a thumb  and  four 
fingers.  The  thumb  has  two  bones,  and 
each  finger  three,  which  are  called  phalanges. 

Use, 


( 44  ) 

Use,  to  form  the  fingers,  which  are  the  hi* 
ftruments  of  touch,  defence,  and  labour. 

OF  THE  INFERIOR  EXTREMITIES. 

The  bones  of  the  inferior  extremity  are, 
the  femur,  patella,  tibia,  fibula,  the  bones  of 
the  tarfus,  metatarfus,  and  toes. 

FEMUR.  - 

Situated  between  the  pelvis  and  tibia. 
Figure,  long.  Eminences,  the  head , 
which  is  received  into  the  acetabulum  of  the 
os  innominatum,  and  has  a final!  dimple  in 
its  middle,  for-  the  attachment  of  the  round 
, or  retraining  ligament  the  neck , upon  which 
the  head  (lands,  it  is  rough,  and  gives  attach- 
ment to  the  capmlar  ligament  ; the  great 
trochanter , which  is  a large  eminence  below 
the  neck,  for  the  infertion  of  the  glutxi  muf- 
cles  -,  the  little  trochanter , which  receives  the 
pfoas  and  iliacus  interims ; and  a rough  line 
on  the  body  of  the  bone,  called  linea  afpera. 

On  the  inferior  extremity  are  the  external 
and  internal  condyle , and  between  them  pofle- 
riorly  a deep  notch,  for  the  paffage  of  the 
great  artery,  vein,  and  nerv'^of  the  leg.  Usf, 
to  form  part  of  the  lower  extremity.  The 
femur  is  connected  to  the  acetabulum  of 
the  os  innominatum  by  enarthrofts,  and  tathe 
tibia  and  patella  by  ginglymus.  Substance., 
Ccmpafl  on  its  outfide  ; fpongy  in  the  ex- 
tremities \ and  cancellated  internally. 


tibia. 


{ 45  ) 


TIBIA. 

Situated  in  the  infide  of  the  leg,  between 
the  femur  and  tarfus.  Figure,  longitudinal. 
Eminences,  the  upper  bead  of  the  tibia  ; the 
fpine  of  the  tibia,  to  which  the  great  ligament 
of  the  patella  is  fixed  ; and  the  lower  head  of 
the  tibia,,  which  forms  the  outer  ankle. 
Cavities,  two  articular  finufes , in  the  upper 
head,  for  the  reception  of  the  condyles  of  the 
femur  ; and  the  articular  cavity  at  the  fide  of 
the  head  for  the  reception  of  the  fibula.  Use, 
to  fupport  the  leg,  and  ferve  for  the  flexion 
of  the  lower  extremity.  The  tibia  is  con- 
nected to  the  femur  and  patella  by  gingly- 
mus,  to  the  fibula  by  fyneurcfis,  and  to  the 
aftragalus  by  arthrodia. 

FIBULA. 

Situated  in  the  outer  part  of  the  leg,  by 
the  fide  of  the  tibia.  Figure,  longitudinal. 
Eminences,  the  head  of  the  fibula,  at  the 
upper  part,  and  the  malleolus  ext  emus, } or  outer 
ankle,  at  the  lower  end.  Connexion.  It  is 
connected  to  the  tibia  by  an  interofieous  liga- 
ment, and  to  the  aftragalus  by  arthrodia. 
Use,  to  form  a fulcrum  for  the  tibia,  and. 
aflift  in  forming  the  leg. 

patella,  rotula,  or  knee-pan. 

Situated  in  the  finus  between  the  con- 
dyles of  the  femur,  and  above  the  tibia.  Fig- 
ure, fomewhat  refembles  an  heart.  The  pa- 
tella 


( 46  ) 

tella  is  connected  to  the  condyles  of  the 
femur,  by  ginglymus,  and  with  the  tibia  by 
fyneurofis.  Use,  to  ftrengthen  the  knee-joint, 
and  to  ferve  as  a common  pulley  for  the  ex^ 
tenfor  mufcles  of  the  tibia. 

TARSUS. 

Situated  between  the  leg  and  metatarfus. 
Figure,  in  the  fuperior  part,  headed,  and 
broad  below.  Composed  of  feven  bones, 
placed  in  a double  row  : in  the  jirji  row  are 
the  aflragalus  and  os  calcis ; in  the  fecond  rowy 
the  os  naviculare  ; os  cubiforme  ; and  three 
cuneiform  bones,  which  are  placed  clofe  to 
each  other.  Eminences,  head  of  the  aftra- 
galus,  and  the  tuberofity  of  the  heel.  Use,  to 
form  the  balls  of  the  foot,  and  to  ferve  for 
its  motion.  The  connexion  of  the  bones 
of  the  tarfus  is  with  the  tibia  and  fibula  by 
arthrodia,  and  with  the  metatarfal  bones,  and 
alfo  with  one  another,  by  amphiarthrofis. 
metatarsus. 

Situated  between  the  tarfus  and  toes. 
Composed  of  five  longitudinal  bones.  Use, 
to  form  the  back  and  foie  of  the  foot. 

toes. 

Composition.  The  great  toe  is  compofed 
of  two  fmall  bones  ; each  toe,  of  three  fmall 
bones,  called  phalanges. 

SESAMOID  bones. 

Situated  in  the  joints,  under  the  phalanges 
of  the  thumb  and  of  the  great  toe. 

PERIOSTEUM, 


( 47  ) 


PERIOSTEUM. 

Definition.  A membrane  which  inverts 
the  external  and  internal  furface  of  all  the 
bones  except  the  crowns  of  the  teeth.  Names;, 
Pericranium  on  the  cranium  ; periorbita  on 
the  orbits ; perichondrium , when  it  covers 
cartilages  ; and  peridefmium , when  it  covers 
ligaments.  Substance,  fibrous,  furnilh- 
ed  with  arteries,  veins,  nerves,  and  abforbent 
vefiels.  Use;,  to  diftribute  the  vefiels  on  the 
external  and  internal  furfaces  of  bones. 


CARTILAGES. 

Definition.  White,  elartic,  glirtening 
fubftances,  growing  to  the  bones.  Division, 
into  abducent,  which  cover  the  articulatory  fur- 
faces  of  bones  ; inter-articular , which  are 
not  accreted  to  the  bones,  but  adhere  to  the 
capfular  ligament,  and  lie  between  the  articu- 
lating extremities,  as  in  the  knee-joint,  &c.  5 
and  uniting  cartilages  ■which  unite  bones  firm- 
ly together,  as  the  fymphyfis  pubis,  bodies  of 
the  vertebrae,  &c.  Use,  to  lubricate  the  ar- 
ticulation of  the  cartilages ; to  connect  fome 
bones  by  an  immoveable  connexion  ; and  to 
facilitate  the  motion  of  fome  articulations. 


OSTEOGENY, 


( 48  ) 


f OSTEOGENY, 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  FORMATION  AND 
GROWTH  OF  BONES. 

Ossification  is  a fpecific  aftion  of  fmall 
arteries,  by  which  offific  matter  is  feparated 
from  the  blood,  and  depofited  where  it  is 
required. 

The  firft  thing  obfervable  in  the  embryo, 
where  bone  is  to  be  formed,  is  a tranfpar- 
ent  jelly i which  becomes  gradually  firmer,  and 
is  formed  into  cartilage.  The  cartilage  grad- 
ually  increafes  to  a certain  fize,  and  when  the 
procefs  of  offification  commences,  vanifhes  as 
it  advances.  Cartilages  previous  to  the  offific 
aftion  are  folid,  and  without  any  cavity  ; but 
when  the  ofTihc  aftion  of  the  arteries  is  about 
to  commence,  the  abforbents  become  very  ac- 
tive, and  form  a fmall  cavity  in  which  the  bony 
matter  is  depofited  ; bone  continues  to  be  fep- 
arated, and  the  abforbents  model  the  mafs  into 
its  required  fhape. 

The  procefs  of  offification  is  extremely  rap- 
id in  utero : it  advances  flowly  after  birth, 
and  is  not  completed  in  the  human  body  till 
about  the  twentieth  year. 

Offification  in  the  flat  bones,  as  thofe  of  the 
Ikull,  always  begins  from  the  central  points , 

and 


C 49  ) 

and  the  radiated  fibres  meet  the  radii  of  other 
offifying  points  or  the  edges  of  the  adjoining 
bone. 

In  long  bones,  as  thofe  of  the  arm  and  leg, 
the  clavicle,  metacarpal  and  metatarfal  bones, 
a central  ring  is  formed  in  the  body  of  the 
bone,  the  head  and  extremities  being  cartilage, 
in  the  centre  of  which  offification  afterwards 
begins.  The  central  ring  of  the  body  fhoots 
its  bony  fibres  towards  the  head  and  extremi- 
ties, which  extend  towards  the  body  of  the 
bone.  The  head  and  extremities  at  length 
come  fo  clofe  to  the  body  as  to  be  merely 
feparated  by  a cartilage,  which  becomes  grad- 
ually thinner  until  the  twentieth  year. 

Thick  and  round  bones,  as  thofe  of  the 
tarfus,  carpus,  fternum  and  patella  are  at  firft 
all  cartilage  ; offification  begins  in  the  centra 
of  each. 

At  birth  the  bones  of  the  rceTus  are 
very  imperfect.  The  extremities  and  precedes 
of  almoft  all  the  long  bones  are  connected  to 
the  body  of  the  bone  by  cartilage.  Thefe 
portions  of  bone  are  called  epiphyses.  The 
cranium  has  no  futures  ; its  bones  are  con- 
nedted  together  by  a firm  and  almoft  cartil- 
aginous membrane.  On  the  anterior  part  of 
the  cranium,  between  the  parietal  bones  and 
the  frontal,  is  a confiderable  membranous 
fpace,  called  the  anterior  frontanel,  and 
a fimilar  but  fmaller  one  between  the  parietal 
bones  and  the  occipital,  termed  the  posteri- 
or frontanel.  The  frontal  bone  confifts 
E of 


( 50  ) 

of  two  bones,  and  the  occipital  of  four.  The1 
teeth  are  partly  formed,  efpecially  the  enamel, 
and  are  placed  in  a double  leries.  The  ex- 
ternal auditory  foramen  is  furrounded  by  a 
bony  circle , in  which  there  is  a groove  for  the 
attachment  of  the  membrana  tympani.  This 
circle  gradually  elongates  into  the  meatus  au- 
ditorius.  The  articular  cavities  of  all  the 
bones  are  much  more  {hallow  than  in  the 
adult.  The  os  innominatum  confifts  of  three 
bones,  the  ilium,  ifchium,  and  pubis,  which 
are  connected  together  by  very  firm  cartilage. 
The  bodies  of  the  vertebra;  and  its  proceffes 
are  united  by  cartilages. 

«Msjsaaf  iw mm  *i  rmr~-?x -roarr-c-a 


OF  THE  CONNEXION  OF  BONES. 

Bones  are  connected  with  orte  another, 
fo  as  to  admit  of  motion,  and  this  kind  of 
union  is  termed  diarthrofis  ; or  fo  as  to  ad- 
mit of  no  motion,  which  is  termed  fynarthro - 
Jis  ; and  when  connected  with  one  another 
by  an  intervening  fubftance,  the  union  is  term- 
ed fymphyfis.  Diarthrofis,  fynarthrolis,  and 
fymphyfis,  are  to  be  ccnfiderecl  as  the  genera 
only  of  articulations,  each  genus  comprehend- 
ing feveral  fpecies,  which  are  arranged  as 
follows. 


DlARTHROSIS* 


Synarthrosis,.,  or  Diarthrosis,, or  moveable  Connexion . 

immoveable  Connexion.  . — - ___/\ 


GENERA. 


SPECIES. 


' Enarthrofs,  when  the  round  head  of  one  bone 
is  received  into  the  deep  cavity  of  another,  fo 
as  to  admit  of  motion  in  every  direction  ; as  the 
head  of  the  os  femoris  with  the  acetabulum  of 
the  os  innominatum. 

Arthrodia,  when  the  round  head  of  a bone  is 
received  into  a fuperficial  cavity  of  another,  fo 
as  to  admit  of  motion  in  every  direction  ; as  the 
head  of  the  humerus  with  the  glenoid  cavity 
of  the  fcapula. 

Ginglymus,  when  the  motion  is  only  flexion 
and  extension  ; thus  the  tibia  is  articulated  wit  it 
the  os  femoris  ; and  the  cubit  and  radius  with 
the  os  humeri. 

Trochoides,  when  one  bone  rotates  upon 
another  ; as  the  firft  cervical  vertebrae  upon  the 
odontoid  procefs  of  the  fecond,  and  tire  radius 
upon  the  ulna,  or  cubit. 

Amphiarihrofis , when  there  is  motion,  but  that 
very  obfeure  ; as  the  motion  of  the  metacarpal 
and  metatarfal  bones. 

fi  Suture,  when  the  union  is  by  means  of 
I dentiform  margins  ; as  in  the  bones  of  the 
cranium  : hence  the  fagittal,  lambdoidal,  or  oc- 
I cipital  and  coronal  futures. 
y Harmony,  when  the  connexion  is  by  means 
■ of  rough  margins,  not  dentiform  ; as  in  the 
bones  of  the  face. 

Gcmphojis,  when  one  bone  is  fixed  within 
another,  like  a nail  in  a board  ; as  the  teeth 
k in  the  alveoli  of  the  jaws. 


GENERA. 


C 52  ) 


r.: 

?-< 

O 

»N 

CO 

*-H 

CO 

>< 

w 

s 

>< 

CO 


SPECIES. 

r Synchcndrofis,  when  a bone  is  united  with 
another  by  means  of  an  intervening  cartilage  ; 
as  the  vertebras  and  bones  of  the  pubi3.  ' 

Syjfarcofis,  when  a bone  is  connected  with 
another  by  means  of  an  intervening  mufcle ; as 
the  os  hyoides  with  the  (tern  urn. 

Syneurojis , when  a bone  is  united  to  another  by 
J an  intervening  membrane  ; as  the  bones  of  the 
head  of  the  foetus. 

Syndefmojis , when  a bone  is  connected  to  anoth- 
er by  means  of  an  intervening  ligament  ; as  the 
radius  with  the  ulna,  &c. 

Synofto/is,  when  two  bones,  originally  fepa- 
i rjtted,  are  united  to  one  another  by  bony  mat- 
Iter.  t , 


SYNDESMOLOGY, 

OK, 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  LIGAMENTS. 

Ligaments  are  elaftic  and  ftrong  mem- 
branes connecting  the  extremities  of  the  move- 
able  bones.  Division,  into  capfular , which 
furround  joints  like  a bag,  and  connecting  liga- 
ments. Use.  The  capfular  ligaments  con- 
nect the  extremities  of  the  moveable  bones, 
and  prevent  the  efflux  of  fynovia  ; the  exter- 
nal and  internal  connecting  ligaments  fereng .li- 
en the  extremities  of  the  moveable  bones. 


Ligament? 


Ligaments  of  the  lower  j at*.  The 
condyles  of  the  lower  jaw  are  connected  with 
the  articular  fmufes  of  the  temporal  bone  by  two 
ligaments,  the  capfular  and  lateral  ligament. 

Ligaments  of  the  occipital  bone, 
AND  VERTEBRAE  OF  THE  NECK.  The  CGU- 
dyles  of  the  occipital  bone  are  united  with  the 
articular  depreffions  of  the  firfb  vertebra  by 
the  capfular,  broad,  anterior,  and  pofterior 
ligaments,  the  ligaments  of  the  odontoid  prcc- 
efs,  and  Hgamentum  nuchae.. 

Ligaments  of  the  vertebras.  The 
vertebrae  are  connected  together  by  means  of 
their  bodies  and  oblique  proceffes.  The  bod- 
ies by  a foft  cartilaginous  fub fiance,  and  the 
proceffes  by  ligaments,  viz.  the  tranfverfe  lig- 
ament of  the  firft  vertebrae  ; the  anterior  and 
pofterior  common  ; the  interfpinous  ; the 
intertranfverfe  ; the  intervertebral  ligaments  - 
the  capfular  ligaments  of  the  oblique  proeeff- 
es  ; and  the  ligaments  of  the  laft  vertebrae  cf 
the  loins  with  the  os  facrum,. 

Ligaments  of  the  ribs,  me  pofterjor 
extremity  of  the  ribs  is  united  with  the  verte- 
brae ; the  anterior  with  the  fternum.  The 
ligaments  of  the  pofterior  extremity  are.  the 
capfular  ligaments  of  the  greater  and  lexer 
heads  ; the  internal  and  external  ligament.-  cf 
the  neck  of  the  ribs  ; and  a ligament  peculiar 
to  the  laft  rib.  The  ligaments  of  the  anteri- 
or extremity  are,  the  capfular  ligaments  of 


t 54  ) 


the  • cartilages  of  the  true  ribs,  and  the  liga- 
ments of  the  ribs  inter  fe . 

Ligaments  of  the  sternum.  The  lig- 
aments connefting  the  three  portions  of  the 
fternum  to  the  ribs  are,  the  membrana  propria 
of  the  fternum  ; and  the  ligaments  of  the  en- 
fftbrm  cartilage. 

Ligaments  of  the  pelvis.  The  liga- 
ments which  conneft  the  offa  innominata  with 
the  os  facrum  are,  three  ligamenta  ileo-facra  y 
two  facro-ifchiatic  ligaments ; two  tranfverfe 
ligaments  of  the  pelvis ; the  ligamentum  ob- 
turans  of  the  foramen  ovale,  and  the  ligamen- 
tum Poupartii,  or  inguinale. 

Ligaments  of  the  os  coccygis.  The 
bans  of  the  os  coccygis  is  connected  to  the  a- 
pex  of  the  os  facrum,  by  the  capfular  and  lon- 
gitudinal ligaments. 


Ligaments  of  the  clavicle.  The  an- 
terior extremity  is  connefted  with  the  fternum 
and  ftrft  rib  ; and  the  poftSrior  extremity  with 
the  acromion  of  the  fcapula,  by  the  interclav- 
ieulaig  the  capfular  ligament,  the  ligamentum 
rhomboideurn,  and  in  the  pofterior  extremity,, 
the  canfular  ligament. 

Ligaments  bF  the  scapula.  The  prop- 
er ligaments  which  conn  eft  the  fcapula  with 
the  pofterior  extremity  of  the  clavicle  are  the 
conoid  and  trapezoid  ligaments. 


Ligaments 


C 55  T 

Ligaments  g?  the  humerus.  The  head 
of  the  humerus  is  connected  with  the  glenoid 
cavity  of  the  fcapula  by  the  capfular  ligament* 

Ligaments  of  the  articulation  of 
the  cubit.  The  elbow  joint  is  formed  by 
the  inferior  extremity  of  the  humerus,  and  fu» 
perior  extremities  of  the  ulna  and  radius,. 
The  ligaments  connecting  thefe  bones  are,  the 
capfular,  the  brachio-cubital,  and  the  brachio- 
radial  ligaments. 

Ligaments  of  the  radius.  The  radius 
is  affixed  to  the  humerus,  cubit,  and  carpus3 
by  peculiar  ligaments,  namely,  the  fuperior, 
inferior,  oblique,  and  interofleous  ligaments. 

Ligaments  of  the  carpus.  The  liga- 
ments which  conneCt  the  eight  bones  of  the 
wrilt  together,  and  with  the  fore-arm  and 
metacarpus,  are,  the  capfular  ligament  of  the 
carpus  ; the  fir  ft  and  fecond  tranfverfe  liga- 
ment ; the  oblique  ligament ; and  the  capfular 
ligament  proper  to  the  bones  of  the  carpus. 

Ligaments  of  the  metacarpus.  The 
bones  of  the  metacarpus  are  in  part  connect- 
ed with  the  fecond  row  of  bones  of  the  car- 
pus, and  in  part  together,  by  the  articular  and 
interofleous  ligaments. 

Ligaments  of  the  fingers.  The  fin- 
gers and  phalanges  are  connected  together, 
and  with  the  metacarpus  ; and  the  thumb 
with  the  carpus,  by  the  lateral  ligaments  of  the 
fingers,  and  ligament  of  the  thumb  with  the 
os  trapezium  of  the  carpus, 


Ligaments 


Ligaments  which  keep  the  tendons 

OF  THE  MUSCLES  OF  THE  HAND  IN  THEIR 

proper  place.  The  ligaments  which  keep 
the  tendons  of  the  mufcles  of  the  hand  in  their 
place,  are  fituated  partly  in  the  palm,  and 
partly  on  the  back  of  the  hand.  In  the  back 
of  the  hand  are,  the  external  tranfverfe  liga- 
ment of  the  carpus,  the  vaginal,  and  the  tranf- 
verfe ligaments  of  the  extenfor  tendons.  In 
the  palm  of  the  hand  are,  the  internal  tranf- 
verfe ligament  of  the  carpus,  the  vaginal  or 
crucial  ligaments  of  the  flexor  tendons  of  the 
phalanges,  and  the  acceffory  ligaments  of  the 
flexor  tendons.. 

Ligaments  of  the  articulation  of 
the  femur.  The  head  of  the  os  femoris  is 
ftrongly  annexed  to  the  acetabulum  of  the  os 
innominatum,  by  two  very  (trong  ligaments, 
the  capfular  ligament,  and  ligamentum  teres, 
or  reftraining  ligament.. 

Ligaments  of  the  articulation  of 
the  knee.  The  knee  joint  is  formed  by  the 
condyles  of  the  os  femoris,  head  of  the  tibia 
and  the  patella.  The  ligaments  are  the  cap- 
fiilar,  the  polferior,  the  external  and  internal 
lateral  ligaments,  the  crucial  and  the  alar  liga- 
ments, the  ligaments  of  the  femilunar  cartilag- 
es, and  ligaments  of  the  patella. 

Ligaments  of  the  fibula.  The  fibula 
is  connected  with  the  tibia  by  means  of  the 
capfular  ligament  qf  the  fuperior  extremity. 


( 57  3 

the  interoffeous  ligament,  and  the  ligaments  or 
the  inferior  extremity. 

Ligaments  of  the  articulation  of 
the  tarsus.  The  inferior  extremity  of  the 
tibia  and  fibula  forms  the  cavity  into  which 
the  astragalus  of  the  tarfus  is  received.  This 
articulation  is  effected  by  the  anterior,  middle, 
and  pofterior  ligament  of  the  fibula,  the  liga- 
mentum  tibiae  deltoides,  the  capfular  ligament, 
and  the  ligaments  proper  to  the  bones  of  the 
tarfus. 

Ligaments  of  the  metatarsus.  The 
bones  of  the  metatarfus  are  connected  in  part 
together,  and  in  part  with  the  tarfus,  by  means 
of  the  capfular  ligament,  the  articular  liga- 
ments, the  tranfverfe  ligaments  in  the  back 
and  foie  of  the  foot,  and  the  interoifeous  liga- 
ments of  the  metatarfus. 

Ligaments  of  the  toes.  The  uhalan- 
ges  of  the  toes  are  unned  partly  together,  and 
partly  with  the  metatarfus,  by  the  capfular 
and  lateral  ligaments. 

Ligaments  which  retain  the  ten- 
dons of  the  muscles  of  the  foot  in 
their  proper  place.  Thefe  ligaments  are 
found  partly  in  the  back  and  partly  in  the  foie 
of  the  foot.  They  are  the  vaginal  ligament  of 
the  tibia,  the  tranfverfe  or  crucial  ligaments 
of  the  tarfus,  the  ligaments  of  the  tendons  of 
the  peronei  mufcles,  the  lacinated  ligament, 
the  vaginal  ligament  of  the  extenfcr  mufcle 


( 58  ) 

tmd  flexor  pollicis,  the  vaginal  ligaments  of 
the  flexor  tendons,  the  acceflory  ligaments  of 
the  flexor  tendons,  and  the  tranfverfe  liga- 
ments of  the  extenfor  tendons. 


MYOLOGY, 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  MUSCLES.- 

A muscle  is  a fibrous  body.  Division, 
into  head,  belly,  and  tail.  Adhesion,  the 
head  and  rtail  are  firmly  attached  to  the  bones ; 
the  place  of  attachment  of  the  former  is  called 
its  origin  ; it  is  ufually  that  part  nearefl:  the 
trunk  of  the  body  : the  latter  is  termed  the 
infertion , which  is  more  remote  from  the  trunk 
of  the  body,  and  is  implanted  into  the  part  to 
be  moved.  The  body  adheres  laxly  to  other 
parts,  by  means  of  the  cellular  membrane, 
in  order  that  it  may  fvvell  when  the  rnufcle 
acts.  Substance,  flefhy  in  the  belly,  ten- 
dinous in  the  extremities.  The  former  is  com- 
peted of  flefhy  fibres,  which  are  irritable  and 
fenfible  ; the  latter  of  white  fibres,  which  are 
neither  fenfible  nor  irritable.  When  the  ten- 
dinous extremity  of  a rnufcle  is  rounded,  it  is 
called  a tendon  ; when  broad  and  expanded, 
aponeurqfis , and  fometimes  fafeia.  Mufcles  are 
varioufly  named, according  to  the  arrangement 
of  their  fibres,  or  from  their  action  ; or  from 
their  origin  and  infertion.  \ or  from  their  figure 

* or 


Or  fituation : thus  when  the  fibres  go  to  the 
fame  direction,  it  is  faid  to  be  a fimple  mufcle  \ 
when  they  are  in  rays,  a radiated  mufcle  °7 
when  arranged  like  the  plume  of  a feather,  a 
penniform  mufcle  ; and  when  two  penniform 
mufcles  are  contiguous,. a co?npound  penniform. 
Mufcles  fometimes  furround  certain  cavities 
of  the  body,  forming  a thin  lamina,  as  in  the 
•inteftinal  canal,  bladder,  &c.  When  they 
are  fituated  around  any  opening,  fo  as  to 
Ihut  or  open  it,  they  are  termed  fphinders . 
There  are  many  mufcles  named  from  their 
aflion,  as  the  flexors,  extenfors,  deprelfors, 
levators,  corrugatores  fupercilii,  See.  The 
mufcles  which  receive  names  from  their 
origin  and  infertion  are  very  numerous  ; as 
the  flerno-cleido-maffcoideus,  ftylo-hyoideus, 
ftyfo-glolfus,  &c.  The  deltoid,  peftineus, 
pyramidalis,  &c.  are  named  from  their  figure, 
and  the'pedloralis,  lingualis,  temporalis,  ptery- 
goideus,  &c.  from  their  fituation.  Mufcles 
that  concur  in  producing  the  fame  aflion, 
are  called  congeneres  ; but  thofe  that  a£t  con- 
trary to  each  other  antagonijta.  Vessels. 
Arteries,  veins,  and  abforbents,  abound  in  the 
fielhy  part ; but  very  few  indeed  in  the  ten- 
dinous. Nerves  of  mufcles  are  alfo  numer- 
ous in  the  flefliy  parts,  and  wanting  in  the 
tendinous.  Use.  Mufcles  are  the  organs 
of  motion,- 


MUSCLES 


MUSCLES  OF  THE  INTEGUMENTS  OF  THE  CRANIUM. 


( 6'o  ) 


c nj 

^ £ 

QJ  ,±4 

. • CJ 

S\- 


3 t3 
O r£l  ^ 


<ri  » 

F-  0J 

I a ^ - 

g «w 

5?-.g 
H fe 


u 

,S  <H-I 

^ O 


„ 

■5  2£' 


< I 

-Q 


«5 

o 

H 


>> 

-Q 


Ph 

O 

o 

Eh 


hh  +J 
o 

<u  ^ 

HP  ° 


s; 

*5  ' 


•S  -d 
►.> 

^ § 


U 

j-<  o 

rQ  « 


.5 

<L>  » 

c o 
£ i=j 
•*■*  *& 

a‘S 

pH  O 


r-P 


• Uh 

•'O'  o 

c3 


T3 


<U  o 

AU 


!L>  2 


^ Ph  n! 


Ph. 


— <L> 

O > ■ 

,-Q  C 
P < 


c/2 

pH 

O 3 

% 3 


g>  .<u 

Oh  O Wh 

U-rO  g 

<u  ,-H  c 
os<;  oj 
Ph  H-C 


02 

o 

I— I 

L 

w 

£* 

w 

w 

hH 

Ph 

Eh 

pH 

o 

02 

W 

L 

O 

C/2 

*3 


bo 


p g 
H > 


u 

hO 

TS 


mJ  . g 
o •R  y 


<1 


O - 


e •<, 

cc  o 


• *>»' 
to 

O 


|d 


Ki 

V. 

O 


I 

Q 


fuperiork,  orbit,  near  the  optic  tarfus  of  the  upper  eye-  railing  the  upper  eye- 

foramen.  , lid.  lid. 

| The.  reader  will  be  pleafed  to  obferve,  that  although  all  the  mufcles  (a  few  only  excepted,  which  are  marked 
tht's*)  are  in  pair?,  mention  is  made  here  only  of  the  mufcles  of  one  fide. 


( 61  ) 


. A 

<L>  • C ? 

o -d  ^ 

'p  re  a ^ 
h fe  « jj  ^ p 

5 fc*~  I 

ft 

■w  « Pi  ° 

'2fjj'g  | 

6 * -5 

c o 


re  ^ 

S g 
ex,  & 
s -2 

T3 


.V 


5=1 

O 


o o o o 

■hFHB 


■H  £ 


C3 


*§  c§  Ct3  eg  § 

^)  ij  ^ ^ C5n 

© 


5-i  <U 

oj  a 

Px'+J 

&• 


QJ 

t-C 


£L<  ^ 

p v 8 

re  kJ 
^ Is  1 
*3  04 
re 

13 

ex  d j 


*£££ 
ex  o o, 
— c xo 


K 

tH 

O 


g 

< 

W 

eo 

O 

Jz: 

w 

ffi 

IH 

Px 

O 

CO 

W 

O 

eo 

£> 


H3 

a 

re 

04 


S4  <■— 

aj  o 
a a 

O4 

a jj 

4J  +* 
4O  <44 

H ° 


<4-. 

O 


-a  h 

Jb  £ 

a* 


"o  b 

tQ3  ^ 

U '0 

2 g 

a,  a 

•— j J-» 

<5  .2 

Ctf  Sh 

P W 
P* 

(L>  £ 
rP  ^ . 


V 

eP 


ZT 

«-*  P-Q 


& 

rtf 


o,-- 

pT-Q 

tp  >-. 
«j  o 

o 2 

e? 

t» 


>45  <<? 
*« 

<u 

3 £n 

li 


■Si 


x A 
•S 

£ ■ex, 


F 


62 


) 


<u  w 
g O 

Hi  ”bb 

c 

-5  * 

a> 


£• 


^ V 

o 

^ <L> 


(u  a: 


G jz 
+-* 
G 

•'ll 

*S  <D 


<-M 

O 

<U  • 
,--<  C/5 

bij'p 

s j*- 

ii 

rfl  3 

-■  o 


ID  U 

-3  M ' 


cS  S 

E -v 

g *-d 
£ G 


• '-’  G 


— . E-l 
* ^ rt 

0 

^ O 

^ ^ u 

r-<  G 

O ^ 

G 

0 £ 

O 

T!  w pQ 

>-« 

<u 

h s 

H 

§ 

£ ^ 
G 4-» 

■s 

c G G 
G G G 

V 1 

<L) 

QJ 

1 <4-4 

rp  HG 

■5 

r~| 

cS  0 

«-M  t) 

3 

0 'S 

di 

O 

O 

-d  ^2 

C/5  5 

V G 

£ & 

O O 

(J  T2 

<u 

-G  r^ 

4-J  4-> 

G 

& 2 

E G 

^ u . 
O “ 

O £ 


ej 

33 


S 2 ^ u 
-W  bO.t;  33 
O 3 te 

rt  ^ t i -i 

u O 

fcp  oj  3 •- 

g 33  •£  (O 
L_,  3 fc3 
<u  “ o t! 

5 S P* 


<L> 

"So 

G 

G 


! rC 

1 4-J 

I G 

o 

£ 


a*”  a 4)  ^ 

3 « ^’5  « 

33  P 

i>  “ 


Jj-S^  H £■§ 

H g | ^ § 

U 4-» 


o 

£ 


J-  *t3 
Q-*  ^ 

■§  § 
G 


£ ^ 
g g . 

. G £ C/5 

^ 0 75 
G 

O £ 

E-1  5 

Ph  g 

IG  O 


Ux 

o 


-cs 

T3 


s y 

£ 3 

SlS  j 

iS  »-  c3 

^E  £ 


^ o ^ 

> (L> 

33  g 

IH  -5 

o 


rt  JJ1 

2 3 • 

C 5 “ 

3 ^3 
„ kJZ  J-. 
<u  rt 

'S  y | 

3 ‘5  > 

•— ) c o 

s o'P 

W)  “ 
<u  >>  5 

pC  N £ 

£“*  <L)  "G 

^ S 

+-•  G 


QJ  CL>  <L> 

-s 


g 

o. 

bJD 

S 


> • 
o 

< 


o 


u 
o 


05 

4-J 

<u 


-*  » t; 

g ^ pL,  . 

Wh  rt  _ ? 

"o  r£  ^ 

<1>  c O *'"> 
rG  c G *-< 

^ s J 


*4H  <U 

o pG 

4~> 

*Tj  (L) 

<u  a 

r* 

U > 

V g 


'E 

-G  3 

H s. 

-c  . 


3 X 

•§  & 
. <U  c? 


-2  . 

b-1  <u  •§ 


j=ja 


C; 

E 1? 

■A  ^ 

<-<  ca 


5 § 

^ I 

.8  §? 


SS 

S 

C5 

S? 

tS 


«q 


s; 

dT1 


% 

£-5 


( «3  ) 


bp 

eg 

ctf 


O 


ms 

C3 

c 


CJ  5-i 

-P  ^ . 

. ~ ^ 

■*  . G ( 


>> 

+o 


S2  ^ -c  aj  ^o 

ra  o ^ ^ ^ 
y a3  •-  c "5  a 

. — P-,  • r~) 

-M  CO-1 

a 0-*  ^ 

--  !_  O -3  he 
"3  u V ^ ra  . 

° "1 

O p o ® o . 

H ^ H S 

-c  -s  .e^ 

ra  a W u 


CV- 


■SJj 

<L>  Co 


* . -P 

rC  C/5  'JJ 
■*“*  T3 

5J  C3  ^ 

^ £ S 

CO  5-1  r-r-j 
5-1  O ^ 


T3  ^ 

o cc  • 

S'** 


u O 
u P-t 

c “ 


"d 

rt 

ci 

P4  "2 

o cJ 
rt  O 
-Cl  u 


* i 

a so 

* 1-1  r'*'* 

co  S 

Hd  5-T" 

g o 


• Si- 

&rz 

w sa 

, n *-»  u 
<u  <D  ^ 

rS  jy  g E-» , 

CO  +J  P 

"a  g'-S 

5 t3  -g  ”5 

i3  <l)  !> 
i2  S of  Oh 

sh  o 

«*&£  CO 

3 a o J 

c c3  -Tj  u 

6 ctf  C ^ 
32  G ^ 

.a  S <u 

a *j  ua 

H g 

as 


« o 

Qo  hj 

^ rg 

o>  O 
P*  ^ 
P-ci* 

a ^ 


o 

U) 


r-P 

H 


U ti  J 

c « -n 

ora  “ 

- £-9 

c!  u 

O o :—>Xl 

a 

I 3 OJ  O C-l 

i&*l° 


u rj 

<u  p 

PhH 

Ph 

a 


-a  >- 


5 


P4 

<1 

w 

p3 

<1 

53 

e3 

W 

H 

X 

W 

W 

ffi 

H 

PH 

O 

CO 

N 

O 

60 

£ 


1) 

: -a 


-a  o 


i 4J 

I -P 

, a 


a= 

H 


m 

0 
a 

01  • 

a x 

■a  aa 


oS  § 

<H-  ^ 
•O  rs 


. I 

.,? 3 


a=  S 

-u  -a 

r-  °H 

a a 

3 ^ 

CL, 


a a 

^ ^ sr  <l> 

<u  v, i -rt 

r.  J -P  ci , H-J 


na  ^ _a 


oJ 

4-> 

G 

g , 

<-w 

O ,• 
•G  ^ 
.&1  ^ 1 
’6  <L> 

32  -a 


rJ 

P-i 

o 

CCS 

-O 


g s 

&ol2 

• ^ "S 

C3  •’r’  H 


5 I 

o <-M 


S -2 

l* 

. „ 

, S . -G 
<U  P“> 

I y -c  -a  - 

' L-i 

( +->  rs 


QJ 


% 

.^5 

t 

^ , 

'o 

*s 

g 

CS 

-s  r 

o 

?-a 

-Ci,  53  . 

ci -5’ 

#Q) 

G3 

n 

% 


§ ^ 

g -s 


•-. 

S 

v.  £ 

o ^ 

g s 

^ s: 
*Z  & 


V,  v 

o ^ 

% 3 

Q>  ^ 'la 

a,-§ 


( 64  > 


a, 

3.a 
•£  -a 

o 

P ■£ 


<45 


<S 


<+.  y 

a 

- £o'« 
“SrS  u 

Vug 

*5  r3  .•£ 

$•>  <J  ^ 

S <u  « 


G 

B. 

.V 


<U  *•*■ 

•"O  <D  CO 

^ PH  HJ 


* £-S 


a,  o 
<u 

’TJ  tJ 

G 

O 

O 

Oh  Pi  ^ 

•S'g  ° 

03 

o 

u 

§ 

*■§ 

n rt 

B * 

o 

B £ 

G Cj 

B 

O 

Eh. 

CD 

PH 

4-» 

o 

B 

CD 

Ph 

<3 

'o  GJ 

Bh 

o 

CD  <D 

»■• 

<D 

PH 

B-. 

Bw 

Bh 

P4  PH 

-M  4~< 

O 

o 

o 

o . o 

^ 5-4 

P ■5 

55  o 

:-g 


B, 


•>  ->  r 

3 feoH  , 
v r3  w 

ph 


hH 

S' 


rtf 

Ph 


. 2 <*- 

S o 


g-3  P 
pn  y r 
, 3 ^ . '*- 

■ts  .y 

J5  <3  2 „C 

B c^B 

.2  55 


pu 

S-I 

aj 

O. 

B ■ 

p ; 


P-  a. 

b i 5j 

lr.= 


<d 

ph 

Fh 


XI 

<u  PH 

H £ 

L CD 

ph 


rj  ctf 

■g  "§ 

^ G 
~G  O 
C O 

^ CD  co 

pH  I 


<D  • 1 

PH  .S 


<D 


ccJ 


O ~ 

4-5^0, 

„3§-, 

B<  PH 


CD 

PH 

B 


CCS 


PL,  <U 

-C 


s-  _j2 

S T3 

S c B 

-2  S S 

■ob  .2 


p-  . 

Qh  CvJ 

G PH 

CD 


P 

< 

M 

P 

| 

p 

W 

B 

x: 

HH 

w 

H 

B 

p 

O 

to 

P 

P 

o 

to 

D 


Qj  5 

S R 

CCJ  . °5 
$ 


I 


£° 


a* 

I 


p 


.ympav.u  T.  he  fpinous  procefs  The  long  procefs  of  To  draw  the  malleus 
ot  the  fphsenoid  bone.  the  malleus.  obliquely  forwards,  to. 

wards  its  origin. 


( *5  ) 


\n  y 

P -Jp  ■ 

4-4 


4j  2 

J-M  J3 

3 s 

n . QJ 

o 6 
EH  /t5 


o .2  *"* 
+J  ti  > 

2 R* 

rj  Oh  u. 

c 2 ^ 

r3  P q 
Pm  O £ 

£ i:H 
^ a 


■T3  . 

si  s 

> <U 
Q_  >- 

3 rt 


P =o 
CT,rT3J 

■ -!  J- 

r&  g 

o £ 


> ^ 

1 « 
6 & 
Pm 

£ > 


% 


<M— I 

>-H 

o 

.2  ° 

c 

ID  -O 

a 

TS 

M 

eS  3 
o 2 
P,-5 

X 3 

»— • QJ 

he 

the 

fcM 

g 

of 

® w 

"So  u 

■S  "S 

ra  ^ u 
U 0^5 

*3 

oj  .t;  r- 

P r3 

B-i  s 
d j 


£ 2H 

c ~ 2 
£ e J*’ 

o .o  ^ 

n tl1^ 
u o o < 

OJ  Pm 


£ 
•~ > 
oi 

£ 

O 

h4 

w 

K 

H 

tM 

o 

05 

W 

t-1 

O 

05 

P 


o ^ 

s 1 


bs  g 

— «-»  s 

^ a.  3 


u to'g  rs 
£ .5  re  re 
o J-.  £ 

• — ' ,_Q  1>  <-tm 

s 4* 

t_  cO  n 

-Q  O 3 
a 


U --. 

> O 

J Um  Cth  4-»- 
< ° ^ — 

«-2  3 ^ ^ 

<V  .14  <L> 


o rs 

^ s 

2 go 
<_2  ^ 
rt  « 

Pm  j_ 

O o 
+-»  ^ 

CO  P 

c$  P . 
.2  &> 


S h 


°cSgrt'£-^-s 
, , re  re  u a,  ■“  -J 
tJ  3 **  <--  r^J 

S 2 <5"  «J  ° c 

^5^1  ^c2  « 

b -°  ~ -°  & g « 

^ I -3  u S » ^ 

’E  S rt  O 

<u  2 P 0-32 

33  (=L*'-w 


l> 


g g'C 

§ O <-, 
C fcfi 


s-  O 
o c 

f’J 

1>  . P- 


rj  c»» 


-§1 

■&1 

V 


to 


Fa 


iponeurofis  which  coy- 


Name.  Ar'ifct  from  Infertecl  inib  Ufe. 

Majjettr.  The  fup.  max.  bone,  The  angle  of  the  To  raife  and  move 

near  the  os  jugale ; and  lower  jaw  upwards  to  the  jaw  a little  for- 


( 66  ) 


. 

<u 

4~> 

£ 

bJO 

i G 

-a 

>-< 

d 

aJ 

.2- 

* <& 
.4d 

t-4H 

£ 

<u 

rG 

4-1 

the 

4-> 

4-1 

d 

CJ 

£ 

<L> 

G 

v' 

G3 

r-Q 

id 

r* 

d 

G 

J-. 

H3 

nd 

G 

GJ 

move 

CJ 

►> 

GJ 

S- 

Ph 

4n 

O 

d> 

GP 

O 

.£ 

G 

G 

5 

*S« 

,rS 

U 

OJ 

> 

o 

Eh 

03 

£ 

d 

o 

4-> 

U 

To 

o 

4-J 

TJ 

G 

-5— i 

G 

QJ 

s 

bJ3 

.£ 

*G 

r-» 

»' — : 

4-» 

C3 

cd 

§ ft 

w 0 J 


£ ^d 
<L>  rt  G 

rG  & 

+■* 

(A  <u 
u o 

S’T  & 

-riH 

r*  O c/3 

£ c .-a 


bojy 

c ^ 


T)  U C 

-2  J J5 

T)  4. 

c d 

S-5^ 

a, 


L+h  03 

O <J 

LiS  'S 

Uh  g 

<U  OS 


rt 

PL, 

G 

o 


b. 

<u 


aj 


b 

<D 


.2  6 

§ E B " 

c o "" 

b.O 


•CM  ^ 


2 § 

_ _ H 

— o <l>  <u  9 

d • - -»  *' 


<L> 


w 

c 2^ 


ilUH 


, 8 I 

<U  ^ ■ 


£ ”£i  fn  hS  w -d 

g <«  O ^ '5 

1+,  O iSJOCf  m 


a 

w 

£ 

w 

ffi 

o 

H 

<1 

Ph 

cd 

O 

i— i 

ed 

w 

H 

£ 

< 

w 

ffi 

F-i 

Eh 

G 

O 

PQ 

<1 

Cd 

<1 

W 

1^ 

Ph 

C 


CO  (U 

^ a 
<u  .os 

<u  '-Lh 

•S  « 

a *5 

* ° 
rrt  C 

T>  *h 

b nd 

C 

03 


C <L> 

13  +3 


4,  fi 


o 

<D 

nd 

<-G 


£ 

g 

bC 

<G 


Js  .3 

b<  ^ 

g 

oJ 


J2  be 

« ‘I 

CU  <u 
U > 
O 

<L>  U 


Eh 


fi.’/er 

H 

u 
1— 1 

J5 

7s 

K 

«-s 

s 

^5 

tJP* 

C/3 

s 

s 

D 

w 

G 

§ 
Hs»  * 

O 

-s 

<A 

^ § 

CO 

G 

s 

toral  and  deltoid  muf-  cheek.  downwards, 

cles. 

Sterno-chido-majloi-  The  upper  part  of  The  maftoid  proc-  To  move  the  head  to 
tisus,  the  fternum,  and  fore  efs,  and  as  far  back  as  one  fide  and  bend  it 

part  of  the  clavicle.  the  occipital  future.  forwards. 


MUSCLES  SITUATED  BETWEEN  THE  LOWER  JAW  AND  OS  HYOIDES. 


( £7  ) 


rG 


<U 


£ 

&0  . 
G co 
O G 
4-»  O 

. aS 


» .g- 

fcjO  - 
G 


fe  S se  £ 


T3 


5J  (3 

as 


I ® 

E "T3 
^ £ 
^ & 


a ' 


-0 


C 

i 

O ,2 
Fh  ^ 
H & 
Co 


"3 

4- 


- * ^ s*  > ^ 

o & o > o co 

£ £h  £ O.  § g 

3 ^ G M . 2 

co  co  G 


> co 
§ ^ 


tJ 

o 

_£2  o 

hH 


O aj 

-a 


rt 

J3 


a as 


£ 

»C 
O ' 


£ 

B-0 

g 

c 


<L)  Co  'D  <U  <U  Qj  V 


o 


<u 

as 


a,  as 

G H 
o 


-3  E E OH  g X £. 
"S  H 'oH  c h 'g 

Jr  Jr  IcS  S 


<-W 

O 


<L> 

£ 

bJO 

G 

O 


• U 

<D  ”G 
G <-G 
O G 


•n 

«G 

G 


<u 

-£ 

G -3 

4-J 

•v  co 

« 0 

of 

G <u 

»-G  ^ 

>* 

-*-» 

G 

c 0 

0 

root 

€5 

4-» 

rA 

<L> 

, *-G 


CJ  <L>  £ <I> 

Sh-^h.sh.h 

^ 5 o u 


-G  ^ 

bo 

QJ  ccS  O 
rG  F—d  f(?  f-G 

F-i  G oj  pH 

Co  • f-t 

<J  © 


£ 

bjQ 

G 

O 


.|o 

0 


K^> 

ii 

V> 

% 

4» 

1 

Q 

&> 

ca 

*J0 

Lingualis 

t 

'1 

'1 

Cl 

£ 

E 

Pd 

Eh 

A 

£ 

<5 

co 

W 

A 

O 

kH 

h-1 

H-( 

CO 

O 

W 

E 

H 

£ 

W 

W 

£ 

Eh 

W 

FQ 

A 

W 

Eh 

<3 

£ 

Eh 

1— 1 
CO 

CO 

W 

A 

O 

co 

£ 

£ 


Stcrno-hyoickus,  The  fternum  and  The  balls  of  the  os  To  draw  the  os  hy* 

■clavicle,  hyoid.es,  oides  downwards. 

Omoi 


Name.  Ar'ifes  from  Inferted  into  TJfe. 

JDmo-hyoideus.  Near  the  coracoid  The  bails  of  the  os  To  draw  the  os  hy* 


( 6'8  ) 


r2 

'o 


j r*fi 


g 

-5Sucs 

<u  o 

a g -5  o, 

•5  £ fcr* 

p . <u  no 


V CU 

pp  "p  bP 

^ u 2 
Ph  tuO 
o -5  o 

£■*  '£  H 

CS 

(J 


'T) 

P 

CS 

- w 

<u  £ 
bJD  O 

C3  p-P 


*T3  W 

•8 -a 

V-. 

S'  CO 

a m 

H 

■si 

1" 

I#g 


s*. 

^5 


'O 

‘3 

jp 


<3  <u 

3 H 

>> 

xi 


mi  -P 
OP  "43 

^ S 

6 H m 
bp  "o 

Cfl  Jh 


ca  c 

"3  .5 

CJ 


^ 1/5 
c <u 
c3  -xJ 


e<~  g. 


c3 

<l>  w 

s^-5 

o 

pH  rj  4h  • 

3 P O, 


^ t!  o 

gH  * Ph  S 

i-i  n o 
Pi.  O'* 


C <y 


biD 

C3 

t! 

c3 

-d 

'o 

H 

r^» 


<u  ^ 

m J3 
op  vg 

^ S 
h .'2- 


03 

W 

Q 

i— i 

O 

K 

03 

o 

Q 

£ 

£ 

< 
i — > 

C4 

W 

g . 

O >H 
l-M 

w < 

W Hi 

£ 

H 

W 

PQ 

Q 

W 

H 

< 

E> 

Eh 

f-H 

CO 


<U 

P 

bJ3 

c 

o 


co 

rP 


4->  TJ 

I— < 

•— ‘ CO  ^ P 

"3  m 2 pt 
^ 3 m g* 

C3  • r3 

-a  o 


op  o a ^ 

HJ  ^ w S 
p «pp 

H "5  H '3 

Sr* 

o ^=i 


2 >7* 
^ ^ V 


pp 


m -5 
3 Cn 
~ o 


Oh 
O 

oj'-Sc^iyc 
oh  y _g  m ; 
o ’•Q  m i 

<U  U V -a  : 
J3  com  S I 
E-1  m H jj  n 

Ip  -5  j 


byoidex 

a ^ 

rs 

H -S  ? 

3 £ -h. 

•0 

W 

A 

i 

a 

rg 

o 

l 

O 

e 

p 

C3  . 

O 

03 

S3 

»S 

41 

S 

bo 

<<) 

( ) 


> 


2 S 


G 

G 

X 

C 


£*% 

P ^ 
3 U 

B 6 

O C3 
CO 

^ g 
> > 

Sd  q 

S H 

*n  "O 
J2  !3 

(3  > 
Oh  g 

(d  a 
pG  g 

CO 

2G 

OJ 

QJ  > 

*3  y 

i- 


o 

t-i 


<D  0 

fepF-i 


!g  --J  "O 
2 r*  O • O C rt 

-5  § "O  .ti  Ph  5 £ 

■3  >>03  „ -33  Oh 

3 ’y  3 £ is  j* 

G 3J  G T3 

cu  cr1  ^ <u  j3 

Ph;g  c«-  P-,  p 


P- 


G 

-3 

c 

QJ 

Oh- 


O 
<u  .a 


04  bn  _ 

y <s  S 

— r G 


>3  « 

l|a 

_»  * 3 -4 

£ -o  ' 

o 


3 H .O 


<u 

03 

H 


rt  > 

5 u «s 

rt  Fg  <u  73 

h>  O -0  Oh 

= S 

fc”S  -2 


G 
O 
P-. 
_ p 

<U 

-a 

Tj 
G 
G 

P* 


JZ 

H 


K* 


>H 


o 

<o  - 

03  Oh 

H T3 


c os  ;>  ® 

.2  fco2  © 

rj  p Oh  <L> 
CJ  2 O ^ ^ 

4£*;*Z 

^ CO  <-M  0-7  O 

wf3  ^ 

CJ  fl  3 u c- 

'S  ^-g 

*2  G £ _.  nj 

3 3>sr2^ 

*7  u ^ O 
^ rQ  ( L>  OQ»* 

3 G >> 


i i 

J2  « 

w° 

nj 
<U  G 
03  « 


“ ° 

Oh  Oh 


^ o o 
E3C 
3 hj  O 
~~  03 

O C _ 

'"■  .2  r2 

<L>  13  ’3 

Oh  <J  C 


*s 

o 

<o 


-r  -2 

J 1 

S1  3 V 

£ £ 


•OH 


w 

o 

p 

<1 

C4 

K 

H 

to 

o 

m 

e2 

Eh 

Z 

p 

W 

K- 

Eh 

y 

P 

o 

03 

< 

Q 

p 

Eh 

<1 

P 

Eh 

1-H 

co 

CO 

P 

P 

a 

CO 

p 


li 

03 


£ 

rt  .33 
C3  ^ 


_rt 

"rt 

O, 

5 

o3  w 

3 3 


£ S ^ 


I § t! 

1 03  5 

U <L> 

> a 


-o 

« o 


" 3 

e 2 
° « 
o 

3 bj- 

2 5 


s. 

if 

s’ 

• 

Cj  ss 


Palate- 


( 7°  3 


C-> 


a,  ° 
CMt*  P 
® fS  V 

QJ  On  CvJ 

£h  .2  ’■o 


£ 

Q> 

& 

” jsf* 


§ a -q 

2,S« 

*->H  ,£1 


bX)^,  O 
* O P 
QJ  . O 

. : is  G 

Ctl  r-<  QJ 

Pm  g +-> 
di?  qj  aj 
~0  rP  rg 


03  Ml 


'TJ 

P 

P 


t:  . 
o ta 

> 

P 


To 

the 

To 

Uh 

o 

<-M 

^ir 

PhES 

o 

*~C  QJ 

&• 

gcg 

’§ 

• rP 


”d  • ^ 

p -£ 
ci  J3 
ci 

^ Ph 

*P  rj 

P g 

"3  32 

Pm  P 
T) 
C/5  P 
p QJ 

X Pm 


«-w 

O 


*g 

s 


g QJ  pp 

^ pH 


cp 

g 

P '<L>  O 

V i>  4-» 


-3 

"3 

Pm 

t3 

a 

m 

.rt 


S 

ctf 

p 


« 

O 

►s 

£ 


* 

jl 


N 


X 

X 

X 

pi 

< 

K 

cm 

w 


Pm 

O 

Em 

Pi 

<5 

PM 

Pi 

o 

i—i 

pi 

w 

H 

co 

O 

PM 

W 

K 

Em 

X 

O 

Q 

p 

Em 

< 

P 

Em 

>—i 

co 

co 

W 

P 

O 

co 

P 

S 


Ph 

«3  cn 

pL,  x ■£ 

r_i  P O 

I P° 

< J « 

Em 


> ^5 

S 12 


lrP  Pm 

^ co 

#s  W 

X P 
5 ° 
P ET 

rt  r-M 

rC  Vi 

Pm  O 


QJ 


nd  IB 

P 6 

g . „ 

x X 

QJ  P (U  p 

<*P  >m,^P 

Em  fa  Em  ta 

-S 

Ph  Ph. 


■5 

T3 


PM't» 
rt  ^ 

rP  CO 

_ go 

C 03 

CtS  ( QJ 

s S S'S 

O bJO  g 
U ^ OP 

'E^p:  o 

o ti 

qj  rt  QJ  k<; 

r\  U .P  * 

Em^Em-^  s 

g &$ 


02 


£o 

& 

<3 

V. 

Q3 

52 


^ c % • 

S51  O £f»  £ 
Q>  •**  <2>  »: 

CJ  J2  O ^ 

oS 

sT>  s 


( 7i  ) 


p 


O 2 

O 


KT>  • »-< 


r3 

Pm 


<L>  T5  rr- 

> rt  ^ 

o 

2 


_ w P 
rt  C P-I 
rt  P 


P 
O - j£ 
E B! 

£T  £ 


o 

►d 


T3 

*a 


,c 

H 


p=s 

P 


P.2 

+-J 

2 3 


e 55 
d ° 


<s 

VJJ 

■P, 


O 

*W) 


P 

o 

o 

Eh 


o 

'bO 


P 

O 

o 

H 


Eh 

H 

O 

*1 

o 

w 

K 

Eh 

P 

o 

PQ 

<3 

Q 

w 

H 

<3 

Eh 

i— i 
CO 

CO 

w 

-3 

U 

co 

P 


*•  * * • 

g *-» 

u g a *j 

ts  C = o 

S U 

tj  u O pd 

t>  ^ rSb  ^ 

•S 

O <j  o » o 

Eh  ^ Eh  12  H 

o g 

c £ 


>> 

rt 


: 


C3 

<u 

. pp 

o H-J 
bjO«MH 

o 

^ r 
rt 

u ta 

•■d  J=! 

Ieh 

K 


u 

d! 


<L> 


<L>  >~. 

fca+J 
_5  S 
•a  5 

•£  s 

o * 


*-M 

<u 

•J3  y 
CP  Ed 

d ;jp 

P,P 
o ° 
Eh 


p 

<l> 

<L> 

dS 


rt  <c  •d 
o **•  ’S 

:2i{  ~ 
gH 
u 


ZJ 


O zj 


W>  <u 

. , fH 

°h^Eh 

d dd  g 

ts  *->  w 


_ v -P 
K ^ 


ta 


'S 

’c . 


<D 


, O ZJ 
I ’iZ  -O 
o « 

>1S  <u 
1 PrS 
* <U  Eh 
ba 

c3 


■s 

<L> 

r& 
-M 
. Um 
oj  O 


t4-i  bfl  rS 

o « 

a y 

• i_  H 

(l>  j-»  ^ 'n 

tuo  o 8 


. ^ 

co  ■ P! 

S 


-O  Eh 


P — ^ t_*_ i _2  _a 
5 u r2  o *x3  ^ 

tnO>- 
03  w C W <L> 

u pC  a v ^ 

*t3  H t^O  r2  H o3 

‘oaS^ 

^ 03  G Ett 


<-» 

73 

s 

8 

3 

cVa 

O : 


O ?3  *K» 


S Js 


-A  c> 

R1 

O ?3 


I <o 


a r> 
■&* 


% 


» 
Ci 

- £ 
O ^ 

2 


fl 

s 

§ 


?3 

s 

8 


5S 

-a 

.£<> 

■Si 


ho  , £r 

I 3^^ 


wards. 


( 72  ) 


<D 

33 


2 t? 


s g 


'bo 


<L> 


N >XJ 

^ a » 
*3 

H s 

?0 

tw  <L> 

O b.0 


! "g 
P^  o 
Sftfi 

l^P  W 

k!  r-  ■ 

'«  Z M 

-a  « 


a w 
■s  ^ 

£ § 

•3 


K 

W 

§ 

o 

p 

PQ 

<J 

W 

E 

H 

P 

O 

Eh 

<1 

PH 

p$ 

o 

I— I 
& 
W 

£ 

<1 

W 

E 

£h 

& 

o 

Q 

w 

p 

<J 

p 

Eh 

i— i 
CO 

CO 

p 

p 

O 

CO 

p 


u 

33 


P* 

a 

o 

u , 


a 


Eh  r§ 


3p<L< 


o a 

35 


' TJ 
rt  rt  c 


OJ 


« TJ 

'Ll  3 

p a r 

35  ‘ „ 3 • 

tn  ++ 


bo 


.,  3 
i a p* 
I r2 
'h  _, 

/y  ^ 

% § 


3 <« 


32 


EhT-H 

P-<  Jp 

O +3 


33  S 
33  32 


E a 

<U  O 

=3  TJ 


Uw  C/5 

O' 

C ft  ’ C 
<u 

tO  p 
*X)  o 

<y  *c 


P Ph 

g.S 

6 u E, 


S 

hO  H 

1/5  r-9 


o 

C V 


O 4-» 

H 3J 
<u  'bp 

33  (L>  ,-  ^ 

^ (U 

■5  £ *5 


Uh 

’^ii  O 


44  -U 
u .S 
5 Q- 
31  P* 

~T) 

a s 

P c3 
*-Q  «\ 

<u  g „ 

S e § 

> u ,rj 
K p P3 
11  u 

*•“)  pjE  rH 

P -P  -P 

H P»H 

^2  o o 


£2 


a -• 

•^3 


J 


a 

a 


o * Q 


<53 


•a 

£ 


a 

■s 


3 

WJ 


>M 

P 
& 
P-. 
S3 

^ *H  f? 

e »3 

^ 3 

- ^ g 

^ « g 

S 3 cjg 

g 

S’S, 


D 


P 1)  H 

«*D  ^ o 

S 

J S;s 

<.^.s 

o 


( 73  ) 


A rt 

id  55 

i;s 

o .S 

£-•  a 

o 


-«  ^ y 

■■=2  2 "P3 

<3  -P 
P O 


CO  . " 


£ -'g  £ 

g P u 

4^  £ 

bO  r?  W 
43  £ Tj  . O 

£h  2 

■sJs  s 


b£)  <u 
rt  ^ 

\3  P 


2 £ 
Ph.° 

<2  a 

qj  . O 

c 2 

2 -5 


•D  QJ 

43  43 


' ZZ 

qj  42 

|1 

s _- 


o 

Eh 


S 4 

° c 
t3  3 
,0  2 
rt  *J 


P »; 
o s 

£5 

Qj  <D 

43  1-4 

4-»  QJ 

*5 

*§* 

c 

' O .2 

Eh  td 
o 
PU 


a 

cT  . 

CO 

2 13 
C3  P 

f , , P-< 
O QJ 
<u  rP 

-O  £ 

cr  i-t-c 
^ O 

<D 

,-.  co 

H4 


QJ 

43 


<D  jjj 
.43  « ' 


T3  , QJ 

B ^3 

rt  qj 


T3 
C3 

rt  ~~ 
. A 

« S ° 
,3  .5  «j 

<U  1 — I *T3 
t*  43 

*H  QJ  -*J 

^ 43  p 
^ +3  O 

<-i  ~< 

s-  O w 
rt  w 43 

s 

J& 


cu 
x 
2 -a 


rt  co 

3.g 


P* 

= . 

*-«  .$2 
O 42 

•c  g 

<D  Pm 


5zr 

o 

t-H 

Eh 

c 

c2 

w 

£ 

w 

o 

Pm 


4. 

< 


P^ 

K 

H 


C ^ 

o .5 

<J  QJ 

rt  ^ 

= o 


-rt 


CO 


1)  £ 
s-  "x) 
O rt 

£ ^ 
u 

2 '£ 
c P 

<L>  _ 

•°  B 
o 3 

p 

•m  a 
> 

U v 


-9 

w 

o *33 

4s  u r\ 

S 

55 

CjO 

£ c 

•rt 

<J 

}-<  ’ rt 
rt  .5 

QJ 

43 

■*-» 

O 

p2 

QJ  . — 1 

9s  c 

& 

O 

rt  r3 

O 

w 

••  Ja 

Ji  £ 

rG 


S* 


Fh  Hy 

^ Ci 


g 

'Eb 

rt 

> 


•3-S 

P 'r? 


Eh1 


• #>  r 

•T3  bJO  rt 

.S  .SfJ 

rt  *3* 


P 53 
rt  ^ 

rt  *"3 

<d  43  4 

p'g.pg 
o 5 a ra 
-m  M-<  r^n  a 

-H  Ofl  ^>rt 


rt 


<D  ■ 


«4H 

o 

f 

rt 

PS  _o 

CL)  *+-» 

& 

4-» 

o 

3 f 

Jw 

i-t 

rt 

PQ 

*s  s 

^ * 
o 

Pm 

C 

« 

CJ 

PW 


f.a 

K 

^8 

*§ 


P<5i 

Q 

6 

• CQ 

rt 

S 

% 

2 

1 

cu 

tp 

«3 

G 


ment.  JLrcUor 


Name.  Arifes  from  Infer  led  into  Ufe. 

EreSor  penis*  The  tuberofity  of  A ftrong  tendinous  To  comprefs  the 

the  ifchium,  embraces  membrane,  that  covers  urethra, 
one  crus  of  the  penis.  the  corpora  cavernofa. 


( 74  ) 


p- 

p 


01 


JO 

'3 

J3 

33  ,* 
4J  -4— 

a 

<2  u 

i-i 

T)  3 
o y 

E--S 


t>  o 
be  £j 

tp  ■” 
a 

Ch  3 

2* 

^ <L>  • 

3-5  ! 

_0  3 2 
g w 


T3 

s 


•2=1 
<u  r-Q 

c 3-* 

cy  +-» 
JZ  <4-« 

E-<  ° 


Js 


o ra 
o JJ  u 

o 

JO  „ 
Ctf  £} 


<y 


3 

CS 

12  v 
^ c «■* 

03  tw 
O 

co*  o 

S3  *3 
P g 

CsJ  rO 


CT 

o> 

tH 


• 

3 

.4 

6 

(4 

and 

5-4 

3 

•*■3 

o 

4—  1 

a 

5- i 

54 

CD 

eg 

03 

3 

P 

& 

8? 

M 

'C 

<U 

2 

13 

13 

'Z 

.3 

*c 

3 

Q-> 

P« 

u 

rd 

Ph 

to 

<D 

5- 

en 

*g 

<U 

.J3 

T3 

Cj 

w 

<L) 

O 

4-> 

CJ 

CL) 

,> 

w 

Eh 

5-4 

<D 

e 

& 

(3 

3H 

“cO 

2 

4-» 

3 >, 

P 4-» 

2 ^3 

rP  2 

6 X 
e 3 

>,  JJ 
j_»  r* 


<d 


6 

33  . 2 
•M  ,-c 

|u 

Si  -5 

O U- 
O 3 


po, 

o 

03 

W 

bd 

o 

03 

s 


^ g 

a 

G cy 

rtrg 

f « CO 

-1-3 

pi 


^CJ 

Eh 


3 C3 
<£  O 


£ 

1 


<3 


t*.. 


* 

<3 


e« 

<§* 


F 


f Ther«  is  often  another  mufcle  behind  this,  called  Tranfverfus  perhuei  alter,  It  aififtt  the  former. 


( 75  ) 


2 § 2 

III  1/  ^ +J 

u ’5T*  "■* 

<u  *3  bo 

to  to  c 
4-'  y u '£3 

| ~ J J 

OJ  Cj 

15  -C!  ^ 


T3  u 

O'" 

C3to  S 

p o n 


3 "3 

<S1T 


03 

a 

to 

t<=H 


to 


Td  _ _ - . 

c ^ to  y 

to  E 

._  QJ  3 
.«  to  ■£  ^ 

to  *J  "i 

S’-*  to  5J 
° o V 
o « ri 

O T3  . . — ' 

3 u u 

co  O ^ >>> 
O v.  G OO 


1 *G 

J <u 

) ^ 

5 .2 

•n 

i G 
> * 


v-5- 
u 
' G 
G 
rt 

s 


« 

‘3 


tfi  aj 
O 05 

£ s 

° "td 

y a 

>5  « 

^ *\ 
s CO 

g'S 

►rt  G * 
o 

H I s 

*8  .31 


H 
<1 
pO 

g 

O 

pp 

o 

to 

£ 

C 

o 

pO 

O 

w 

G 
< 
s 
w 

Pm 

W 

^T*  rj  *J 

VH  V G 

H <u 

j:  g 

h 2 
O to 
u 

to 

W 

G 

<J 

to  .ij 

G ^ 


no 


jj  DO 

qj  d 

G r* 
£j  U 

g GP 
O +-» 
O 

o 

hG 


Cl,  O 

S -3 

’ £U  G 

0-4  ^ co 

3 g’g 

W d.tj 

Ct  u 

” <L>  <L) 

rfS  ,G 


0^ 

•5  . 

<-w 

© G 


<D 

r-G 


G .2 
O "3 


G S 

* 'bo 
g 


vu» 

<8 


co  G 

g h 


p 

6 , 

& •§ 
4J  G 

rS  % 

G 

—4  O 


CO 

K-H 

5 

S 

w 

fri 


tr  co 

G 
G 
O 

Pi 


£ 


.G  ^ *3 

<JJ  #4-J 

<u  -d 

H "2  -H 

G ^ 


r 

a 

>.§ 


y 

CT* 


to 

O 


c y 

a to 


to  jj 

Ph  '-> 

" ra 
bo  ^3 
3 u 
-3  o 

u 

<3  ^ 

e> 

to  , 


P 

w 
H 
<1 
G 
H 

t-H  B 

w «S 


w 

W 

G 

O 

to 

G 


£ „ 
rt 


. G 

H *'■< 

O ^G 
■G 

2 to 

3 


a 

|a 

O 

d 


to  3 

2.  04 

4~> 

C 'to 

y 3 

E « 

r3 

bO  to 


E .s 

3 to 


s 

’i'A 

e> 


( 76  ) 


i 

d)  (D 
CJ  c 

*Ow  ° 

cr 

c 

d 

"5  3 

CO 

W 

ti  tj 

"P 

B 

o3 

> 

S 

o 

o ' 
Ph  . 
p-<  & 

r- 

B 

.£ 

. CO 

n 

PQ 

^ fi 

O ^ 

X 

r*a 

B 

*< 

B net 

O 

01 

is 

w 

, G 

>|  n 

■JS  C ”0 

3 

j v 
aj  a 

-c5  a 

B a 


to 


o 

B 

6 ^ 
O — 


g S' 

c .2 


■M 


JSs 

t-i  r-t 


c is 

C »J 

ct  to 

Si  g^ 

•o 

«3 


■33 

G 

<u 

*G 


ffi 

B 

B 

O 

B 

B 

»— i 
> 
<1 
O 

w 

aj 

B 

£ 

HH 

W 

£ 

Q 

w 

B 

<1 

P 

B 

r— < 

CO 

CO 

w 

B 

o 

to 

B 


n3 


.J  2 G 
O B w 


5^' 

u ^ 

a P ' 

<J 


T3 

_,  B 

O d 


qj  cu-. 

r^  y 

\u  c3 


^5 

50 

<u 

rS- 

’tj 
c . 

d>  . 
O CO 

PH‘ 

O rt 

H £ 
,P 


o 


<5  «B-<  a 
bj  c -C 
5r  fc  4-» 


P-<  c 

t«  § 

. O D 3 

r9  'S  3 .£3 

^ S *2  ^ 

« -r  J-  * 


o w 
2 B3 


* P ^ s 'S  & S g r5  '3 

w 3 *8 -S'0  « 8 ^ ? 


O -C  w W 

•si*  8 jjJI  Js 

O f-1  '-B  Q)  fj_ 


T^'B^ 

rC  "5  JJ  *+H 

H-< 


f-»  --T— ( 

'PhB 


-S'ti  js 


H* 

H P 


* b . . 
^ a;  d> 

•a  c;  -S 

I &S* 

P 

rH  D U 
^ r-C  ,-C 
- 

B 


u [3 
g ^ 

a ^ 
,>.  ■— ■ 


si? 


.2  ^ 
H3  =-S 

« o ■*-* 

& rQ  ^ 

. a <«  ,q  a 9 

| B ° 


-B  "r7j 

O »iS- 


t!H 
*t  > 


-d 


ca 

13 

CvJ 

O 

B 


c S 

O C3 
u o., 


” <D 

S’3 
S - 
B-5 


« 
<4 
^3 


0 

G 

bn 


U . rt  c^J 

g ^ -2 

p-ii-S  ^ 

c a 

eS 

CO 


fcu 


^ CU  d> 
^ 


r . 

t:^ 


B-i  -P-; 

o r^- 


Ift? 

**  ^ 

*3 

b<)  iS 
2 1 

R s 


■«i 

Q 


.1 

S 


, 


MUSCLES  SITUATED  ON  THE  ANTERIOR  PART  OF  THE  THORAX. 


C 77  > 


t 

rs 

*-« 

o 


^ ^ (U 
„ 5-<  rf 

<L>  ctf  Cm 

. O f s 
ro  g g o 

H3-  C £ fc. 

ffl  Cm  o' 


c& 


<1> 

■5  o 

m 

fcjQ-a 

.5  « 

o* 

£w 


T3  £ 

C rC 

as 

<u 

«L>  *-» 
Ph 


r-.  ■ OS 

e5  p« 


c{h  *3 


a* 

~ >tf 

C? 

<L> 


T)  ^ O 

*3  cL, 
y !?fs9 

ra  cj  ^ 

£ Ch  OS 

P -.  -a 


CS  (j 

73  (U  » jf 

■3  H °H  & 


<L> 

bo 

as 


T3  co 


as 


u . -d 

0)  ,£2  U t£j 

g5  pO'SglC 

I-1  £ “ E"1  et!  H T3 

5 r£  >3  c 

Eh  (£  « 


-C 

.00 

‘C 


*a 


Os 


co 


C3 


*o 

Co  s 


< 

Qi 

a 

K 

H 

W 

>-r< 
I— < 

H 

23 


n 

< 

CO 

PS 

t— ( 

P4 

w 

w 

H 

W 

w 

£ 

H 

W 

fi 

A 

w 

E-1 

< 

& 

H 

i— + 

CO 

CO 

W 

A 

a 

CO 

D 


o 

fc+ 


to 

TS 

<U 

S-  'S 

o -c 

S3  S3 
cl,  te 
l2  5 

<U  Lg 


■5  rS 

M M W 

"•a  <45  id 
3 %S 
5 g-c- 
g-O  ° 

c£  m 

- . O <u> 

.1;H  jf 

■S  ’*s 

II 

<i!  Lg 

T S3  £ 

<S  Sore 

cu  as  J- 
. fa  ^ aj 

"0  13? 

a s *-> 

C3 

O Lh 

“ <U 

XJ  > 


u-,  y » 

o , <*  n 

■*-j  •-* 

QJ  rv  ' 

h n 5-i  rO 

rfj  y-  C 
« £ ro 
L. 

53-  M t2  Jt , 

^ £ U 

^ S-5 

CL, 


S b 


lC 


^ Je  a ^ 


as 

qjy 


,2 


i 


•$ 


q-3 

«§.  » f4 

03  t<i  J 


b<)- 

$•§ 


Co 


0 2 


MUSCLES 


( 78  3 


Si 

to 

O 

>4 

a 

W 

o 

4 

ft 


P-H 

o 

Eh 

(4 . i 
<1  ^ 
Pm  (Si 

pcig 

2^ 
(=4  ^ 
W« 
4> 

<3 

14  H 

?o 
^ H 

55 

O 

p 

<4 

£h 

< 

D 

S-t 

1— 1 
ca 

to 

4 

>4 

CJ 

<0 

• S 


4 


e to  •" 


Os  <D 

03 

c 

©• 


•§ 


4->  «-£$ 


rCj 


•x) 

a 

<L> 

-o. 

o 

Eh 


H—  to 


CD 

D 'J 

2 ^ 


cS 

£ 

u 

c2. 


o 

h 


o • = 
o ,&< 

Pm  8 
£ 0 
ii  o 

°QJ 

a <d 
jj  45 

d ^ 

^ <-w 
(D 


QJ  , CO  <D 

■.a  o -S  ^ 

y m .4  y 

5 8 

•Q  rg  y cv 
g',3 

co  Ty.  co  O 

o "d  o cy 

^ 8-^  £ 
.Eh  “KS 

3 MS  4 


s 0 

5 

th*  CO 
^ CD 

'■  r-t 

Oj  -O 


*d  '*<• 
c o 

PS  * 

,_  “ rt 

■4  £ 


=4 


o, 


JS 

Eh 


" C d 
u (-^<33 

3^  | 

u t5  <-2 
£ B <U 

j~i  G _8 


<D  . « 

££  S* 

£ Os'S  & 

^■5  n « 

as  O pj  OJ 
A <->  m3 
H S3  ’>  H 
fas  <u 
v u 


Pm 


g * 

s.  as 

-M  ..C 


. A Um 
m Cj  O 


ft 

5 

p8 

B 

4 

55 

Eh 

Pm 

O 

Eh 

p4 

<1. 

Pm 

C8 

o 

I— I 

c4 

4 
Pm 

ca 

O 

Pm 

w 

55 

H 

ft 

O 

P 

w 

Eh 

<1 

5 


b%A 

s 

O 

<D  <D  ^ 
43  G « 

•i->  <D 

<D_£~ 

O <D 

P53  55 
*"■  cs  *■* 
O ^ 

,3  PH 


’-a . 


*•£  & 

W 2 


PS  . 
CM  1 


, C (J 
K O rS 


£ " 

2 ‘Se- 


ts 2 
sC  -£ 

Eh 


■4M  ^ 4 

/-i 


C-v-t  (D 

o ^3- 


.“  W ^ 

>+j  <D  O 

.£<  g M 

O Jh  . 4 ' 

U Ph,_Q  ^ 
O w S 

-1  "t-* 

CO  4 Vm 

o 

C 


ri4- 


CD  *^h 


rs' 


CL,  <D 

^■£  -^c 

1 <u  ^ u 

A ~ u- 
+3  pS  ft'. 


1 - 

5.  9- 

H 

<S 

to 

to  4* 

H 

V3 

0 

Vi 

5^ 

5L 

•2 

inter  ms 
capitis  t 

to' 

w 

4 

u 

to 

**>  4 

S3  ’g 

L 

v>  to  h> 

P 

|4i=§ 

1° 

c> 

tc  S’ 

to  fc 

-ft!.5 

» X.  » 

tt3  *g  03 

to  K to 

oii  ^ 

S 

^ to 

ro 

fV. 


( 79  1 


U £ 

“ 5 

o x 

„ . rv  d 
O co 

rrf  CO 

4-J  +£ 

||  § 

§• 

o ^ y 

£ 2 


j -y 


r2  -£ 

s-.  ~ 

<u  £j 

33  & 

**  S3 

^ ^ CO 

fi-§"2 

33  ^ g 
O » < 
T3  34 
b o 

E « 

p>  -a 


3 U 

Q-r  d 
rt  o 

‘Sts 

B « 

<u  <* 

> 

o 

g-p  . 

O G M 

CM 

3 


oS 


© 

f^i 


o 

H 


*&  o 

f»  <u 
U ,-Q 
2 1=1 
s ^ 

g o 
£ 


>d  c 

g . <u 

ST1  «l> 

& 


© cr 

-d  o 

4->  i-rj  •■ 

^ aji 
o Sdi 

; 5>«  1 

’ a, 

J (U  Q 

, 33  <5  .a 

j «-»  ^ 

" CD 

S3  > «J 

■-  O •£ 

cn  O 

.H  t ^ 
£ U)  O 


t4H  8-  i*. 

o £-3 

„.  O 33 

<D  «— < +_» 

bO  ^ 

”3  3 h 

Oj  3 fS 

o u 


O U 33  • 

33  <u  -r1  “ 
u " 8> 
<u  b bf> 

rs  33  *33  t3 

£ " 2 ry 
“ «j  g S 
£3  E n 

+4  W W 


A 'cJ 

Co  j— « 
CJ  —J 

Ah'  CSS 


B ft. 

t ■ ■ r-^H 

^ 3 


•"  ti 

4-J  CZ 

<*  CM 

#4  J*1 

c«  y 

3 £ 

ft*& 


•> 


03 

o 

£ 

4-> 

<u 

33 

H 


4 CO  J-. 

33  ,u  rt 
■“  « 33 
CD  CJ 
t)  O s 

o d 

*s  ^ a 

c ^ h 

, G o © 

H 3“ 

6 <-M 

» O 


ctf  4-»  d 

4-jH  * *“* 

O 00 

Jz  Q>- 

^ Jm  -O- 

y d 

^ ^ r3 


’-w  rS  f2 

,S  ftj  *3  ^ 

^ ^ Ph,o 

"2  rQ  rt  ^=3 


» T * *- 

Irj  b d 

S-S-f 

PM,iS 

3 O Jj 

§ g J- 


E3 


o 8 

gca 

PhA3 

CO 

o ^ 
.5  33 
.ft." 
u 

5J 


33 


O 

"3 

03 

a 4 
<-2  8 
-a  33 

C oj 

C3  y 


co  'rt  O 

<u  C. 


<D 

^3 


5 

.s 


<3 


I 

» 

OS-  w 


J 


«1 


ir 

J 


four  laft  cervical,  and  vertebra,  and  the  fide  backwards,  and  alfo  to 

four  fuperior  dorfal  ver?  of  the  os  occipitis,  one  fide, 

f-cbras,.  $crrafus1 


Name,  Arifes  from  inferted  into  . Vp% 

Berratus  fuperi&t  p<j*  The  fpinous  proceff-  The  fecond,  third,  To  expand  the  tho» 
fWU'x  ' es  of  the  three  laft  cer-  and  fourth  ribs, by  three  rax,  by  ( elevating  the 


( So 


cA 

a 

u 


g 


o 


•c 


a 


o -S 


m C) 

."2  -c 

C H 

<U 

<0  o 

•S  £ 


2 r« 

•o  S3 

o | 
H £ 
o 


© *© 
4->  pj 
C3 


_ CCS- 

o 

, *0  u 
<u 


G ’ 
O 


G £ «L>  ^ 
- 

p J* 

Tl  _ 

a 


ef 

o 


*■©  S 


+-» 


*&•  O- 


G 

bO 

G 

O 

4J 

£ 


a X 
o qd 

5-. 

CH.  ~ 

CO  ^ 

G O 
O cS 

.S 

^ 't* 

■5  ^ y 

« 4J 

d, 
CG  <u 
V U 


bQ 

c 

rcf 


LQ 


<*4-,  +J 

o CS 
<d 

bp  « 
n3 

iS.-0 


«i  C c 
.G  o 

Eh  ^ *S 

C3  (L> 


!• 

M 

r-  W 

_r  ^ 
73  V; 
.y  o 
-a  ■ 


«»  *-> 

CG  CL) 

<u  Si 

CJ  rG 
O +■»  . 

*=!  »ri  . M 
^ C U 
C3  oS 

P -»o 

O in 

g c y 
iS,.®  "2 
^ T <« 
g-p  ° 

^ 4J  S-i 
r,  c-w  <D 

tr1  o £ 
lO  o 


% 


o|  fi 
k-E-S 


"e  ^ 23 


■». 

V. 


<3 

0% 


Cl,  <L> 

CT1^! 


O >U 't! 
gp  o 

4J  t3 

3-*  C3 
CD  ^ 

e 

CJ  <-M  o 

CD  G 

^3  ° rG 

^G  LG 

Eh  J3  ^ 

fc  c 

rt-. 

g 

O 5-» 

i 8 ► 

Oh  u 

<2  J 
Si  S 

,3 

5 «* 

6 *3 

*d 

S ° 

Sts- 

■ o • a;  ‘ 


<3 

JS 


to 


h 


C 8.1  ) 


i fa 
S ft  . 

> re<t> 

rt 

<3J 

nd 

c<5 

QJ 

rC! 

1 

3 

Oh 

C3 

ID  - y 

fafa  g 

CL) 

a> 

-fa  o 

CCS  ^ 

^ ^ c 

fa=! 

+j 

<D 

fai 

u cu  m 

?-*  -fa 

^ . 

CCJ  CO 

& 

g ^ 

dj 

> 

fa  uh  24 

rS'rS 

o 

o fa 

PS 

ctf 

£ 

§ Ph 

Hfa  g 

O ^ 

To 

ackw 

To 

£ P4 

in 

fa 

fa  a 


’ n) 

& 

£4 

fa 

c3 
£ 


y r3 

•6  & 
fa 
fa  y 
§ fa 

>4  -S' 

oj  13 

'*! 

O 


3* 

t 


2 T 
fa-3 


C S3 


'£ 


fa  U 
O R 


fa 

fa  a 


<D  • 

■5  - 

<3. a 

<u  ti 

■"O  _ 

•*0  C3 

g ‘.5 
.&♦ 
flj  CJ 

fa  « J 


<L)  U CCS 

^ 2 o 

oT  Pi  pH 
S3 

<D 

. O +J 
§1  « 
8 c- 


•*->  *-0 
CV“ 


u 

rC 

H 


: ^ 
' o 


G ,co 


<4-1 

O 


<L> 

*bb-- 


"3 


tes 

fU  ' 

a 

o 


- 2^ 
P*v3  <2 


*3-  <U 


P-<  ctf 

g-p 
s p- 

U ns 

g ^ <d 

P3 


C/3 

JU  ~ 

<5"  y’c 

o ■£  ra 

CO  o 

<t>  rO 


W O • 
rj  a C 
O o 
co 

Jj 

^12  fa 
<l>  b 

S *1  2 

“ ' xi 


C <L> 
« ^ 


> t: 
<-2  £ 

tj  __ 

C rj 

a *-£ 

rs  O 

^ 


K 


« „• 
n j fa  fa 

fa  o ^ pi 

*-;  > -fa 


&, 

. H i_. 


S~  faJ 

bz  GO  o 

„ "O 
o>  -C 


1 c-B 

<L>  r3 

-p  5 


1 1 & 
4 ” j~ ' 


<U 


CJ  QJ 

>.  §«- 
0 ft  fa 


c « o fa 

fa'H^H 

q u v 

W U M 


dJ  O 


O 
fa 

P P '*■'  fa 

y ~fa  ft 
> <u  o co 
o pP 

OMfa^ 

cm  -fa 
<u  C\ 


►1 

mus  do 

4 

i 

8 

<$ 

t 

“§ 

.v> 

5? 

1 

C3 

•gs 

Cj 

5*» 

o 

§ 

vertebras*  . -vical  vertebra. 


C 82  ) 


& 


«j 

ua  £ 

4-J  Cw 

Tu 

> c .+2 

<u 

•M  . 

K £ 

<U  CTj 

o -5 

^ Hd 
G 
C3 


HJ  <D  5“< 
«2 

t)  g c 

c P « 

03  <£  M 
<U  tu 

■a  c y 

t2  -2  3 

a 

G dj 
O ^ 

O 4_J 

*-*  g 

^ cu 
O r* 


P4 

CJ  . 
<U  CO 

G nd 
J2  G 

’S  £ 

r-e  ij 

O cd 

v -O 


O . 

O co 
4-j  nd 

fcO  rd 


cu 

CT* 

03 

■q 


X -o 

■o  £ 

% «? 

CD  T3 

G *3 
<U  § 

^ P4  . 

r-j  CJ  CD 

S g nd 

a •c  « 

+J  1 

r°  "£  G 
H a o 
.ET  o 


?S 

nd 


X fe 

w 3 

O 

Ir^ 


5S 

03 


4J 

►a 


m 

rt 


-tS' 


cu’ 

,a 


£ 


C-3 
^ & 
O ti  O !5 

c « 

S 00 


■S 
• H 


la  i 

w o 
u *o 
o 

J-,  * 

* fe 

» rTJ 

a a 
o b 
a a 


• rH  * 

^ -a 

*N  «u  -*-' 

e5  ^ 

H o 

CO 

<U 


M 

r~ < O 

CT3  <D 

.a  ^ 

> -M’ 

J-  j_, 
CD  tt 
<j  Ph 
or 
_*  o 
'u  X 

§ & 
^ u' 
>4S  .a 


r.u  iT  2 TS 


^ 1 

^ J- 

«J3  0 

,^3  u 
-a 

H 


05  s-.  a 

fi  a •£ 
£ SdM 

a a o 

cd  « — 1 

h u 
S o t> 

G *-T-H 

co  rj 

gfea  S 

^ O <u 
d5  v<  j; 

Q Pd*3 


ta  -a 

W T) 

2g 

Ch 

a 

3 as 


u " -a 

as  I-a  .y 

^ 0 E 

& ^ 


a 

£ 

a3 

a .* 

« &j 


c > 
0.-2 
Co 

ta  ;a 
> 


cu 


<u 


<£ 
a y 

h aa 


(U  ' 


^ fcS  ^ 

ta  u 

W 4-t 


o p< 

i!«  w 

J 

S-5  ^ 

+3  y 

*-+H  t> 

<U  o 

L_J  CO  G-4 

“ ^ J3 

fe  O 
flu  "U 


«4h: 

o 


bJD 


cu 


'S1 


1 u 

U CD 
O Ph 

vii  <L» 

ua  g 

^ y'S 
ficSt: 


.Oh 

‘O 

V 

o 

CD 

CO  f— I 

0 y 

Eh  4U 


Mh  > 

. O 

! 

o 

%>  ’'O' 


o 

nd  1 
c 
<u 

u 

^G 

H 


<4-t 

o 


tL  ^ 

n w 
Ph  cu 

‘S’S 
^ 8 . 

2 WrS 

-M  ^<3  CD 
CU 

*-G  5^ 

H 0 > 
<y  u 


c« 

5-i  , 

P4 


§ <«i 

*3  CIU 

CD  4J 
-C  tH 

H °i 

iS 

flU 


3 


4 

*-> 

I 

« 


55 

s 


fat 


.4 


% 

•»H 


?5 

'So 


% 

•a. 


a 

te 

cu 


O g\ 


C S3,  ) 


& 

rt 

*5  $3 
_ 

P « 


a § 

W o 

4-» 

§ ® 


o 

H ? 


S-3 

O ctt 
C QJ 


' ^ 


r3 


.-;  co 
•X)  ,U 
bn 

0 13  C 

Lj  o <L» 

“ o ^ 

>-.  +J 

P-,  o 


^•0 
e g 

4-»  £ 

Q 


. ^ 

> cd 
E <U  jT 
2“« 
^ s-s 

O 


CO 

W 


o 


«-> 

S 


nS 

£ 

*-» 

O 


^”3 

, V V 


;j>  C3 

s XJ 

.•s 


- gj 


ib  <d  e . . 

H ^Cj  4-»  4-» 

'y  ^ o ^ 

5 «*j  -Q  O aj 

«^3  fc~*g 

Q->  ^ £5 


^ A 


*-H  qj 
W 

P QJ 

O > 

Isg 

>-P  <-W 
pH  O 


05  O 

<U  f^3 


Ux  . 
O 


5-. 

a -d 
<i5  H 
tj  o 

*<« 
O.T3 

S s 

35 


1<  a 


« 


CO  I 

^ a 
o •*-•  ~ 

•2  * --S 

«&*"  ti 

<ujy  > 

-P 

- ^ 
~ <■+-<  O, 

5 

u u ^ 

.«  s-g 


O « 

S jj 

CU  »« 


32 

U 

4-1 

'-< 

u 


S <u 

2 ^ 


I «,  JJ 

, JJ  > 

te  o 

V fO 


<>  w 

-a 


— w 

C FI 


5 J<  i 
S AS 
tJ  fQ 

PQ  <2  £ 


W 

X 

X 

W 

X 

O 

t-H 

X 

w 

c u 
& 
co 

W 

ffi 

H 

Pa 

O 

CO 

W 

H 

O 

co 

£> 


03  d 

>>-a 
,15  m 
‘o  0 

V*  CJ 
o r« 

3*" 

4-J  <-M 

v o 

r§ 
. ^ 


!►, 


(A,  <-3 
O 


I FI  *"* 
- « 
■s  s 


y 2 

. f3  C3 

Ef-lu 

r. » w 0 > 


*t>  * 
c g-< 

03  « 


^ «-M 

c/T  o 

S bO 

•-Q  T3 

oj  w 


u 

QJ 

3 3 


,3 

4-» 

& <5 
^ 3 
u a, 

^ rt 

.3  u 
o 


* 


i$ 


t 

*5 


i, 

to 


I 


( 84  ) 


s 

a 

o 


bj® 

G 


ts 

Ctf 

o 


o 

H 


g "S 

Oh 
O 


<L) 


"3  o 

£ c3 

o 


ta 

o 


_Q  CO 
^ ? 
c 

3 £ 

4-)  S 

s J 

&>Js 

QJ  **“* 


bO 

'TZ) 


*s 


° J ^ 

<u  .2 

'2’S'S 

^ S-5 
•d  +-» 

<L>  CD  *-M 

> O 

H § g 

U)^ 


S ? 
"~  a, 

<JJ  CvJ 

-O  , '•J 


fe*TG 


c <u 

mU  r-O' 
qj  -M 
^“£1  U-t 

.5  o 

d) 

ci,rQ 

e ^ 

r^  *-d 

G 

Ctf 


■g  S 


c b 
ns  g 
P* 

u u’S 

H.'g  § 

c*  O 

£ A 

$* 

__  d> 

*T5  c; 

G -g 
G ,04 


>—>  • 
G as 


£ <L> 

u ,xS 

rr*  _i_» 


G G 

-G 

*5  co 

S ° 

G 


4-> 

nd 

*G'<4H 

£ o 

■S3 


5-h  CL» 
aj  cj 

G S 


o 

Oh 

G 

,<d 


PH 

G 3 
R cm 
r?  ,<-> 
o ^ 

CJ  <L> 


g G 

<L>  ^ 
O to 

o o 


-S'55 

?• 

P*t3 

Jij. 


<L>  S 

•5  e 


G Cl) 

.2  rS 

5-  ■4“* 

QJ  tHH 

Oh  O 

d <L> 
to 

cff'S 

^ O 

,<l>  4 
cj  Ch-i  g 

=s  .£  p 

S4 


JZ  E 


2 

csCi 


£ 


Q 


So 


MUSCLES  SITUATED  ON  THE  OS  HUMERI. 

Bicep: flexor  cubiti.  Two  heads,  one  from  The  tuberofity  at  To  bend  the  fore? 

the  coracoid  procefs,  the  upper  end  of  the  ra-  arm,  which  it  does  with 
the  other,  called  the  dius,  at  its  fore  part,  great  ftrength,  and  to: 
long  head,'  from  the  and  a little  below  its  aflilt  the  fupinators. 


( 85  ) 


bO 

_G 

» 

ju» 

"»3 

3 

3 

o> 

hO 

.S 

tg  1 

ts  « 

G 

QJ 

X 

ra  jj 

<D 

-f*  CJ 

O 

^ E 

g 

G 

<u 

-4-J 

X 

1) 

G 


- £ 


o 


o 

V* 

a, 

r2 

*0  rj 

$4 


^3  UJ, 

E-*  0 
02 


o g 

2 

S ji 

^ o 


<u 


V 


S3 

P t-M 
O 

CJ  4_J 

r-G 

u a 


A g 

OC  *3 

CJ 

5 — 

!U  O 


'O  • 
0 ~ 

a 5 

cj  Oh 

fccjj 

tL. 

.G  CJ 

-M  ^ 

o 

<u  o 
bJD  . 

■G 

<U 


S C5 
O 

G 


<L> 


OJ 


G y w 
,-C  +->  -d 


_ r-;  <L> 

p-(  jo  r3 

*■  fl  ** 


£ 04 


t , , 

04  ~ O 
u ^ 

Si  S <0 

G 0^ 

(D  c5  25  . 

GG  c m 

b ^4  2 

<2  ra  £ 


rt 


G _ 

<D 

x o 

QJ  ^ 

<L> 

> G ^ 

E-1 

H3 


*3 

ft* 


H 


ct1 


6. 


a 

3 

Qj 


MUSCLES’ 


MUSCLES  SITUATED  ON  THE  FORE-ARM, 


( 86  ) 


*3 

rc 

O 


CD 


ud 

sd 


^ -id 

c 

P-«  ^ 
P Ad 


fc3 

Ctf 

O 


Md 


nd 

P 


O 

H 


bO 

bO 

.B 

^3 

c 

3 

<D 

X 

X 

CD 

CD 

sd 

C 

be 

.B 

>r5 

p 


Ad  5-H  '“P  , , r-t  « 

t3  cy  ^ 


bo  os  ^ 
«-° s 


W) 


a 

° A 


„h  :h 

-S  A,  <£ 


TP 

cS 


•A  <u 


pH 


Pb  .a 

HA 


s g 

CD  Jp 
4->  ^ 

X CD 

cd  _p 


,p 

H 


nd 


P 

o 

Ad 

”3  jd  r" 
g-<  oj 
b bO 

5 s 

rt  c_p 


O 

Ad 


CD  Ad 

■SH 


be  ra 

_l  P t^H 

<-P  O 
! cj 

; ^3  ^ 
! P 5s 

; p rQ 

1 ” <u 

g -c 

rS  f-i 


C .S 

CD  o 

bJ0"~ 

P 

Ud  ^D 

^ P 
<D  O 

Ad  Ci 


O 

Ad 


CD 


CD 

Ah  ^ 
O (D 
c o Ad 

pE-< 


o 

Ad 


. CA 

Jh  H 
CD  C3 

t-S  tj 

u £ 
rn  <u 

.a  _p 

r~'  H 

a>  *• 
rd. 


u P 
0 J 5— • 

aC  £3 


<l)  jb 

•5  H 1 


^ fll  gl 

E:  i-. 


s S p c E 

D jd  CD  2 ^ 

X <D  X CD  $ 
<D  _p  CD  Jh  CD 

4->  rz 

QJ  Hp  CD  C-+H  D 

a °p  op 

T,  ^ 

Tj  T3 


e ■>? 

3 22 

r-*  P 

“*  o 

oo  cj 

° Jh 

CD  'D 


tl  3 S 

4,  ° E 

°r^i 

AH  a, 

A"*  _p 

rO 


^d 

G 

o 

<j  % 

! H 8 

' §3  = 


S4H  I 
O c3 

S-. 

OJ  u 
np  • O 

O^g 


.Q 

^3 


<3 

<3 


„£0 


radii 

H 

Q 

Co 

H 

Q 

CO 

,§0 

^3 

’i 

. ^ 

O 

*3 

V.  ^ 

■ 5 ^ 

52 

‘■gs 

<Xj  * Hi 

X 

1*1-5^ 

*§  5 
hq 

t-5 

52  ^ 

1 w 

<3 

Q 


§ 


k-0 


( 87  ) 


"CJ 


T3 

a 


o 


43 

O 

r* 


2^ 

JS* 

CJ 


o 

E-i 


U £ 

« o 

CJ  J3 
^ £ 
,-  43 

■5  t 

QJ  <3 


8 § 

<ij  42 

Z E 

43  3 


±1  42 

* £ 
■u  ~g 


B & ^ 

<u  o 

6 H 

§ a £ 42 


H S' 


4->  QJ 

g 5' 

£ •£ 
rt 


-g 

to 


cd  j£ 

qj 

<U  ^ 

H 'S 


o 

cu 

« 

JJ  -g 

~ 43 

co  " 

£ -5 

.o  ^ 


-a  . tc 

£ - -o 

OiDr  — c; 
o go  - -g  JJ 
re  ■-=  g i3 

ti  « ~ j&g 
S J>  o .2  o 
" u ii 

- -o 


+-> 
Uh 

o 


gj  , 


.r 

§ -5 


si 

qj  o 
CL, 

£ v 


a 


'"S 


£ o 


x _ 

> ° 
£ _Q 


G •_  ^ ’ ‘ O ^ 

re  G c o g 

Dh  c=J  o 

K^.2S  c'ig^’i 

“ 'eJ  T3  'd  3 “ <u  E 

c re  c 43  43  43 

Cw  5-1  Cvf  -4->  -*-<  4-» 


-a 

a 

o 

CJ  ,j4 
Id  £ 

£ § 

o 2 


.QJ 

*>s 

TJ 

C 

O 

o >r; 

13  S 

£ § 

cj  2 

. CJ  w 


QJ  h3  QJ 

|n: 

o ° 
O eft 
U 2l® 

2 S g 

P S o 

■K  3 ^ 
-e  -C  ^ 


o 

CJ  QJ  CJ 

Cm  *-*h 

o o 


r£ 

"a 

O ri 

8 3 


<-M  CJ 

o fc.o 

QJ  "U 

•p. v 

8 § 

8 | 

re  Z ; 
^ uj 
° £ " 
QJ 


CJ  • 

— 5?n 

4-»  CjO 


. "d 

CO  ’”3 


O co 

3 

W O.-  c 
t3  til  -d  c 

T3  ^ cd 

. O U QJ 

' p >-  

£ cj  -d 

I 4-)  /— 

.2  £ 5-4 

~ rt 
^ 4_r  cj 

"3  £ 


QJ 

£ ^ 


£ 

QJ 

6 

rt 

to 


^3 


*4J 

I 

5*. 

Hsa 

fc  . 

si 

2 

41 

‘C 

Vi 

iv 

c. 

H 

*§ 

Q) 

L, 

os 

"§ 

V.  -g 
t;  o 

J- 

- ft* 

■S 

>e  • 

fei 

05  .$ 

5 

ft 

Extenfor 


Name.  Arif es  from  Inf  cried  into  Vfe. 

Extenfor  fecundi  inter-  The  back  of  the  ulna  A The  third  and  laft  Ifc  ftretch  the  thumb 

wdii,  and  interoffeous  liga-  bone  of  the  thumb.  obliquely  backwards. 


( 88  3 


G 


<U 


. rQ 

cl; 

ho  fn 
c 
tp 


i rH  — < 

PhX  g 
8 

« rt  C 

H c?  y 

o <u 


ca 


CJ 

-C 


m o 
C o rT  a 
o c H g 
a.  o g 

a 


CO 
Vh 
<U 

bO 
c 

a y 

f-M 
O 


cH 

03 


nd  ' 
G 
<u 

< 

O 

Eh 


3 

pa 


u-< 

Q 


<U 
G 

c3  • o 

CX-i  gj  r-Q 

Cu 

O G ^ 

IS'4?  § 

<U  CU  <U 
d ^ ,<u 

o ,o  '-~i 
<u  ^ <u 

.o  y -a 
B-Sh 


j?P  ® • 
c +-»  G 

r&  ’X) 

^ r^.3 
<U  4-J  Vm 

iti  p 
u aj 

<u  T3  y 
bCit 
S <3 

[fl  S-.  ° 

,a  '-2  g 

y >h  « 
<U  O 

S PhXJ 


oj  y <u 
rC~!  ?-G  r-G 


-M  L,h 

o o 

"w- 

&.  s 

o 
<u 
g 
o 


<u 


<-w 

o 

4-* 

G 

’o 

Ctt 

ctf 


co  <U  o 
SSs'S’p 


y a S 

or  g 
r ‘ g°£*  3 

.o 


’ey  c 
dn  b3 


T3 

■XJ 


V 


O •¥  s g 

ap  u 

-a  £ g -g 

r!  O _S  •*-* 


J =>Uh 
■T  y O 


O iJ 


3 

.y  3 o 
<u  1X1  1” 

. t-4  u o 

i -O  ' 


T.  -y 

rt  H 
CV” 

K "g 
iu  5 

Oh  1,1 

&<  - 
O C3 
C 

<u  ~G 


CU  - • 

8-  3 

c:  - Ph-3 
tS.  Ph  P -d 


rG 


<u 


X3  . 
G 2 

J 

5 g 2 

6 g> 

^ OH 
co  ^ ^ 

§h  g 
S o 


^ . 

s 

,4 

. 

s S 

Vi 

^3 

0 

e g 
.■§  ^ 

*-s 

?s 

-SP  h 

^0 

« 

c 

Q) 

*13  -c^ 

' 

g p 

5 

*3 

Cj 

kj 

a 

Is 

fe,  ~l 

§ 

Pronator  radii  quad-  The  inner  and  lower  The  radius  oppofite  T o roll  the  radius  in» 
ratus.  part  of  the  ulna.  to  its  origin.  ' wards. 


( 89  ) 


^ « 
3 H, 

,3  "3 

<U  O 
J o 


r3 

e 

o 

u . 

eg  4a 


33  o 

C ga 


o 

£ 

<1 

■ffi 

W 

K 

E-< 

Z 

o 

>H 

Pm 

W 

>— I 

ffi 

O 

n 

w 

<1 

Z 

►— i 

CO 

co 

W 

Z 

a 

CO 

z 

S 


43  cw 

O ° 


^•3 

Eh  |-  g H a 

- - 'o 


i;  . 


bp 

h3 


rt  a 
«J  43 
t3  -m 

£ 0 
,ci  ai 

'-i-H  /-H 

QJ  -H 

C;  o 

i-Q 

fcS 

o P 


rTJ 

S 

G 


G 

<U 

r-P 

O 

H 


G 

O 


ji  <_9 


H . G 

S-  c [H 

x £ 

ty  c. 


£ g 


CJ  flj 

ChG 
rt  -uj 


O 

|G 

Ph^ 


cS 

Mh  ^ 
03  O 03 

o 

O w C 

Ps 

,,  C U 
y <L.  43 

C 

g - 
Eh  s a 

<v 

to  e 

cG 

43  re 

« S'  O 

oO  cj 

rt  c-iH  4_1 

P G 

05  CJ 

° 6 


• 

c 

ci. 


G5 

g 

3 

»-G 


bO 


cj 

Z OJ 
T3  rG 

£ s 
eg 


eg 

<43 


t 

a 

43 


o 

u-  * 
G 

cu 

rG 

Eh 

4a‘ 

g 

3' 

Eh  g 

G Gl 
G 4J 

43. 

4-> 

o 

A 

eg 

’ , 

03 

CJ 

rs 

the 

:iga- 

Lum» 

nO 
a 
i re 


g 

3 

43 


43  43 


bJO  43  -o 


3 


IS 


cd 


O 

Eh 


M3 


O 
| 

6 H 


-?  o 


| H S>iM 


t-G  1 


rG  £ 


-M  >o 


O 

P< 


8 -5 

<v  o 

Eh  g 
o 
-P 


^ & 
CJ  G 
rG  <G 


C d3 
O -*-»- 

G2  ;g 

G fl> 

^•5 
n h 

y i4-, 
G ZT 
4-J  G 

aj 

£ q 


H T3 


bO 


<D 

G 

O 

rG 


S A 


CJ  Z-< 
G 

Ph<_G  Z 

U 'n-t 

s ^ 


03 

^ O 
o ,g  2 „_. 
re  -3  H3  ^ 

yrg^  re 

g £ cs 
y u y 43 
p "£  H § 
^ -fi  • 


rt  O 
bo 

1G  G 


s a 


G n^j 

G co 

g H S 1 

S y-  5 

N g G 


•e^ 


■s^ 


•®s 


«3 

-§ 


R3 

>* 


H a 


Name.  Arlfes  from  Inferted  into  Vfe. 

AbduHormn'mi  digitt  The  annular  liga-  The  lint  bone  of  the  To  draw  the  little 
mntius.  rnent  and  os  pififorme.  Jtttle  finger.  finger  from  the  reft; 


( 90  ) 


o 

G 

O 


+•»  o 

Vs 

QJ  (L> 
> 4=1 
O w 

£ 

O Vs 

^ I 

o 


ua  . 

<u 

.e!  >- 

4-»  <L> 

rG 

fe-  ^ 

g 2 

<-+h 

o *■* 

r~  <U 

H L'O 
G 

^a 


W 


<U 

G 

O 

3 Vs 

Gs  ° 

tr 

s ,s 

1-3 


5 , 
<u  1 

JS' 


« 

US 


c 

o 

.£> 

eg 


6 

cS 

(M 


0 73 
g* 

a a 

3 


bn 

y <3 

a -t-> 
+-*■ 
5G 


ft  ^ 

a 


cd  r« 

3 ^ 
a u 

§ s 

TJ. 

<l>  £ 

^ **■ 
p~*  4-1 

pH  G 

<L> 

& 


<U 

hG 


G 

O 

"3 
*3  y 

£ ta 

tL>  <L> . 

■5  & 

c >. 
<u  <u 
aj  Xt 


<«s 

w 

Pd 

H 

X 

W 

X 

o 

t— I 

cd 

W 

Bh 

£ 

(—1 

w 

w 

H 

Pu 

O 

to 

W 

G 

O 

CO 

G 


C) 

Rs 


Cl  t|o 


.§3 

^3 


’.8'tnaUs.  The  anterior  edge  of  The  upper  part  of  To  bend  the  thigh, 

the  os  pubis.  the  linea  afpera  of  the 


AdduRor  lotigv * The  upper  and  Fore  The  middle  and  back  To  bend  the  thigh,' 

remoris.  part  of  the  pubis.  part  of  the  linea  afpe-. 


r s1  i 


.SP  ^ 
.a  -a 
*■*  c3 
<u  >s 


•n 

6 y 

^ o 
o S 
Eh^ 

g 


c 

]S  cH 

rd 

<L)  g 
O 
£ 


_ 'XJ 
O J-« 


XS 

d 

c* 

to 

n3 

U e- 

G rj 

& bh 

js  IS 

. Ui 

d rd  <u 

hn  a a 

w p,  4J 

G o u 


: H Eh 

, u 

!■  .a 


a? 

MS 
13-  rt 

-M 

l>  g 
aa  u 

-*-*  Vi 

T3  *J 
U .3 
X rM 
W C 

rP  W.S 
E-f-rs  t 
§ S 


=s 
*— < 
U) 


ct: 

IS 

in 

o 


<U  <L> 

cu.o, 

Cuba 

3*  3 

13  £ 


g ~ 

.5#  4J 


G , 

©4.? 


fcxOv 

g 


<u  <u 

It 

<u  3 

-C  -5 
Eh- 


2 


G 4-» 
oj  .-i 
G CL» 


S JS' 

ca  - 

Ji.o 

H g 

c 


t4~»-  4)  ■ 

o ^3 


bO. 


fa  fa 
B-tS* 


• G 


J*  s G 

I 


<u 

>-G 


<U 


G 

G 

. 


bJD  u. 

,-G 

cj 

L-i  O 


^.s 

3 -9 

*j-  CU 
3 M 
cu  o 

g-JUr 

« ° 

. r-f  co 

^ I 


O ^*4  - 

G © 


Q>  QJ 

I- 


tj,  T5 

d 

P G' 

Q ^ 


G — i 
s*  G 


O 


1 ^ \B 


3 d • <u 

-ft  — o .5  . 


.2  g,: 


G 


D^rd 

— -d 
•x)  -*H3 

S «i*s 

53  o 
<u 

G QJ 


S3  p*-^ 
Eh  t:  u Eh 

&& 


; uu  fan  o 

a -h.  ^ » | 

-c  sa  «.  .2 

■■**-  .d  y . o.  5 


o 3 <u  ® rg  oj  p«  -0.  g <u 


03 

^3  , 


I 


‘*uoiuij:hpgnvvo  sfciujj 


►3 


Glutcui 


{ 9*  3 


to  bO  bp 
2 S rC 


bo 


he 


S'.'S 


a 

}-* 

O OJ 

H S 


to 


"r  *5 
* »*»  ■*-' 


*N 


o u 

jj 


<u 

ab 


£ » ? » 
x -d  'p 

o go  | 

H BH  | 

1:3  2 

o o 


8 B 

x c 

QJ  d . 


JJ 

b o5 
P 

j- 

~ rt 

J> 
"2 
o 


H 


<j 


‘ S <-2  <-p 

rt  txO 


2 "j  w 

g 

in  <u  rt 

O bJO-g 
t3  P 


<U  rj 

<1  "5  E-i 


p s 8 

<x^ 


QJ 


O 

rP 


rt 

Ph 


d 

o 

GJ 

dd  ; 

K 


*-d  c +J 
d S <-m 

^ s p 

’S'-S  p 

rt  v£  '5 

o 


CJ 


<J 


CJ 


£ d *2-5  £ 

d cj  t P~*  ^ 
d n3  C-+h 

« » Cl  1 P QJ 


£ .q 


g 
2 

SH^ 

o «_2 


K 

O 

E— < 

w 

W 

tn 

H- 

P 

O 

Q 

W 

Eh 

< 

P 

Eh 

i— i 
co 

co 

W 

P 

o 

co 

P 


"u 


es 

o 

Eh 


oq  o 
% 


• a ^ 
P hb 
c2P 


C 3^ 
H 2 H 
<U  £ c/> 

c q j- 

C!  d <J 

.5  rQ  > 

■ s 8 


<J 

6 ^ 
.2 
QJ  *P 

*CS  ^ 


T3  . '‘P 

d d d 

2'r§  s; 

o -x  o 
ex  o Pi 
0.^3  On, 
3 u 3 

«J  £;  O' 

-C  ° -« 

Eh  t;  Eh 

c3 

Ph 


d 

p .- 

ip  I 


C JJ 
Ph-P 

£h 

i)  vi2 


rC 

Eh 


£ Cm 


&.B  ° .& 


4-»  O 

d P 

PH  ^ 
<u  *"0 
•-  d 
O d 


Ph 


Ph  h-J 

§\^ 
jj  t”  u £' 

-C  o -5  a 

HsH| 

CX  33 


£ ’ 
P 


P. 


& 

<P 


55 

53 

J3 


R 

u So 
°.§ 


Co 


i£ 

<o 

G 


Rcflus  femora,  The  lower  fpinous  The  upper  and  fore  To  extend  the  leg. 

vel  procefs  of  the  ilium,  & part  of  the  patella. 

Rc8us  cruris.  edge  of  the  acetabur 

him. 

Vajlus  externus.  The  root  of  the  great  The  upper  and  lat-  To  extend  the  leg. 

trochanter,  and  linea  eral  part  of  the  patel- 


( 93  ) 


hO  bO 


T3 

a 


o 

Erl 


<L» 


-d 

g 


o 


*d 

c 


bb  hd 


CO  <U 


t i-g 

O t?  o 


TS 

c 


<U 


C 


G 

.S  . ti 
rO  ^2  5 
5 ” 

Ca  4_> 


P* 


U i 
d 

G 

G 


<U 

rC 


O 


jA  . 
U £ 

n £ 
»-Q  , o 


tyj- 

Ki 


<3J  P"l  Q.  0 '*«'  ■*— 

P-l  (L>  p . _2  Pn  11  n m P**  OJ 

£-je  &<-a  &*p= 

G 4-i  ^ rrl  G 4-*  ^ 3j-j 


'd 

r-.  ^ *5  § 

&rS  f’lo’C 

J7~  g’o  v. 

y _c  & a •?= 


fts 

p ep  ™ 

3 *J  u - ^ ■ 

fll  <U  OJ  t-M  0^r>  QJ  ^ 

-c  oil  *3  o-c®^  0-5 

• Cts  S . rt  «j  rt  * . 

,2  D,  « * r;  fr,.£ 


•p  B 


Cw 

_ 9 

<u 
re  CL, 


w 

p£T 
. -u 
J-<  <-m 
O 
G 

n 4-> 


g-s 

M-  o 


*-«  — 


<u 


o 


rQ- 

G 


d 

•J3 


o 


d 

G 


.PV 


KJ  d fcG  d B 
d-  -C-  G 


B d 

§ 5C 


r-b-C  d-  rP-H  f-' 

o ^ 

G ■*-»  • r-l  » F-l  • ** 


<5, 

cv 


% 


5S 


2 S.3 
2 2s 

U<o  * 


I ^ 

R *r> 

•i  s* 

Si 

cq  ft*. 


« 


Popliteus *■ 


Name,,  Ay  if  is  from  Infer! ed  into  . Uft. 

Popliteus.  The  external  condyle  The  upper  and  inner  To  affift  in  bending' 

<?f  the  thigh  bone.  part  of  the  tibia.  the  leg. 


( 94  ) 


o 

w 

G 

w 

K 

F 

55 

O 

fi 

W 

F 

£ 

F 

i— t 

co 

CO 

W 

F 

o 

CO 

£> 


-M 

1 

»’■ 

G 

C 

42 

«J 

o 

42 

cj 

G 

4-» 

X 

cj 

o 

42 

o 

42 

-G 

r« 

CJ 

CJ 

-M 

*Tj 

4-» 

T3 

.s 

M 

rS 

G 

cj 

4-» 

GJ 

G 

CJ 

■F 

X 

CJ 

o 

fcS  c2 

* CJ 

T) 

G 

CJ 

r-Q 

CJ 

o 

s 

O 

F 

o 

F 

H- 

^ b.O 

O 

H 

' o 

H 

'p 

.S 

& 

_-M 

« 

gj 

«-3i 
M.y  4 

u 

C5 

CJ 

CJ 

g 

? 

’cj 

cj  d 
Gh  cj 

r* 

,D  33  =3 

G 4 

■o 

3 

CJ 

CO 

^M 

u 

d CCS 

CO 
’ (J 

Jd 

+-» 

^ 

W CN  w^> 

■<J  C N 

,«3 
J=!  i-S 

* G 

G 

CJ 

rp 

G co 

"13 

CJ 

cm 

O 

•-)  O 
14  3.0 

O g 

"rt  y 

U 

r3 

G O 

co  G 

° © 
Tj 
CJ  G 
^ cj 


S ° 

F ^ 

2^ 
a o 
o 
<u 


<u  O ' ' 


c/5  _ 

° .2. 


£ 6 
.F  6 

* n 


<L)  <U 

— -C 


. S .a 


o F 


-Q  O 

^ *,.<3 

jj  s.-s 

+3  CM  ^ 
w\:  y 

. O 4J 
Tj  G f , , 

S ^ O' 

^ T3  rd 

:i  § J 

i a *3' 


oj  r3 

a 

G 


. £ % fG 
g o 

3 O ^3  4m 
p 33  ° 

C H F M <u 

M o 3 3 

.5  ^2 

U-t  in  ■*-» 


-d 

g 
o • 


x p 
o 

4->  fV 

ja  ta 

S o 


o 

a S 

CJ  , CJ 
J-J  <>M 

3 

O CO. 


y 

F-S 


S SM 

rf  <L>  +J 
bJD  Ph  <u 

j_,  G +-» 

G qj  F-< 

^33  O 

'u.f  t; 

ia  <5 

o O 


T3  CTf 
3 3 

T2ds 


fcxO  rJ 

33  P- 


Si  S 

§3 

C>  er 


C5  Co 

V. 

C9  - 


% 

<s 


• S .5 

K K 


( 95  ) 


<-> 

i 

03 

E 

'O 

& 

G 

O 

}_j 

(LI 

O 

•*-J 

o 

QJ 

OJ 

Ph 

CJ 

Pb 

S 

u 

+-» 

OJ 

*"* 

-a 

o 

£ 

c 


-d 


18  u ^ 
. S 3 %. 

3 s<  a t; 

bo  u Oh  2 

Z 

a a 


& 


to 

ZJ 


o 

H 


cd  • 


G £ 
* 


-C 

H 


> 

o 

V-i 

. 

S - 
S C 


o 

rQ 


5 S 


o 


>> 

r-Q 


bO 
' -3J 

-G 


O 

• ' — > 
cbJ 
: <£ 


o 


'S  : 

U-, 

O 

<u 

l'3'd  • 

_o  e « 

1 ^ « “p 
, _o 


bjO 

<L> 

rC 


8 cu  £ 

;s  u , o 
5 o <*• 

^ d >> 

c£j  ^ 

^ r n ZJ 


b ° 
bOT? 


'-C 

<3J 


o 

4->  <U 
U-  -« 
G" 

p-r"* 


3-5 


'~t~(  c/3  <-<  CJ 

O 3 « -3 

w 8 c «S 

3 *3  i ^ 

pH  J-  H—J  G 

a -o  3 c3  . 

g.5  5 ^ : 

& J*  & 

^ 4J  +J  P ' 

u V2  a3  *"3  ^ { 

+•»  c -P 

r,  - C CJ  r, 

H flj  J CO^ 

x kGrd 

H p;  <u 


.^0 

*X3 


*29 


#g 

”0  . 

G rt 

S£ 

cu  ■*-» 
g.  w 
O,  ^ 

CJ  ^ 
rb  0 

H t: 


b<)  S 

~5  ^ 

S c 

So  ^ 


Je  u 

c s 


i2  -3 

Uh 

t>  ’> 


-5 

*g 


O .- 

h -c 

rG  > 


^ 3 

!"u  >~> 

1 1 
.2  rt 


fe*  ^ 
4b  ^ 
H 2* 

fc}  a 


i-  i- 

C> 


•o-. 


~ -^) 


-.Fkxor 


Name.  Anfes  from  Inserted  into  Xfe. 

Flexor  longus  polllcis  A little  below  the  The  la  ft  bone  of  the  To  bend  the  great 
pedis*  head  of  the  fibula.  great  toe.  toe. 


( 96  ) 


E-t 

O 

o 

.pH 

w 

K 

•H 

X 

O 

Q 

w 

Eh 

< 

ft 

Eh 

HH 

CO 

!* 

ft 

ft 

ft 

X 

u 

05 

w 

ft 

O 

05 

ft 

43 


T) 

C 


.O 

Eh 


-8 

- ri  X 
4J  <U 

-U-i  <n 
O u 

<y  2 
S ft  • 

Js-ft 

4-> 

ft!  O -ft 

i ’■a 


T3 

G 

o 


■ rd  ^ 
c rS 
<u  ^ 

ft  s 

o 


<-G 


j-j 

rd  hC 

-ft  2 +-» 
■F*h  4J  1 

” CL>  Cft1 
ft  u 
fcJO  o 


X*t=3 

G cd 
cd  C 
*"cd  ft-t 

ft  W 
Hd  ^ 

c , 

O Oh 
U O 

ft 
i>  o 
ft  8 


, * ,b->  , • 

£ft  bJ> 
o -d  § 

Tl  uft 
G 

<D  5^  0 

•H  S J 
3 ft  ^ 
£ 

(U  -M 


-43 

cd 


0 ,42 


P-. 

P-, 

ft 


o 

• ’ — > 
eg 

<u  5 

G -m 

4-» 

,~c:  a 
c 

<u  Jr, 
o KO 

o y 

’ r.  I r-ft 
«-w 

o 


G A 
X X 

4J  <u 

ft-,  ^ 

O o 


qj  w 

£ 3 


P-tr-ft 


sit 


•»—  - rN 

u «j  e3  1X1 
fj  <£  o 
_ , o 

G mh  qj  ■ * 

00^ 

"c  tJ  Eh 

cd  cd 
CL,  CL, 


cd  js 
qj  G 
ft  G 

fcGftS 


C 5 

cd  „ 
co 

--P  O 
G 

cd  CJ 

J_  ft-t 

qj  ■*~> 
P,C-M 
Oh  O 


Cd 
CL, 
H ft 
O . 


Uh 

o 


s, 


£ CO 

C 'u 


s fc 

g 

Uh  3 
o .1=1 

bO 

C ^ 
O co 

•nd  G 
G U) 


.IH 


-ft  * 


co 


'Cft  Ph 


cd  fJQ 
co-  S 

. ^ bH 

ja^iS 

s'§ 
& 3 


rH  B 


S 

.<5  ? 

p <5 

v V 
- 

5^  ^ 

Q> 

V v5 

fe. 


■‘S 


s 


R 


f***. 


cu 


{ 97  ) 


to 
.£3  3 


~ G 

o .2 


O 

c — i 

«ci 


H3 


-g 

'£h 


ra  cS 


w -fj 
•f=  •*•'  • 

is  5 ^ 

to  ^ ~ 
*3  <u  y 
"O  J3  J 
G3 

QJ  o 

G 4-» 


O 

Eh 


(Ll  ^J 

o g 


o 

£ ti 

gs  -s 

,qj  O 

v-<  • — > 

s«  s 

p '-i-l  4-J 

O u tJ 

..  o £ 


Eh 


W) 


U> 

o rj 

*C 


Q>  R OO 
U QJ 

cc 

■*->  o "o 

5 


bog  § 

« 

t-H  , r* 
G co 


£ "p 

G h 
nj  £ 

£h  S 

a i 


C rH 

;s  & 
1 ^ 
cH  * 
>:  <u 

« io 

JT* 

Eh  4! 


C cS  . 

Qj  p QJ 

-c  3 O 


«3  " 

<-+H 

~ O 

• ~ QJ 
^ G 

^ 2 

u «-a 


•o 

H 


■ty 

u- 

<-G 


Qj 

r-G 


r,  QJ 
^ G 
O 

*= 


<H_  O 

2 & 

2 I 

qj 

v o 


c« 

ctf 

G 

-*-* 

G 

O 

u 


43 

rG 


■c  .y 
c ~ 

"2  ° 
G Q. 

QJ  ^ 

:j 

Eh  ^ 

-d 

g 


1 G-; 

G O 

o 

CJ  ^ 

QJ 

g»  G 
G O 
QJ  ,G 

s 

rt  QJ 

^■5  ^ 

(U  bo'~§ 

G3  c o; 

rs  r 

QJ 

G ^ 


G 

O 

rO 


£3 


*«*> 

*^s 


k 

*§ 

■*« 

i 


,4 

^3 

£ 

1 

K 

1 

5$ 

>3 

. ^ 

* ^ 
u 

• 

•s: 

'S  . 

Jo 

*§ 

*§ 

■»«t  r§ 

c§ 

■50 

o 

-1, 

1 

% 

^ . 
, «-5 

t§ 

. ^ 
*5 

>§:& 

iS 

k 

* 

b 

^ • 

• N 

k 

fHYSJOLOGf 


C 9§  ) 


PHYSIOLOGY  AND  PHENOMENA  OF  MUSCU- 
LAR MOTION. 

Miifcular  motions  are  of  three  kinds  ♦ 
namely,  voluntary,  involuntary,  and  mixed. 
The  voluntary  motions  of  mufcles  are 
filch  as  proceed  from  an  immediate  exertion 
of  the  active  powers  of  the  will  : thus  the 
mind  directs  the  arm  to  be  raifed  or  depreffed, 
the  knee  to  be  bent,' tile  tongue  to  move,  ,&c. 
The  involuntary  motions  of  mufcles  are 
thofe  which  are  performed  by  organs^  feem- 
ingly  of  their  own  accord,  without  any  atten- 
tion of  the  mind  or  confcioufnefs  of  its  aCtive 
power  ; as  the  contraction  and  dilatation  of 
the  heart,  arteries,  veins,  abforbents,  ftomach, 
snteflines,  8zc.  The  mixed  motions  are 
thofe  which  are  In  part  under  the  control  of 
the  will,  but  which  ordinarily  a £t  without  our 
being  confcious  of  their  adting  ; as  is  perceiv- 
ed in  the  mufcles  of  refpiration,  the  inter- 
.coftals,  the  abdominal  mufcles,  and  the 
-'(liaphragm. 

When  a mufcle  a£ts,  it  becomes  Ihorter 
and  thicker  ; both  its  origin  and  infertion  are 
drawn  towards  its  middle.  The  fphincter 
mufcles  are  always  in  action  ; and  fo  likewife 
are  antagonift  mufcles,  even  when  they  feem 
at  reft.  When  two  antagonift  mufcles  move 
with  equal  force,  the  part  which  they  are  de- 
iigned  to  move  remains  at  reft  ; but  if  one  of 
the  antagonift  mufcles  remains  at  reft,  while 


( 99  ) 

the  other  acts,  the  part  is  moved  towards  tlie 
centre  of  motion. 

All  the  mufcles  of  living  animals  are  con- 
ftantly  endeavouring  to  fhorten  themfelves. 

When  a mufcle  is  divided,  it  contracts.  If 
a mufcle  be  ftretched  to  a certain  extent, it  con- 
tracts, and  endeavours  to  acquire  its  former 
dimenfions,  as  foon  as  the  ftretchtng  caufe 
is  removed  : this  takes  place  in  the  dead 
body  ; in  -mufcles  cut  out  of  the  body,  and 
alfo  in  parts  not  mufcular,  and  is  called  by 
the  immortal  Haller  vis  mortua , and  by 
fome  -vis  ehjiica.  It  is  greater  in  living  than 
in  dead  bodies,  ;and  is  called  the  tone  of  the 
mufcles. 

When  a mufcle  is  wounded,  touched,  or 
otherwife  irritated,  it  contracts  independent  of 
the  will  ; this  power  is  called  irritability, 
and  by  Haller  vis  injita  ; it  is  a property  pe- 
culiar to  and  inherent  in  the  mufcles.  The 
parts  of  our  body  which  poffefs  this  property 
are  called  irritable,  as  the  heart,  arteries,  muf- 
eles,  &c.  to  diftinguifh  them  from  thofe  parts 
which  have  no  mufcular  fibres.  With  regard 
to  the  degree  of  this  property  peculiar  to  vari- 
ous parts,  the  heart  is  the  moil  irritable,  then 
the  ftomach  and  inteftines  ; the  diaphragm, 
the  arteries,  veins,  abforbents,  and  at  length 
the  various  mufcles  follow  ; but  the  degree  of 
irritability  depends  upon  the  age,  fex,  temper 
ament,  mode  of  living,  climate,  ft  ate  of  health 
idipfyncrafy,  and  likewife  upon  the  nature  c 
the  ftimulus, 

Whet 


( ICO  ) 


When  a mufcle  is  Simulated, either  through 
the  medium  of  the  will  or  any  foreign  body, 
it  contracts,  and  its  contraction  is  greater  or 
lefs  in  proportion  as  the  ftimulus  applied  is 
greater  or  lefs.  The  contraction  of  mufcies 
is  different  according  to  the  purpofe  to  be 
ferved  by  their  contraction  : thus,  the  heart 
contracts  with  a jerk  -7  the  urinary  bladder, 
flowly  and  uniformly  ; puncture  a mufcle,  and 
its  fibres  vibrate  ; and  the  abdominal  mufcies 
aCt  flowly  in  expelling  the  contents  of  the  rec- 
tum. Relaxation  generally  fucceeds  the  con- 
traction of  mufcies,  and  alternates  with  it. 

The  use  of  this  property  is  very  confider- 
able  ; for  upon  it  depends  all  mufcular  mo- 
tion, and  the  function  of  every  vifcus,  except 
that  of  the  nerves* 


BURSALOCY, 


DOCTRINE  OF  THE  BURSA!  MUCOSAL 

Burs.®  mucofse  are  mucous  bags,  compof- 
ed  of  a proper  membrane,  containing  a kind 
of  mufcous  fat,  formed  by  the  exhaling  arte- 
ries of  their  internal  furface.  They  are  of 
different  sizes  and  firmness,  and  are  con- 
nected here  and  thereby  cellular  membrane, 
with  the  capfular  ligaments  of  cavities,  ten- 
dons, bones,  or  ligaments.  Their  interna! 

furfacs 


( 101  ) 

furface  is  highly  vafcular,  fmooth,  and  finning. 
Situation.  Various.  Division,  into  vagi- 
nal and  vehicular.  Use.  To  lubricate  the 
mufcles  and  tendons,  which  are  very  frequent- 
ly in  motion. 

BURSJE  MUCOSiE  OF  THE  HEAD. 

i.  A burfa  of  the  Juferibr  oblique  mufcle  of 
the  eye  fituated  behind  its  trochlea  in  the  or- 
bit. 2.  The  burfa.  of  the  digq/lricus , fituated 
in  the  internal  furface.  of  its  tendon.  3.  A 
burfa  of  the  circumf exits , or.  tenfor  palati,  fitu-  ^ 
ated  between  the  hooklike  procefs.  of  the  fphee- 
lioid  bone  and  the  tendon  of  that  mufcle.  4. 

A burfa  of  the  Jlerno  hyoideus  tnufcle,  fituated 
between  the  os  hyoideus  and.  larynx,. 

EURSFE  MUCOSAS,  SITUATED  ABOUT  THE 
SHOULDER.  JOINT. 

x.  The  external' acromial,  fituated  under  the 
acromion,  between  the  coracoid  procefs,  del- 
toid mufcle,  and  capfular  ligament.  2.  The 
internal  acromial , fituated.  above  the  tendon  of 
the  infra-fpinatus  and  teres  major  : it  often 
communicates  with  the  former.  3.  The  cora- 
coid burfa , fituated  near,  the  root  of  the  cora- 
coid procefs  : it  is  fometimes  double,  and 
fometimes  triple.  4.  The  clavicular  burfa , 
found  where  the  clavicle  touches  the  coracoid 
procefs.  5.  The  fab  cl  avian  burfa , between 
the  tendon  of  the  fubclavicularis  mufcle  and 
the  firft  rib.  6.  The  coraco-brachial , placed 
between  the  common  origin  of  this  mufcle  and, 

1 2 the.' 


( 102  > 

the  biceps  and  the  capfular  ligament.  7.  The 
biirfa  of  the  pedoralis  major,  fituated  under  the 
head  of  the  humerus,  between  the  internal 
furface  of  the  tendon  of  that  mufcle  and  an- 
other burfa  placed  on  the  long  head  of  the 
biceps.  8.  An  external  burfa  of  the  teres  ma- 
jor, under  the  head  of  the  os  humeri,  between, 
it  and  the  tendon  of  the  teres  major.  9.  An 
internal  burfa  of  the  teres  major , found  within 
the  mufcle  where  the  fibres  of  its  tendon  di- 
verge. 10.  A burfa  of  the  latif/hnus  dorf,  be- 
tween the  tendon  of  this  mufcle  and  the  os 
humeri.  11.  The  humero-bicipital  burfa,  in 
the  vagina  of  the  tendon  of  the  biceps.  There 
are  other  burfse  mucofce  about  the  humerus, 
but  their  fituation  is  uncertain. 

BURS-ffi  MUCOSjE,  situated  near  the  EL- 
BOW JOINT. 

i . The  radio-bicipital,  fituated  between  the 
tendon  of  the  biceps,  brachialis,  and  anterior 
tubercle  of  the  radius.  2.  The  cubito-radial ,, 
between  the  tendon  of  the  biceps,  fupinator 
brevis,  and  the  ligament  common  to  the  radi- 
us and  ulna.  3.  The  anconeal  burfa,  between 
the  olecranon  and  tendon  of  the  anconeus 
mufcle.  4.  The  capitulo-radinl  burfa , be- 
tween the  tendon  common  to  the  extender  car- 
pi radiai'is  brevis,  and  extenfor  communis 
digitormn  and  round  head  of  the  radius. 
There  are  other  burfas,  but  as  their  fituation 
varies,  they  are  omitted. 


BURSAE 


C 3 


BURSTS  OF  THE  INFERIOR.  PART  OP  THS 
FORE-ARM  AND  HAND. 


On  the  Infids  of  the  Wrift  and  Hand . 

1.  Avery  large  burfa,  for  the  tendon  of 
the  flexor  pollicis  longus.  2.  Four  fort  burfar 
on  the  fore  part  of  the  tendons^  of  the  flexor 
fublimis.  3.  A large  burfa  behind  the  tendon 
of  the -flexor  pollicis  longus,  between  it  and 
the  fore  part  of  the  radius,  capfular  ligament 
of  the  wrift,  and  os  trapezium.  4.  A large 
burfa  behind  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  digito- 
rum  profundus  and  on  the  fore  part  of  the 
end  of  the  radius,  and  fore  part  of  the  capfu- 
lar  ligament  of  the  wrm.  In  feme  fubjecls  it 
communicates  with  the  former,  e.  An  oblong 
burfa , between  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi 
radialis  and  os  trapezium.  6.  A very  fmall 
burfa  between  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi 
ulnaris  and  os  pififorme.. 


On  the  back  Part  of  the  Wrift  and  Hand. 


j 


7.  A burfa  between  the  tendon  of  the  abduc- 
tor pollicis  longus  and  the  radius.  8.  A large 
burfa  between  the  two  extenfores  carpi  radi- 
ales.  9.  Another  below  it,  common  to  the 
extenfores  carpi  radiales.  10.  A burfa,  at  the 
infertion  of  the  tendon  of  the  extenl’or  carpi 
radialis.  1 1.  An  oblong  burfa , for  the  tendon 
of  the  extenfor  pollicis  longus,  and  which  com- 


mumcateS' 


( IQ4  )' 

municates  with  9.  12  .A  burfa  for  the  ten- 

don of  the  extenfor  poUieis  loiigus,  between  it 
and  the  metacarpal  bone  of  the  thumb.  13. 
A burfa  between  the  tendons  of  the  extenfor 
of  the  fore,  middle,  and  ring  fingers.  14  .A 

burf.  for  the  extenfors  of  the  little  finger. 
15.  A burfa  between  the  tendon  of  the  exten- 
for carpi  ulnaris  and  ligament  of  the  wrifL 
There  are  alfo  burfae  mu  cofoe  between  the 
mufculi  lumbrieales  and  interoffei.- 

SUR.S2E  SITUATED-  ME/CR  THE  HIP  JOINT. 

On  the  fore  Part  of  the  Joint. 

1.  The  ileo-puberal , fituated  between  the 
iliacus  internes,  pfoas  magnus,  and  the  capfu- 
lar  ligament  of  the  head  of  the  femur.  42.  The 
pectineal,  between  the  tendon  of  the  pectineus 
and  the  thigh-bone.-  3.  A J 'mall  burfa  of  the 
glutens  medius  mufcle,  fituated  between  it  and 
the  great  trochanter,  before  the,.  infertion  of 
the  pyriformis..  4.  A burfa  of  the  gluteus 
minimus  mufcle  between  its.,  tendon  and  the 
great  trochanter..  5.  The  gluteo-fafcial,  be- 
tween the  gluteus.-  maximus  and  vaflus  ex- 
tern us.. 

On  the  pojlerior  Part  of  the  IPip  Joint. 

6.  The  iubcro-fchlatic  burfa,  fituated  between 
the  obturator  interims  mufcle,  the  poflerior 
fpine  of  theifchium,  and  its  tuberofity.  7.  The 
sbturatory  burfa,  which  is  obk>Pg5  and  found 

between. 


between  the  obturator  internus  and  gemini 
mufcles  and  the  capfular  ligament.  8.  A bur- . 
fa  of  the  femi-membranofus , under  its  origin  and 
the  long  head  of  the  biceps  femoris.  9.  Tbs 
gluico-trochanteral  burfa , fituated  between  the 
tendon  of  the  pfoas  mufcle  and  the  root  of  the 
great  trochanter.  10.  Two  gluteo  femoral 
burfa , fituated  between  the  tendon  of  the 
gluteus  maximus  and  os  femoris.  1 1 . A burfa 
of  the  quadratics  femoris , fituated  between  it  and 
the  little  trochanter.  12.  The  iliac  burfa , 
fituated  between  the  tendon  of  the  iliacus  in* 
ternus  and  the  little  trochanter. 

KURS2E  MUCOS2E,  SITUATED  NEAR  THf 
KNEE  ^OINT. 

i.  The  fupra-genual , which  adheres  to  the 
tendons  of  the  vafcus  and  cruraiis  and  the 
fore  part  of  the  thigh  bone.  2.  The  infra- 
genital  burfa , fituated  under  the  ligament  of 
the  patella,  and  often  communicates  with  the 
above.  3.  The  anterior  genual , placed  be- 
tween the  tendon  of  the  fartorins  gracilis  and 
femitendinofus  and  internal  and  lateral  liga- 
ment of  the  knee.  4.  The  poferior  genual , 
which  is  fometimes  double,  and  is  fituated  be- 
tween the  tendons  of  the  femi-membranofus, 
the  internal  head  of  the  gaflrocnetnius,  the 
capfular  ligament,  and  internal  condyle. 
5.  The  popliteal , confpicuous  between  the  ten- 
don of  that  mufcle,  the  external  condyle  of 
the  femur,  the  femilunar  cartilage,  and  exter- 


C 106  ) 

Dal  condyle  of  the  tibia.  6.  The  burfa  of  the 
biceps  cruris,  between  the  external  part  of  the 
tendon,  the  biceps  cruris,  and  the  external 
lateral  ligament  of  the  knee. 

33URS.E  MUCOS.35,  SITUATED  IN  THE  FOOT. 

On  the  Backy  Side,  and  hind  Part  of  the  Foot. 

1.  A burfa  of  the  tibialis  anticus , between 
its  tendon,  the  lower  part  of  the  tibia,  and 
capfular  ligament  of  the  ankle.  2.  A burfa 
between  the  tendon  of  the  extenfor  policis 
pedus  longus,  the  tibia  and  capfular  ligament 
of  the  ankle.  3.  A burfa  of  the  exte7ifor 
digit  or  um  communis,  between  its  tendons,  the 
tibia  and  ligament  of  the  ankle.  4.  A large' 
burfa , common  to  the  tendons  of  the  peronei: 
mufcles.  5.  A burfa  of  the  peroneus  brevis, 
proper  to  its  tendon.  6.  The  calcaneal  burfa „ 
between  the  tendo  Achillis  and  os  calcis. 

In  the  Sole  of  the  Foot* 

i.  A burfa  for  the  tendon  - of  the'  peroneus 
longus . 2.  A burfa  common  to  the  tendon  of 

the  flexor  pollicis  pedis  longus,  and  the  tendon 
of  the  flexor  digitorum  pedis  communis  lon- 
gus profundus.  3,  A burfa  of  the  tibialis 
pqflicus,  between  its  tendon,  the  tibia,  and 
aflragalus.  4.  Five  burfa  for  the  flexor  ten- 
dons, which  begin  a little  above  the  firft  joint 
of  each  toe,  and  extend  to  the  root  of  the  third 
phalanx  or  infertion  of  the  tendons. 

ANGIOLOGY. 


( *°7  ) 


ANGIOLOGY,  , * 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  VESSELS. 

Vessels  are  long,  membranous  canals, 
which  carry  blood,  lymph,  or  chyle.  Divis- 
ion, into  arteries,  veins  and  abforbenfs. 
Situation.  Except  the  epidermis,  membrana 
arachnoidea,  and  nails,  every  part  of  the  body 
has  veffels,  which  injections  demonftraie. 

OF  ARTERIES. 

Arteries  are  elafcic  membranous  canals, 
which  pulfate  : they  always  become  narrower 
as  they  proceed  from  the  heart  towards  the 
extremities.  Origin,  from  the  ventricles 
of  the  heart  ; namely,  the  pulmonary  artery 
from  the  right,  and  the  aorta  from  the  left, 
ventricle  : fo  that  there  are  only  two  arteries, 
of  which  the  red;  are  branches.  Termina- 
tion, in  veins,  exhaling  veffels,  or  they  anaf- 
tomofe  with  one  another.  Composed  of  three 
membranes,  called  coats  ; an  external  one,  a 
middle  coat,  which  is  mufcular,  and  an  inner 
one,  which  is  fmooth.  Use,  to  convey  blood 
from  the  heart  to  the  different  parts  of  the 
body,  for  nutrition ; prefervation  of  life ; 
generation  of  heat ; and  the  fecretion  of  dif- 
ferent fluids, 

05 


( io8  ) 


OF  THE  AORTA. 

The  aorta  arifes  from  the  left  ventricle  of 
the  heart,  forms  an  arch  towards  the  dorfal 
vertebra;,  then  dcfcends  through  the  opening 
of  the  diaphragm  into  the  abdomen,  in  which 
it  proceeds  by  the  left  fide  of  the  fpine  to  the 
laff  vertebra  of  the  loins,  where  it  divides  into 
' the  two  iliac  arteries.  In  this  courfe  it  gives 
oft',  juft  above  its  origin,  two  coronary  arteries 
to  the  heart,  and  then  forms  an  arch. 

The  arch  of  the  aorta,  gives  off  three 
branches,  which  fupply  the  head,  neck,  and 
arms,  with  blood  ; thefe  are, 

I.  Arteria  innominata,  which  divides 
into  tire  right  carotid  and  right  fubclavian 
arteries. 

II.  The  left  carotid. 

HI.  The  left  subclavian. 

The  carotid  arteries, having  emerged 
from  the  cheft,  run  up  along  the  neck  one  on  | 
each  fide  of  the  trachea,  to  the  angle  of  the 
lower  jaw,  where  they  divide  into  external 
and  internal. 

The  external  carotid  gives  off  eight 
branches  to  the  neck  and  face. 

1.  Arieria,  T'hyroidea,  which  is  very  tortu- 
ous, fupplies  the  thyroid  gland,  and  gives  off  i 
branches  tc'feveral  adjacent  -mufcles. 

2.  A Lingiutlis , which  lies  flat  upon  the 
fide  of  the  tongue,  and  gives  off  the  ramus  /y- 
Adcus,  dorfails  lingua  fublingualis , and  rad:. a. 

A si.  ' 


C I09  ) 

3.  A.  Labialis,  called  alfo  the  externa!  mait* 
ill  ary,  the  angular , and  facial  artery  : it  gives 
off  the  palaiina  inferior , the  fubmentalis , and 
the  coronary  of  the  lips. 

4.  A.  Pharyngea  inferior ■,  which  fends  a 
number  of  fmaji  twigs  about  the  fauces  and 
bafis  of  the  cranium. 

5.  A.  Occipitalis , from  which  the  pofterior 
temporal  arifes. 

6.  A.  Pofterior  auris , which  furnifhes  the 
parts  about  the  cartilages  of  the  ear  with 
blood,  and  tranfmits  the  arteria  tympani  and 
ftylo-maftoidea. 

7.  A.  Maxillaris  interna , which  is  extreme- 
ly tortuous,  and  gives  off — the  fpinous  artery 
•to  the  dura  mater— the  lower  maxillary  artery , 
which  is  included  in  the  lower  jaw,  and  fup- 
plies  the  teeth  and  face— the  pterygoid  arteries, 
which  nourifh  the  pterygoid  mufcles— two  deep 
temporal  arteries , which  lie  wider  than  the  tem- 
poral mufcle.  The  internal  maxillary  then, 
gives  off  a branch , which  almoft  immediately 

I divides  into  the  alveolar  and  infra-orbital ; 

then  an  artery  to  the  palate,  the  fuperior  pa/a- 
I fine  ; the  upper  pharyngeal , which  plays  about 
the  fphsenoid  fmus  ; and,  laftly,  the  nafal  ar~ 
tcry , which  is  tranfmitted  through  the  fphae- 
no-palatine  foramen  to  the  cavity  of  the  nof- 
•trils. 

8.  A.  Temporalis , which  perforates  the  pa- 
rotid gland,  and  fends  off  the  tranfverfalis  fa- 
ciei, . which  inofculates  with  the  arteries  of  the 

K face  5 


( no  ) 


face  5 and  feveral  branches  which  go  to  the 
ear,  forehead,  and  about  the  temples. 

The  internal  carotid  leaves  the  exter- 
nal at  the  angle  of  the  jaw,  and  proceeds  by 
the  par  vagum  and  intercoftal  nerve  to  the  ca- 
rotid canal  in  the  petrous  portion  of  the  tem- 
poral bone,  where  it  is  lhaped  like  the  letter  f, 
and  enters  the  cranium  at  the  fide  of  the  fella 
turcica,  having  given  off  two  very  fmall  twigs 
to  the  pituitary  gland,  and  3d,  4th,  and  5th 
pair  of  nerves  ; and  when  it  has  reached  the 
anterior  clinoid  procefs,  it  fends  off — 

1.  Arteria  Opthaimica , which  is  diftributed 
on  the  eye. 

2.  A.  Anterior  cerebri , which  proceeds  be- 
fore the  fella  turcica,  unites  with  its  fel- 
low, and  forms  the  circle  of  Willis,  from 
wdiich  a branch  proceeds  to  the  third  ventri- 
cle, feptum  lucidum  and  the  arteria  corporis 
callofi. 

3.  A.  Media  cerebri , which  runs  between 
the  anterior  and  middle  lobes  of  the  brain, 
gives  off  th & artery  of  the  choroid  pic""' 


is  loft  on  the  middle  lobe  of  the  brain 


4.  A.  Communicant,  which  proceeds  back- 
wards, and 'loon  inofeulates  with  the  vertebral. 

The  subclavian  artery  arifes  on  the 
rightfide  from  the  arteriainnominata,andonthe 
■ .-ft  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta.  Each  fubcla- 
vkn  rives  off  live  branches. 

The  internal  mammary,  from  which 
,T:  - the  A.  the  mice,  A ..  comes  phrenki , the  pe- 
ricardiac, and  the  pArodco-pericardiac, 


C I”  ) 

2.  The  inferior  thyroid * from  which  arife 
the  ramus  thyroideus , the  tracheal  arteries , the 
afcending  thyroid , and  the  tranfuerfalis  hu- 
meri. 

3.  A.  Vertebra! is y which  proceeds  into  the 
vertebral  foramina,  to  afcend  into  the  cavi- 
ty of  the  cranium,  where  it  unites  upon  the 
cuneiform  procefs  of  the  occipital  bone  with 
its  fellow  of  the  other  fide,  and  forms  the  ba- 
silary artery,  which  immediately  gives 
off  the  pojlerior  artery  of  the  cerebellum  ; it 
then  proceeds  upon  the  tuberculum  annulare, 
to  give  off  four  branches,  two  to  the  right, 
and  two  to  the  left,  which  conftitute  the  A. 
anterior  cerebetli , which  branch  to  the  cura 
cerebelli,  the  cerebellum,  vermis,  cura  cere- 
bri, corpora  quadrigemina,  pineal  gland,  and 
fourth  ventricle  ; and  the  A.  pojlerior  cere- 
bri, which  is  joined  by  the  communicans , and 
fupply  the  thaimi  nervorum  opticorum,  the 
centrum  geminum,  infundibulum,  and  crura 
fornicis,  and  the  pofterior  lobes  of  the  brain, 
inofculating  with  feveral  arteries. 

4.  A.  Cer-vica/is  profunda. 

5.  A.  Cervicalis  fuperficialis , both  of 
which  are  diiiributed  about  the  mufcles  of  the 
neck. 

6.  A.  Jatercojlalis  fuperior , which  lies  be- 
tween the  two  upper  ribs. 

7.  At.  S upra-fcap ularis , which  fometimes 
arifes  from  the  A.  thyrodea,  when  it  is  called 
the  tranfuerfalis  humeri . 

As- 


( 112  ) 

As  foon  as  the  fubclavian  has  arrived  in  the 
axilla,  it  is  called  the  axillary  artery, 
which  runs  into  the  arm,  where  it  is  termed 
the  brachial. 

The  axillary  artery  gives  off, 

1.  The  four  mammary  arteries , called  thorn* 
cica  fupsrior  ; thoracica  longier ; thoracica. 
humeri  ana,  and  thoracica  alaris  or  axillaris , 
which  fupply  blood  to  the  nmfcles  about  the 
bread. 

2.  The.  Jub-Jcapularis , which  fupplies  the 
lower  furface  of  the  fcapula. 

3.  The  circumjlexa  pojperior. 

4.  Circwnfexa  anterior , which  ramify  about 
the  joint. 

The  brachial  or  humeral  artery  gives, 
•off, 

1 . Many  lateral  veffels. 

2.  A.  Profunda  humeri  faperior. 

3.  A.  Profunda  humeri  inferior . 

4.  Ramus  anajlomoticus  magnus , which  an-- 
aftomofes  round  the  elbow  joint. 

The  brachial  then  becomes  the  ujpar,  and 
gives  off. the  radial. 

The  ulnar  or  cubital  artery  fends- 
off, 

1.  The  recurrent  branches , which  an  aft  o- 
mofe  with  the  ramus  anaftomoticus  mag- 
nus.. 

2.  A,  Inter offea  communis.  It  then  fends 
fmall  branches  to  the  adjacent  muffles,  as  it 
prgceeds  down  to  the  wrift  j juft  before  it  ar- 
rives-' 


~ ( ”3  ) 

rives  here,  it  gives  off  A.  dorfalis  ulnar  is  r 
which  goes  round  to  the  back  of  the  little  fin- 
ger. At  the  wrifl  it  gives  off  A.  pahnaris pro- 
funda •,  then  forms  a great  arterial  arch,  call- 
ed the  fup  erf  dal  palmer  arch , which  fupplies 
branches  to  the  fingers. 

The  radial  gives  off  the  radial  recurrent , 
proceeds  to  the  wrifl,  where  the  pu  Ifeis  felt, 
and  gives  off  the  faperfcialis  voice,  and  then 
divides  into  the  A.  dorfalis  poll  ids,  A.  radialis 
indicis,  A.  magna  poUicisy  and  A.  palmar  is  pro- 
funda. 

The  descending,  aorta  gives  off  in  the 
breaft , 

1.  The  bronchial,  which  nourifh  the  lungs. 

2.  The  cefophageal,  which  go  to  the 
sefophagus. 

3.  The  intercofals,  between  the  ribs. 

4.  The  inferior  diaphragmatic. 

Within  the  abdomen,  it  gives  off  eight 
branches. 

1.  The  cceLiAC,  which,  divides  into  three 
branches.. 

L.  A&c  ria  Hepatica , which,,  gives  off, 

a.  A.  Duqdeno-gaftrica , which  fends  off  the 
right  gafro-epipioic  and  the  pancreatico-ducde- 
nali's.  The  latter  tranfmits  the  pilorica  inferi- 
or and  the  tranfverfe  pancreatic. 

/?.  A.  pilorka  fuperior  hepatica. 

The  hepatic  artery,  then  ramifies  through 
the  liver. 

A.  Ccronaria  venlriculi,  or  Gafrica , 
A.  2 which 


( 1 14  ) 

■which  gives  off  the  fupcrlor  coronary  and  fupe- 
rior  piloric  arteries. 

3.  A.  Splenica , from  which  arife  the  pan- 
creatica  magna  and  pancreatic a parva,  the  p ex- 
terior gajiric  arteries , the  left  gaftro-epiploic  ar- 
tery, and  the  rcafa  brevia. 

2.  'The  fiperior  mef enteric,  or  meferaic,  of 
which  the  colica  media , colica  dextra,  and  the 
ileo-colica  are  branches. 

3.  The  renal  arteries , or  emulgents,  which 
are  fhort,  and  divide  into  three  or  four 
branches  in  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney. 

4.  The  fpennatic  arteries , which  are  very 
fmall  and  long,  and  proceed' with  the  fpermat— 
ic  cord  to  the  tefticles. 

5.  The  inferior  meferaic , from  which  arifes 
the  left  colic  artery  and  the  internal  hcemorrhoidah 

6.  The  lumbar  arteries , which  nourifh  the 
mufcles  and  vertebras  of  the  loins. 

7.  The  middle  facral  artery , which  is  dis- 
tributed about  the  facrum. 

The  aorta  then  bifurcates,,  and  becomes  the 
iliac  arteries. 

The  iliacs  foon  divide  into  internal  and  ex- 
ternal. 

Each  INTERNAL  ILIAC  Or  HYPOGASTRIC 
artery  gives  off  five  branches  : 

1.  The  lateral  facral  arteries,  three,  or  four 
in  number. 

2.  The  gluteal , which  ramify  upon  the  back 
of  the  haunch  bone,  and  fuppiy  the  gluteal 
mufcles. 

3.  The  fchiatic , which  turns  downwards 

along;| 
a I 


C 11 5 ) 

along  the  hip,  and  gives  off  the  coccygeal  ar- 
tery. 

4.  Arteria  pudica  communis , which  is  fome- 
times  a branch  of  the  fciatic  artery  ; it  pro- 
ceeds out  of  the  pelvis,  through  the  fciatic: 
notch,  returns  into  the  pelvis,  and  runs  towards ; 
the  fymphyfis  of  the  pubis.  In  this  courfe  it 
gives  off  branches  to  the  veficulee  feminalss  and 
proflrate  gland  ; and  the  lower  or  external 
hemorrhoidal  artery  to  the  anus,  and  then 
forms  th  eA.  perinei,  the  A.  penis, which  proceed 
one  on  each  fide  j and  a branch  which  plung- 
es deep  into  the  fub fiance  of  the  penis. 

5.  The  obturatory , which  paffes  through  the 
oval  foramen,  and  is  diflributed  on  the  thick 
mufcles  in  the  centre  of  the  thigh.. 

Each  external  iliac  gives  off, 

1.  The  epigaftricy  which  is  reflected  from 
Poupart’s  ligament  upwards,  along  the  abdo- 
men.. 

2.  A.  Circumflexailiaca , which  runs  back  - 
wards along  the  crifla  ilii. 

The  external  iliac  then  paffes  under. 
Poupart’s  ligament,  becomes  the  femoral 
or  crural  artery,  and  is  continued  along 
the  thigh  into  the  popliteal.  In  this  courfe  it. 
gives  off  near  the  groin, 

1.  The  profunda  femoris,  which  gives  off  the 
A.  perforans  prima  ; the  A.  perforans  fecunda, 
magna  ; the  A.  perforans  tertia  ; the  A.  perfo- 
rans quarta , which  nourifh  the  mufcles  of  the 
thigh.  Theiemoral  artery  then  makes  a fpi- 
ral  turn  round  the  os  femoris,  and  fends  off 

{mail 


C 116  ) 

fmall  branches  of  no  importance  to  adjacent 
mufcles.  About  two  hands  breadth  from  the 
knee  it  gives  out, 

2.  The  Ramus  anajlomoticus  magnus , which 
ramifies  about  the  knee  joint. 

The  femoral  artery  having  reached  the  ham 
is  called  the  popliteal,  which  gives  off  fev- 
eral  fmall  branches  about  the  joint,  and  di- 
vides below  the  ham  into  the  tibialis  anti'ca  and 
tibialis  pojlica . 

The  Tibialis  antica  foon  perforates  the 
interoffeous  ligament,  and  paffes  along  the  tib- 
ia over  the  bones  of  the  tarfus,  and  then  inof- 
culates  with  the  back  arteries.  In  this  courfe. 
it  gives  off,. 

1.  The  recurrent ,.  which  inofculates  with 
the  articular  branches  of  the  popliteal : it  then 
fends  off  fmall  branches  to  neighbouring  muf- 
cles,  as  it  paffes  down  the  leg. 

2.  A.  Malleolaris  interna. , about  the  inner 
ankle., 

3.  A.  Malleolaris  externa , about  the  outer 
ankle. 

4.  A.  Tarfea , which  lies  upon  the  bones  of 
the  tarfus., 

5.  A.  Metatarfea , to  the  tendons  of  the  pe- 
ronei  mufcles. 

6.  Dcrfalis  externa  halucis , which  runs  a- 
long  the  metatarfal  bone  of  the  great  toe. 

The  Tibialis  postica  paffes-  along  the 
back  part  of  the  tibia,  goes  round  the  inner 
ankle,  and  divides  at  the  heel  into  the  two 
plantar  arteries.  In  this  courfe  it  fends  off. 


( rr r ) 

r.  A.  Nutritia  tibia , which  gives  branches 
to  the  popliteus,  foleus  and  tibialis  anticus 
mufcles,  before  it  enters  the  boi^g. 

2.  Many  /mail  branches , as  it  pafles  down- 
wards. 

3.  A.  .Plant arts  interna , which  runs  along 
the  inner  edge  of  the  foie  of  the  foot,  and 
fends  off four  branches  about  the  foot. 

4.  A . Plantaris  interna , which  forms  an 
arch  and  inofculates  with  the  anterior  tibia! 
artery,  and  gives  off  the  digital  branches  to 
the  toes., 

PULMONARY  ARTERY. 

The  pulmonary  artery  arifes  from  the  right 
ventricle  of  the  heart,  and  conveys  the  blood 
into  the  lungs,  that  is  returned  to  the  heart 
by  the  veins  ; not  for  their  nutrition,  but  to 
receive  from  the  air  in  the  lungs  a certain 
principle,  neceifary  for  the  continuance  of  life, 
andwhichthe  arterial  blood  diftributes  to  every 
part  of  the  body.  It  foon  divides  into  a right 
and  left,  the  right  going  to  the  right  lung  and 
the  left  to  the  left  lung,  where  they  divide  in- 
to innumerable  ramifications,  and  form  a 
beautiful  net-work , or  plexus  of  vejfels , upon 
the  air  veficles,  and  then  terminate  in  the  pul- 
monary veins. 


THE  ACTION  OF  THE  ARTERIES. 

The  arteries,  by  the  impulfe  of  the  blood 
from  the  ventricles  of  the  heart,  are  dilated 

and- 


( 1I§  ) 

$.nd  irritated,  and  by  means  of  their  mufculaf 
coat  contract  upon  the  blood,  and  thus  propel 
it  to  the  gfands,  mufcles,  bones,  membranes, 
and  ev^ry^parc* of  the  body  for  their  nutrition 
and  the  various  fecretions,  and  then  into  the 
veins.  This  dilatation  and  contraction  is 
tailed  the  pulse,  which  is  perceptible  in  the 
trunks  and  branches  of  the  arteries,  but  not 
in  the  capillary  veffels,  except  when  inflamma- 
tion is  going  on. 


OF  VEINS. 

Veins  are  membranous  canals  which  da 
not  pulfate  : they  gradually  become  larger  as 
they  advance  tawards  the  heart,  in  which  they 
terminate,  and  bring  back  the  blood  from  the 
arteries..  Origin.  From  the  extremities 

of  the  arteries  by  anaflotnofis.  Termi- 
nation of  all  the  veins  is  into  the  auri- 
cles of  the  heart.  Division,  into  trunks, 
branches,  ramuli,  &c.  Situation.  They 
run  by  the  tides  of  arteries,  but  more  fuper- 
ficialiy.v  Composed  like  arteries  of  three 

membranes,  but  which  are  femi-tranfparent 
and  more  delicate.  Valves  are  thin  ferni- 
lunar  membranous  folds,  which  prevent  the 
return  of  the  blood  in  the  vein. 

The  blood  is  returned  from  every  part  of 
the  body  into  the  right  auricle : — the  vena 
cava  fuperior  receives  it  from  the  head,  neck, 
thorax,  and  fuperior  extremities  : — the  vena 
cava  inferior  from  the  abdomen  and  inferior 

extremities  ; 


( ”9  ) 

extremities  ; — -and  the  coronary  vein  receives 
it  from  the  coronary  arteries  of  the  heart. 

THE  VENA  CAVA  SUPERIOR. 

This  vein  terminates  in  the  fuperior  part 
of  the  right  auricle,  into  which  it  evacuates 
the  blood,  from 

The  right  and  left  fubclavian  veins  and  the 
•vena  azygos. 

The  right  and  left  fubclavian  veins  receive 
the  blood  from  the  head  and  upper  extremi- 
ties, in  the  following  manner. 

The  veins  of  the  fingers,  called  digitals , re- 
ceive their  blood  from  the  digital  arteries,  and 
empty  it  into, 

1.  The  cephalic  of  the  thumb , which  runs  on 
the  back  of  the  hand  along  the  thumb,  and 
evacuates  itfelf  into  the  external  radial. 

2.  The  falvatella , which  runs  along  the 
little  finger,  unites  with  the  former,  and  emp- 
ties its  blood  into  the  internal  and  external 
cubital  veins.  At  the  bend  of  the  fore-arm 
are  three  veins,  called  the  great  cephalic,  the 
bafilic,  and  the  median. 

. The  great  cephalic  runs  along  the 
fuperior  part  of  the  fore-arm,  and  receives  the 
blood  from  the  external  radial. 

The  basilic  afcends  on  the  under  fide, 
and  receives  the  blood  from  the  external  and 
internal  cubital  veins , and  fome  branches 
which  accompany  the  brachial  artery,  called 
vena  fat  ell  it  um. 


The 


( 120  ) 

The  median  is  fituated  in  the  middle  of 
the  fore-arm,  and  arifes  from  the  union  of 
feveral  branches.  Thefe  three  veins  all  unite 
above  the  bend  of  the  arm,  and  form 

The  brachial  vein,  which  receives  all 
their  blood,  and  is  continued  into  the  axilla, 
where  it  is  called 

The  axillary  vein.  This  riceives  alfo 
the  blood  from  the  fcapula,  and  fuperior  and 
inferior  parts  of  the  cheft,  by  the  fuperior 
and  inferior  thoracic  vein , the  vena  mifcularis , 
and  the  fcapularis. 

The  axillary  vein  then  palfes  under  the  clav~ 
icle,  where  it  is  called  the  subclavian, 
which  unites  with  the  external  and  internal 
jugular  veins,  and  the  vertebral  vein  which 
brings  the  blood  from  the  vertebral  finufes  ; 
it  receives  alfo  the  blood  from  the  mediafiinal , 
pericardiac , diaphragmatic , thymic , internal 
mammary  and  laryngeal  veins,  and  then  unites 
with  its  fellow,  to  form  the  vena  cava  fuperior, 
or,  as  it  is  fometimes  called,  vena  cava  de- 
fenders. 

The  blood  from  the  external  and  internal 
parts  of  the  head  and  face  is  returned  in  the 
following  manner  into  the  external  and  inters 
nal  jugulars,  which  terminate  inthefubclavians. 

The  frontal , angular , temporal , auricular 
fub lingual , and  occipital  veins  receive  the  blood 
from  the  parts  after  which  they  are  named  ; 
thefe  all  converge  to  each  fide  of  the  neck, 
and  form  a trunk,  called  the  external 
JUGULAR  VEIN-. 

The 


C *21  ) 

The  blood  from  the  brain,  cerebellum,  me- 
dulla oblongata,  and  membranes  ofthefe  parts, 
is  received  into  the  lateral  finufes,  or  veins  of 
the  dura  mater,  one  of  which  empties  its 
blood  through  the  foramen  lacerum  in  ball 
■cranii  into  the  internal  jugular,  which 
defcends  in  the  neck  by  the  carotid  arteries, 
receives  the  blood  from  the  thyroideal  and  in- 
ternal  maxillary  veins , and  empties  it  fell'  into 
-Vne  fubclavians  within  the  thorax-. 

The  vena  azygos  receives  the  blood  from 
the  bronchial,  fuperior  txfophageal , vertebral  and 
intercojlal  veins , and  empties  it  into  the  fupe- 
rior c-ava. 

VENA  CAVA  INFERIOR. 

The  vena  cava  inferior  is  the  trunk  of  all 
'the  abdominal  veins  and  thofe  of  the  lower 
extremities,  from  which  parts  the  blood  is 
•returned  in  the  following  manner.  The  veins 
of  the  toes,  called  the  digital  veins,  receive  the 
blood  from  the  digital  arteries,  and  form  on 
the  back  of  the  foot  three  branches,  one  on 
the  great  toe  called  the  cephalic,  another  which 
runs  along  the  little  toe,  called  the  vena  faphe- 
na,  and  one  oil  the  back  of  the  foot,  vena  dor - 
falls  pedis  ; and  on  the  foie  of  the  foot  they 
evacuate  themfelves  into  the  plantar  veins. 

The  three  veins  on  the  upper  part  of  the 
foot  coming  together  above  the  ankle,  form 
the  anterior  tibial' ; and  the  plantar  veins  with 
a branch  from  the  calf  of  the  leg,  called  the 
faral  vein,  form  the  pofeerior  tibia!  ; a branch 
L aifo 


( 122  ) 

alfo  afcends  in  the  direction  of  the  fibula, 
called  the  peroneal  vein.  Thefe  three  branch* 
es  unite  before  the  ham,  into  one  branch,  the 
fab -popliteal  vein , which  afcends  through  the 
ham,  carrying  all  the  blood  from  the  foot  ; 
it  then  proceeds  upon  the  anterior  part  of  the 
thigh,  where  it  is  termed  the  crural  or  femoral 
vein , receives  feveral  mufcular  branches,  and 
paffes  under  Poupart’s  ligament  into  the  cavi- 
ty of  the  pelvis,  where  it  is  called  the  exter? 

NAL  ILIAC. 

The  arteries  which  are  diftributed  about 
the  pelvis  evacuate  their  blood  into  the  external 
hemorrhoidal  veins , the  hypogajlric  veins , the 
internal  pudendal , the  vena  magna  ipftus  penis , 
and  obturatory  veins , all  of  w'hich  unite  in  the 
pelvis,  and  form  the  internal  iliac  vein. 

The  external  iliac  vein  receives  the  blood 
from  the  external  pudendal  veins,  and  then 
unites  with  the  internal  iliac  at  the  laft  vertebra 
of  the  loins,  and  form  the  vena  cava  in- 
ferior, or  ascendens,  which  afcends  on' 
the  right  fide  cf  the  fpine,  receiving  the  blood 
from  the  fa  oral  lumbar , right  fpcrmatic  veins , 
and  the  vena  cava  hepatic  a ; and  having  ar- 
rived at  the  diaphragm,  it  paffes  through  the 
right  foramen,  and  enters  the  right  auricle  of 
the  heart,  into  which  it  evacuates  all  the 
blood  from  the  abdominal  vifeera  and  lower 
extremities, 


vena 


( I25  ) 


VENA  CAVA  HEPATICAi 

This  vein  ramifies  in  the  fubftatic'e  of  the 
liver,  and  brings  the  blood  into  the  vena  cava 
inferior  from  the  branches  of  the  vena 
porta:,  a great  vein  which  carries  the  blood 
from  the  abdominal  vifcera  into  the  fubftance 
of  the  liver.  The  trunk  of  this  vein,  about 
the  fiflure  of  the  liver  in  which  it  is  fituated, 
is  divided  into  the  hepatic  and  abdominal  por- 
tions. The  abdominal  -portion  is  compofed  of 
fplenic,  ?neferaic  and  internal  hemorrhoidal  veins. 
Thefe  three  venous  branches  carry  all  the 
blood  from  the  ftomach,  fpleen,  pancreas, 
omentum,  mefentery,  gall-bladder,  and  the 
fmall  and  large  inteftines,  into  the  firms  of  the 
vena  portae.  The  hepatic  portion  of  the  vena 
portae  enters  the  fubftance  of  the  liver,  divides 
into  innumerable  ramifications,  which  fecrete 
the  bile,  and  the  fuperfluous  blood  pafles  into 
correfponding  branches  of  the  vena  cava  hepa - 
tic  a. 


THE  ACTION  OF  THE  VEINS. 

Veins  do  not  pulfate  ; the  blood  which  they 
receive  from  the  arteries  flows  through  them 
very  dowry,  and  is  conveyed  to  the  right  au- 
ricle of  the  heart,  by  the  contraflility  of  their 
coats,  the  prefiure  of  the  blood  from  the  arte- 
ries, called  the  vis  a tergo , the  contraction  of 


( 124  ) 

die  mufcles,  and  refpiration  ; and  k is  pre- 
vented from  going  backwards  in  the  vein  by 
the  valves,  of  which  there  are  a great  number.. 


OF  THE  ABSORBENTS. 

Absorbents  are  very  thin  and  pellucid  vef- 
fels,  which  carry  the  lymph  from  every  part  of 
the  body  ; fubftances  applied  to  the  furface  of 
the  body,  and  the  chyle  from  the  inteftines  ; 
into  the  thoracic  dud.  Division,  into  lac- 
teals  and  lymphatics . They  are  called  lacleals 
in  the  inteftines  and  mefentery,  and  lymphatics. 
in  every  other  park  Figure,  branching,  be- 
coming broader  as  they  proceed  towards  their 
termination.  Valves,  numerous,  giving  them 
a knotted  appearance.  Situation.  It  is 
fuppofed  that  they  exift  in  every  part  of  the 
body,  although  they  have  not  been  as  yet  de- 
tected in  fome,  as  the  brain,  &c.  Origin. 
The  cellular  membrane,  the  vifcera,  the  excre- 
tory duds  of  the  vifcera,  the  external  furface, 
and  every  part  of  the  body.  Termination, 
in  the  thoracic  dud,  or  fubclavian  veins.  Lym- 
phatic or  conglobate  glands  are  fitua- 
ted  every  where  in  the  courfe  of  the  lymphat- 
ics. Substance.  They  confift  of  tender, 
pellucid,  ftrong  tunics.  The  use  of  the  nbfor- 
bents  is  to  carry  back  the  lymph  from  differ- 
ent parts ; to  convey  the  chyle  from  the  intef- 
tines to  the  thoracic  dud,  where  they  become 
mixed  and  diluted ) and  to  abforb  fubftances 


( 125  ) 

from  furfaces  and  parts  on  which  they  origin- 
ate. 

absorbents  of  the  head  and  neck. 

Abforbents  are  found  on  the  fcalp  and  a- 
bout  the  vifcera  of  the  neck,  which  unite  into  a 
confiderable  branch  that  accompanies  the  ju- 
gular vein.  Abforbents  have  not  been  detect- 
ed in  the  human  brain  ; yet  there  can  be  no 
doubt  of  there  being  fuch  vefiels  : it  is  probable 
that  they  pafs  out  of  the  cranium  through  the 
canalis  caroticus  and  foramen  lacerum  in  baft 
eranii,  on  each  fide,  and  join  the  above  jugular 
branch , which  pafles  through  fome  glands  as. 
It  proceeds  into  the  cheft  to  the  angle  of  the 
fubclavian  and  jugular  vein. 

absorbents  of  the  upper  extremities. 

The  abforbents  of  the  upper  extremities  are 
divided  into  fuperficial  and  deep-feated.  The. 
faperficial  abforbents  afcend  under  the  fkin  in 
every  direction  to  the  wrift,  from  whence  a 
branch  proceeds  upon  the  pofterior  furface  of 
the  fore-arm  to  the  head  of  the  radius,  over 
the  internal  condyle  of  the  humerus,  up  to  the 
axilla,  receiving  feveral  branches  as  it  proceeds. 
Another  branch  proceeds  from  the  wrift  along 
the  interior  part  of  the  fore-arm,  and  forms  a 
net-work  with  a branch  coming  over  the  ulna 
from  the  pofterior  part,  and  amends  on  the  in- 
fide  of  the  humerus  to  the  glands  of  the  axilla. 

The  deep-feated  abforbents  accompany  the 
huger  bieod-veffdls,  and  pafs  through  two 

i JLi  z eiands. 


( 126  ) 

glands  about  the  middle  of  the  humerus,  and 
afcend  to  the  glands  of  the  axilla.  The  fu- 
perficial  and  deep-feated  abforbents  having 
palled  through  the  axillary  glands,  form  two 
trunks , which  unite  into  one , to  be  inferted  with 
the  jugular  abforbents  into  the  thoracic  dud, 
at  the  angle  formed  by  the  union  of  the  fub- 
clavian  with  the  jugular  vein. 

ABSORBENTS  QF  THE  INFERIOR  EXTREM- 
ITIES. 

Thefe  are  alfo  fuperficial  and  deep-feated. 
The  fuperficial  ones  lie  between  the  fkin  and 
mufcle.;-.  Thofe  of  the  toes  and  foot  form  a 
branch  which  afcends  upon  the  back,  of  the 
foot  over  the  tendon  of  the  crurseus  anticus, 
forms  with  other  branches  a plexus  above 
the  ankles,  then  proceeds  along  the  tibia  over 
the  knee,  fometimes  paffes  through  a gland, 
and  proceeds  up  the  infide  of  the  thigh  to  the 
fubinguinal  glands. 

The  deep-feated  abforbents  follow  the  courfe 
of  the  arteries,  and  accompany  the  femoral  ar- 
tery. in  which  courfe  they  pafs  through  forne 
glands  in  the  leg  and  above  the  knee,  and  then 
proceed  to  fome  deep-feated  fubinguinal  glands. 

The  abforbents  from  about  the  external 
parts  of  the  pubis,  as  the  penis,  perineum,  and 
from  the  external  parts  of  the  pelvis,  in  gener- 
al proceed  to  the  inguinal  glands.  The  fub- 
inguinal and  inguinal  glands  fend  forth  feyeral 
branches,  which  pafs  through  the  abdominal 
ring  into  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen.  \ 

ABSORBENj  S 


( i*r  J 


ABSORBENTS  OF  THE  ABDOMINAL  AND  THO«i 
RACIC  VISCERA. 

The  abforbents  of  the  lower  extremities  ac- 
company the  external  iliac  artery,  where  they 
are  joined  by  many  branches  from  the  uterus , 
urinary  bladder , fpermatie  chord , and  fome 
branches  accompanying  the  internal  iliac  ar- 
tery : they  then  afcend  to  the  facrum,  where 
they  form  a plexus?  which  proceeds  over  the 
pfoas  mufcles,  and  meeting  with  the  la&eals 
of  the  mefentery  form  the  thoracic  du£t,  or 
trunk  of  the  abforbents,  which  is  of  a ferpen- 
tine  form,,  about  the  ftze  of  a crow-quill,  and 
runs  up  the  dorfal  vertebrae,  through  the  pof- 
terior  opening  of  the  diaphragm,  between  the 
aorta  and  vena  azygos,  to  the  angle  formed 
by  the  union  of  the  fubclavian  and  jugular 
veins.  In  this  eourfe  it  receives 

The  abforbents.  of  the  kidneys , which  are  fu- 
perhcial  and  deep-feated,  and  unite  as  they 
proceed  towards  the  thoracic  du£t. 

The  abforbents  of  the  fpleen , which  are  upon 
its  peritoneal  coat,  and  unite  with-  thofe  of  the 
pancreas. 

A branch  from  a plexus  of  veffels  paffing 
above  and  below  the  duodenum,  and  formed 
by  the  abforbents  of  the  Jlomach , which  come 
from  the  leffer  and  greater  curvature,  and  are 
united  about  the  pylorus  with  thofe  of  the  pan- 
creas and  liver , which  converge  from  the  ex- 
ternal furface  and  internal  parts  towards  ■ the 

portae 


C ) 

portae  of  the  liver,  and  alfo  by  feveral  brar\ch« 
es  from  the  gall-bladder. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  ABSORPTION, 

Abforption  is  the  taking  up  of  fubftances 
which  are  applied  to  the  mouths  of  abforbing 
vefiels  ; thus  the  chyle  is  abforbed  from  the 
inteftinal  tube  by  the  lafteals,  the  vapour  of 
circumfcribed  cavities,  and  of  the  cells  of  the 
cellular  membrane  by  the  lymphatics  of  thofe 
parts  ; and  thus  mercury  and  other  fuftances 
are  taken  into  the  fyftem,  when  rubbed  on 
the  ffciii. 

The  principle  by  which  this  abforption 
takes  place  is  a power  inherent  in  the  mouths 
of  abforbing  velfels,  a vis  infita,  dependent  on 
the  high  degree  of  irritability  of  their  internal 
membrane  by  which  the  veflfels  contract  and 
propel  the  fluid  forwards.  Hence  the  ufe  of  this 
fun  ft  ion  appears  to  be  of  the  utmofl  impor- 
tance, viz.  to  fupply  the  blood  with  chyle  ; 
to  remove  the  fuperfluous  vapours  of  circum- 
fcribed cavities,  otherwife  dropfies,  as  hydro- 
cephalus, hydrothorax,  hydrocordis,  afcites, 
hydrocele,  &c.  would  conftantly  be  taking 
place  ; to  remove  the  fuperfluous  vapour 
from  the  cells  of  the  cellular  membrane  dif- 
perfed  throughout  every  part  of  the  body, 
that  anafarca  may  not  take  place  ; to  remove 
the  hard,  and  foft  parts  of  the  body  ; and  to 

convey ! 


C *29  ) 

convey  into  the  fyflem  medicines  which  are  ap» 
plied  to  the  furface  of  the  body. 

SANGUIFICATION. 

Sanguification  appears  to  be  nothing  more 
than  the  mixing,  by  the  aftion  of  the  blood- 
veflels,  of  the  chyle  with  the  blood  ; for  as  it 
paffes  from  the  fubclavian  vein,  it  changes  its 
colour,  and  when  it  has  reached  the  heart, 
cannot  be  diftinguifhed  from  the  mafs  of  cir- 
culating blood. 


NEUROLOGY* 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  NERVES. 

Nerves  are  long  whitifh  cords,  compofed 
of  bundles  or  fafciculi  of  fibres,  which  ferve 
for  fenfation.  Origin.  The  cerebrum,  cer- 
ebellum, medulla  oblongata,  and  medulla  fpi- 
nalis.  Termination.  The  organs  of  fenfe  ; 
vifcera;  veflels  ; mufcles  ; bones,  &c.  Fig- 
ure, branched.  Divided  into  trunks, - 
branches,  ramuli,  capillary  fibres,  papillae, 
nervous  plexufes,  and  ganglions,  or  knots. 
Substance,  pulpy.  Division,  into  cerebral 
and  fpinal.  Number , thirty -nine  pair;  nine 
pair  of  cerebral  nerves,  and  thirty  pair  of  fpin- 
al. The  nine  pair  of  cerebral  nerves  are, 

i.  The 


( I3°  ) 

7,  The  olfa&ory.  s.  The  optic.  3.  Oculo- 
rum  motorii.  4.  The  pathetic,  or  trochlea- 
tores.  5.  The  trigemini,  or  divifi.  6.  The 
abducent.  7.  The  auditory  and  facial.  8. 
The  par  vagum,  or  great  fympathetic  nerves. 
9.  The  lingual  pair.  The  thirty  pair  of  fpiiial 
nerves  are  divided  into  eight  pair  of  cervical, 
twelve  pair  of  dorfal,  five  pair  of  lumbar,  and 
five  pair  of  facral  nerves.  Use,  for  fenfation 
in  fenfible  parts,  for  the  five  external  fenfes, 
as  touch,  fight,  hearing,  fmelling,  and  tafte  j 
and  for  the  motion  of  mn'fcles. 


OF  THE  NERVES  OF  THE  BRAIN. 

The  first  pair,  or  Olfaftory  nerves , arife 
from  the  corpora  ftraita,  pafs  forwards  over 
the  fphaenoid  and  frontal  bones,  one  to  each 
fide  of  the  crifta  galli,  where  they  fend  off  a 
number  of  branches,  which  go  through  the 
cribriform  foramina  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  to 
be  diftributed  on  the  pituitary  membrane  of 
the  nofe.  Use,  for  fmelling. 

The  second  pair,  or  Optic  nerves , arife 
from  the  t^tlmi  nervorum  opticorum,  decuf- 
fate  each  other,  then  pafs  through  the  forami- 
na optica,  and  perforate  the  bulb  of  the  eye, 
and  in  it  form  the  retina , which  is  the  organ 
of  vifion. 

The  third  pair,  or  Oculorum  motorii , a- 

rife 


( I3I  ) 

rife  from  the  crura  cerebri,  near  the  polls  Va> 
rolii,  pafs  forward  towards  the  top  of  the  pe- 
trous portion  of  the  temporal  bone,  where 
they  perforate  the  dura  mater,  and  proceed  to 
the  orbital  nffure,  to  be  inferted  into  the 
mufcles  of  the  bulb  of  the  eye,  which  they 
move. 

The  fourth  pair,  or  The  Pathetic  nerves, 
arife  from  the  crura  of  the  cerebellum  lateral- 
ly? pafs  forward,  and  pierce  tne  dura  mater 
below  the  third  pair,  and  proceed  with  them 
through  the  orbital  fiffure,  to  be  inferted  into 
the  trochlearis  mufcle  of  the  eye. 

I fie  fifth  pair,  or  Trigemini , arife  from 
the  anterior  part  of  the  crura  of  the  cerebel- 
lum, and  are  divided  within  the  cavity  of  the 
cranium  into  three  branches,  viz.  the  opthal- 
mic  or  orbital,  and  the  fuperior  and  inferior 
[maxillary. 

The  orbital  nerve  gives  off  a branch , near 
[its  origin,  which  unites  with  a branch  of  the 
Qxth  pair,  to  form  the  great  intercoftal  nerve  • 
lit  then  divides  into  three  branches,  the  frontal, 
which  goes  through  the  fuperciliary  foramen 
:o  the  mufcles  and  integuments  of  the  fore- 
head ; the  lachrymal , which  goes  to  the  lach- 
rymal gland  ; and  the  nafal , which  goes  for- 
ward to  the  inner  canthus  of  the  eye,  where 
t gives  off  a branch  or  two,  then  returns  into 
he  cranium,  and  paffes  through  the  cribri- 
°rm  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  and  is  diftrib- 
ited  on  the  pituitary  membrane. 

The 


( *32  ) 

'The  fuperior  maxillary  nerve  goes  through 
the  foramen  rotundum,  is  divided  into  ift, 
the  fphano-palatine , which  goes  through  the 
fphaeno-palatine  foramen,  fends  twigs  to  the 
internal  pterygoid  mufcle,  then  enters  the  cav- 
ity of  the  noftrils,  and  is  loft  on  the  Euftachi- 
an  tube,  foft  palate,  and  pituitary  ftnus  of, 
the  fphaenoid  bone  ; 2d.  the  posterior  alveolar 
branch,  which  defcends  through  the  foramen 
by  the  laft  grinder,  and  is  distributed  to  the 
molares ; 3d.  the  infra-orbital  nerve,  which 
goes  through  the  infra  orbital  foramen, 
and  is  distributed  on  the  mufcles  of  the  cheek, 
nofe,  lips,  and  communicates  with  the  facial 
nerve. 

The  inferior  maxillary  goes  out  of  the  cra- 
nium, through  the  foramen  ovale,  giving 
branches  to  the  mufcles  and  glands  in  its 
courfe,  and  to  the  facial  nerve,  and  divides  as 
it  paffes  over  the  pterygoid  mufcle,  into,  ift. 
the  internal . lingual , which  is  connected  with 
the  chorda  tympani,  and  fupplies  the  fubiin* 
gual  glands  and  contiguous  mufcles,  but 
more  efpecially  the  tongue : 2d.  the  more 
proper  inferior  maxillary , which  goes  into  the 
canalis  mentalis  of  the  lower  jaw,  and  gives  a 
branch  to  each  tooth,  and  comes  out  again  to 
fupply  the  lower  lip  and  chin. 

The  sixth  pair,  or  Abducent  nerves , a- 
rife  from  the  pofterior  part  of  the  pons  Varo- 
lij,  proceed  forwards,  perforates  the  dura 
mater,  and  fend  off  fome  branches  near  the 

fella  | 


C 133  ) 

fella  turcica,  which  unite  with  branches  of  the 
ophthalmic  nerve  of  the  fifth  pair,  to  form  the 
great  intercoflal  nerve  ; . they  then  accompany 
the  third  and  fourth  pair  through  the  orbital 
fiffure,  and  are  diflributed  on  the  redti  extend 
Inufcles  of  the  bulb  of  the  eye. 

The  sfventh  pair,  or  Auditory  nerties,  as 
they  are  commonly  called,  originate  on  each 
fide  by  two  branches,  th  e portio  dura  and  port  in 
mollis . The  portio  dura  is,  in  fact,  a nerve  of 
the  face,  and  is  therefore,  with  more  propriety, 
called  the  Facial  nerve : it  arifes  from  the 
fourth  ventricle  of  the  brain,  paffes  through 
the  'petrous  portion  of  the  temporal  bone, 
where  it  gives  off  the  chorda  tympani , proceeds 
through  the  ftylo-mafloid  foramen,  perforates 
the  parotid  gland,  and  then  divides  into  feven 
or  eight  branches,  which  eonflitute  the  pes  an- 
ferinus , and  fupply  the  ear,  parotid  gland,  and 
mufcles  of  the  face,  and  communicate  with  the 
branches  of  the  fifth  pair  on  the  face. 

The  portio  mollis  arifes  from  the  medulla  -ob- 
longata and  the  fourth  ventricle,  enters  the  in- 
ternal auditory  paffage,  and  is  diflributed  by 
innumerable  branches  on  the  membrane  of  the 
cochlea,  veflibuliim,  forming  the  immediate 
argan  of  hearing. 

The  eighth  fair,  or  Par  vagum , arifeby 
everal  branches,  partly  from  the  medulla  cb- 
ongata  and  partly  from  the  fourth  ventricle 
yehind  the  pons  Varolii.  It  is  connected  at  its 
e irigin  with  the  acceffory  nerves  of  Willis , which 
1 M • amend 


( J34  ) 

afcend  through  the  great  occipital  foramen 
from  the  fifth  cervical  nerve  : thefe  nerves  pro- 
ceed together  through  the  foramen  lacerum  in 
bafi  cranii.  The  acceffory  nerves  then  fepa- 
rate  from  the  par  vagurn,  and  vanilh  in  the  fter- 
no-clido  maftoideus  and  cucullaris  mufcles  : 
the  par  vagurn  then  gives  off  branches  in  the 
neck  to  the  tongue,  larynx,  and  thyroid  gland, 
from  which  parts  they  acquire  names,  and  then 
defcends  into  the  cavity  of  the  thorax,  where 
it  gives  off, 

i ft.  The  right  and  left  recurrent ; the  for- 
mer arifes  on  the  right  fide,  near  the  fubcla- 
vian  artery,  which  it  furrounds,  and  then  re- 
turns upwards  to  the  thyroid  gland : the  latter 
arifes  under  the  arch  of  the  aorta,  which  it  fur- 
rounds,  and  then  afcends  to  the  oefcphagus. 
Both  nerves  are  loft  in  the  mufcles  of  the  la- 
rynx and  pharnyx. 

2dly.  Several  branches  which  proceed  to  the 
' fuperior  part  of  the  pericardium,  to  form  with 
other  nerves  the  cardiac  plexus , which  fends 
branches  to  the  heart. 

3dly.  The  par  vagurn  then  extends  on  the 
pofterior  furface  of  the  lungs,  on  each  fide, 
and  gives  off  fome  branches , which,  with  oth- 
ers from  the  cardiac  plexus  and  recurrent 
nerves,  form  a right  and  left  pulmonic  plexus , 
which  fupplies  the  lungs  and  trachea. 

4thly.  Both  trunks  of  the  par  vagum  then 
defcend  with  the  oefophagus,  and  give  off 
i ramifications,  which  form  the  cefophageal 

plexus} 


( i35  ) 

plexus,  from  which  the  oefophag'us  and  adjoin- 
ing parts  are  fupplied* 

5thly.  Having  palled  the  diaphragm  with 
the  cefophagus,  they  form,  about  the  cardia, 
two  Jiomachic  plexifes  : the  anterior  is  expand- 
ed over  the  anterior  furface  of  the  ftomach 
and  its  greater  curvature  ; the  pofterior  over 
the  pofterior  furface  and  lefter  curvature,  and 
it  tranfmits  alfo  branches  to  the  liver,  pancre- 
as, and  diaphragm. 

6thlv.  The  par  vagum  alfo  fends  fome 
branches  to  unite  with  the  great  intercoftal, 
and  thus  concurs  in  forming  the  hepatic,  fplen- 
ic,  and  renal  plexufes. 

The  ninth,  or  Lingual  pair  of  nerves, 
arife  from  the  medulla  oblongata,  between  the 
corpora  olivaria  and  pyramidalxa,  pafs  out  of 
the  fkull  through  the  foramina  condyloidea 
anteriora,  and  communicate  with  the  par  vag- 
um and  firft  pair  of  cervical  nerves  : they 
then  proceed  forwards  between  the  jugular 
vein  and  carotid  arterv,  to  be  diftributed  on 
the  mufcles  of  the  tongue  and  os  hycides. 

Thus  it  appears  that  the  olfactory,  ophthal- 
mic, and  oculorum  motorii  arife  from  the  ce- 
rebrum ; the  trochleatores  and  trigemini  from 
the  cerebellum  ; and  the  auditory,  par  vag- 
um, and  linguales,  from  the  medulla  oblonga- 
ta. > 


OF 


( *36  ) 


OF  THE  NERVES  OF  THE  MEDU'L- 
LA  SPINALIS. 

Thofe  nerves  are  called  spinal  which  pafs 
out  through  the  lateral  or  intervertebral  for- 
amina of  the  fpine. 

ihey  are  divided  into  cervical , dorfal , Ium - 
bar , and  facrai  nerves. 

CERVICAL  NERVES. 

The  cervical  nerves  are  eight  pairs.  The 
firjt  are  called  the  occipital  ; they  arife  from 
the  beginning  of  the  fpinal  marrow,  pafs  out 
between  the  margin  of  the  occipital  foramen 
and  atlas,  form  a ganglion  on  its  tranfverfe 
procefs,  and  are  distributed  about  the  occiput 
and  neck. 

The  fecond  pair  of  cervical  nerves  fend  a 
branch  to  the  acceffory  nerve  of  Willis,  and 
proceed  to  the  parotid  gland  and  external  ear. 

The  third  cervical  pair  fupply  the  integu- 
ments of  the.fcapula,  cucullaris,  and  triangu- 
laris mufcles,  and  fend  a branch  to  the  dia- 
phragmatic nerve. 

The  fourth , fifth,  fixth ,feventh,  and  eighth 
pair  all  converge  to  form  the  brachial  plexus, 
from  which  arife  the  fix  following 

Mk. 

NERVES  OF  THE  UPPER  EXTREMITIES. 

1.  The  axillary  nerve,  which  fometirfies 
arife s from  the  radial  nerve.  It  runs  back- 
wards and  outwards  around  the  neck  of  the 

humerus. 


( 137  ) 

humerus,  and  ramifies  in  the  mufcles  of  the 
fcapula. 

2.  The  external  cutaneal,  which 
perforates  the  coraco-brachialis  mufcle  to  the 
bend  of  the  arm,  where  it  accompanies  the 

•v  median  vein  as  far  as  the  thumb,  and  it  is  loft 
in  its.  integuments. 

3.  The  internal  cutaneal,  which  de- 
fcends  on  the  infide  of  the  arm,  where  it  bi- 
furcates. From  the  bend  of  the  arm,  the  an- 
terior branch  accompanies  the  bafilic  vein,  to 
be  inferted  into  the  fkin  of  the  palm  of  the 
hand  ; the  pofterior  branch  runs  down  the 
internal  part  of  the  fore-arm,  to  vanifh  in  the 
fkin  of  the  little  finger.. 

4.  The  median  nerve,  which  accompanies 
the  brachial  artery  to  the  cubit,  then  paffes  be- 
tween the  brachiaiis  internus,  pronator  rotun- 
dus,  and  the  perforatus  and  perforans,  under 
the  ligament  of  the  wrift  to  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  where  it  fends  off  branches  in  every  di- 
rection, to  the  mufcles  of  the  hand,  and  then 
fupplies  the  digital  nerves,  which  go  to  the  ex- 
tremities of  the  thumb,  fore  and  middle  fin- 
gers. 

The  ulnar  nerve,  which  defcends  between 
the  brachial  artery  and  bafilic  vein,  between 
the  internal  condyle  of  the  humerus,  and  the 
olecranon,  and  divides  in  the  fore-arm  into  an 
internal  and  an  external  branch.  The  former 
paffes  over  the  ligament  of  the  wrift  and  fefa- 
moid  bone  to  the  hand,  where  it  divides  into 
M 2 three 


C 13*  ) 

three  branches,  two  of  which  go  to  the  ring* 
and  little  finger,  and  the  third  forms  an  arch 
towards  the  thumb  in  the  palm  of  the  hand, 
and  is  loft  in  the  contiguous  mufcies.  The 
latter  paffes  over  the  tendon  of  the  extenfor 
carpi  uiharis  and  back  of  the  hand,  to  fupply 
alio  the  two  laft  fingers. 

6.  The  radial  nerve,  which  fometimes 
gives  off  the  axillary  nerve.  It  paffes  back- 
wards, about  the  os  humeri,  defcends  on  the 
outiide  of  the  arm  between  the  brachialis  ex- 
tern  us  and  internus  mufcies  to  the  cubit  ; 
then  proceeds  between  the  fupinator  longus 
and  brevis  to  the  fuperior  extremity  of  the  ra- 
dius, giving  off  various  branches  to  adjacent 
mufcies, . At  this  place  it  divides  into  two 
branches  : one  goes  along  the  radius,  between 
the  fupinator  longus  and  radialis  internus  to 
the  back  of  the  hand,  and  terminates  in  tire  in- 
teroffeous  mufcies,  the  thumb  and  three  firft 
fingers  the  ether  paffes  between  the  fupina- 
tor brevis  'and  head  of  the  radius,  and  is  loft  ill. 
the  mufcies  of  the  fore-arm. 

DORSAL  NERVES.. 

The  dorsal  nerves  are  twelve  pairs  in- 
number.  The  firft  pair  gives  off  a branch  to 
the  brachial  plexus.  All  the  dorfal  nerves  are 
diftributed  to  the  mufcies  of  the  back,  inter- 
coftals,  ferrati,  pefforal,  abdominal  mufcies 
and  diaphragm.  The  five  inferior  pairs  go  to 
the  cartilages  of  the  ribs,  and  are  called  coftah 


DUMB.  AS. 


t *39  ) 


1 LUMBAR  NERVES, 

The  five  pair  of  lumbar  nerves  are  be* 
flowed  about  the  loins  and  mufcles,  and  Ikin 
of  the  abdomen  and  loins,  fcrotum,  ovaria,. 
and  diaphragm.  The  fecond,  third,  and  fifth 
pair  unite  and  form  the  obturator  nerve,  which 
defcends  over  the  pfoas  mufcle  into  the  pel- 
vic and  paffes  through  the  foramen  thyroide- 
uni  to  the  obturator  mufcle,  triceps,  pedtine— 
us,  Sic. 

The  third  and  fourth,  with  fome  branches 
of  the  fecond  pair,  form  the  crural  nerve , 
which  pafies  under  Poupart’s  ligament  with 
the  femoral  artery,  fends  off  branches  to  the 
adjacent  parts,  and  defcends  in  the  difeftion 
of  the  fartorius  mufcle  to  the  internal  condyle 
of  the  femur,  from  whence  it  accompanies  the 
faphena  vein  to  the  internal  ankle,  to  be  loft 
: in  the  fkin  of  the  great  toe. 

The  fifth  pair  are  joined  to  the  fir  ft  pair  o£ 

| the  facral  nerves, 

I - 

SACRAL  NERVES/ 

There  are  five  pair  of  sace.al  nerves,  all 
j of  which  arife  from  the  cauda  equina,  or  ter- 
J minaticn  of  the  medulla  fpinalis ; fo  called 
i from  the  nerves  refembling  the  tail  of  a liorfe, 

! The  four  firft  pair  give  off  branches  to  the  pel- 
vic vifeera,  and  are  afterwards  united  to  the 
laft  lumbar,  to  form  a large  plexus,  which  gives 
off  the  ifchiatic  nerve , the  largeft  in  the  body. 
The  ifchiatic  nerve  immediately  at  its  origin 
~ fends 

I 


('  140  J 

fends  off  branches  to  the  bladder,  re&um,  and 
parts  of  generation  ; proceeds  from  the  cavity 
of  the  pelvis  through  the  ifchiatic  notch,  be- 
tween the  tuberofity  of  the  ifchium  and  great 
trochanter,  to  the  ham,  where  it  is  called  the 
popliteal  nerve.  In  the  ham  it  divides  into  two 
branches,  i.  The  peroneal , which  defcends 
on  the  fibula,  and  diffributes  many  branches 
to  the  mufcles  of  the  leg  and  back  of  the  foot, 
2.  The  tibial,  which  penetrates  the  gaftrocne- 
mii  mufcles  to  the  internal  ankle,  paffes 
through  a notch  in  the  os  calcis  to  the  foie  of 
the  foot,  where  it  divides  into  an  internal  and 
external  plantar  nerve,  which  fupply  the  muf- 
cles and  aponeurofis  of  the  foot  and  the  toes. 

©F  THE  GREAT  INTERCOSTAL  OR  SYMPA- 
THETIC NERVES,. 

The  great  intercoftal  nerve  arifes  in  the  cav- 
ity of  the  cranium  from  the  union  of  a branch 
of  the  fixth  with  a recurrent  branch  of  the  fifth 
pair,  called  the  Viduan  nerve.  It  paffes  out  of 
the  cranium  through  the  carotid  canal,  and  de-, 
fcends  on  the  fides  of  the  cervical,  dorfal,  and' 
lumbar  vertebrae  and  facrum,  in  which  courfe 
it  is  joined  by  filaments  from  all  the  fpinal 
nerves,  forming  fmall  ganglions  at  their  junc-| 
tions. 

In  the  neck  it  forms  only  three  cervical 
ganglions , from  which  arife  the  cardiac  nerves 
and  pulmonic  plexufes , which  fend  nerves- to  the! 
heart  and  lungs.  In  the  thorax  there  arift 
five  branches  from  the  third,  fifth,  feventh, 

eighth. 


( J4I  3 

eighth,  and  ninth  ganglions,  which  defcend  Ist 
the  courfe  of  the  vertebrae,  and  pafs  through  the 
diaphragm,  where  they  unite  on  each  -fide  into 
one  trunk,  the  fplanchnk  or  anterior  intercojiat 
nerve , which  foon  unite  together,  and  form  the 
GREAT  SEMILUNAR  GANGLION,  from  which 

nerves  are  given  off  to  all  the  abdominal  vif- 
cera,  forming  ten  plexufes,  which  communi- . 
cate  with  one  another,  and  are  named  after 
the  adjacent  vifcera,  viz.  the  coeliac  plexus,  fit- 
uated  near  the  cceliac  artery,  and  fupplying  the 
ftomach  ; the  fplenic,  near  the  fpleen  ; the  he - 
fatic , near  the  portae  of  the  liver  ; the  fuperior , 
middle,  and  inferior  mefenteric  plexus  j two- 
renal  and  two  fpermatic  plexufes. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE 
NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

Nerves  are  the  organs  of  our  fenfes.  Bodies 
applied  to  certain  parts  of  our  fyftem  produce 
changes  in  thofe  parts,  which  changes  are  con- 
yeyed in  an  unknown  manner  to  the  brain  by 
means  of  the  nerves  only,  and  sensation  is 
produced  ; fo  that  fenfation  is  a property  pecu- 
liar to  the  nervous  fibre,  as  irritability  is  to  the 
nufcular  fibre  : and  hence  all  fentient  parts 
i ire  fupplied  with  nerves,  although  they  cannot 
t >e  detefted  by  the  eye. 

\ The  fenfes  are  diftinguifhed  into  internal 
i md  external, 

The 


( 142  > 


The  internal  senses  are  ideas  which 
the  fenforium  commune,  or  mind,  forms  to  it- 
felf,  and  may  be  produced  from  the  external 
fenfes,  or  they  may  be  excited  fpontaneoufly  ; 
fuch  are,  memory , imagination , confciencc , the 
pajfions  of  the  mind , and  reafoning , by  the  fu* 
perior  excellence  of  which,  man  differs  fo  em- 
inently from  the  brute.  . 

The  external  senses  are,  fmelling,  fee- 
ing, hearing,  tailing,  and  touching. 


OF  SMELLING. 


Smelling  is  a fenfation 


by 


which  we  per- 
ceive the  fmell  of  fubftances.  The  organ  of 
fmell  is  the  nervous  papillae  of  the  olfactory  or 
firifc  pair  of  nerves,  which  are  diftributed  on 
every  part  of  the  pituitary  membrane  of  the! 
nofe. 


OF  SEEING.' 

Seeing  is  a fenfation  by  which  we  perceive1 
bodies  around  us,  and  their  vifible  qualities. 
The  organ  of  fight  is  the  retina,  an  expanfion', 
of  the  optic  or  fecond  pair  of  nerves.  The  obA 
jed  of  fight  is  the  rays  of  light  which  pene-j 
trate  the  bulb  of  the  eye  and  ftimulate  the  ret- 
ina. Light  is  a fubtile  and  folid  material, 
which  emanates  from  the  fun  or  any  lucid  body 
with  a very  rapid  motion,  in  right  lines,  which 
are  called  rays  of  light , and  penetrate  to  the 
retina  in  the  following  manner  : the  rays  of 
light  fall  on  the  pellucid  and  convex  cornea  o: 
the  eye,  by  whole  denfity  and  convexity  they 

an 


C '143  ) 

are  united  into  a focus,  which  pafles  the  aque- 
I ous  humour  and  pupil  of  the  eye,  to  be  more 
icondenfed  by  the  cryftaline  lens.  The  rays 
of  light  thus  concentrated,  penetrate  the  vitre- 
ous humour,  to  ftimulate  the  retina,  upon 
which  they  imprefs  the  image  of  external  ob- 
jects to  be  reprefented  to  the  mind  through 
the  medium  of  the  optic  nerves. 

OF  HEARING. 

Hearing  is  a fenfation  by  which  we  per* 
ceive  the  found  of  any  fonorous  body. 

Sound  is  a tremulous  motion  of  the  air  ex- 
cited by  linking  any  fonorous  body.  Sound 
is  conveyed  to  an  enormous  diftance  in  the  at- 
mofphere,  in  flraight  lines,  which  are  called 
fonorous  rays.  Soft  bodies  diminiih  or  (tide 
bund  ; elaftic  ones  increafe  it.  The  organ  of 
rearing  is  the  portio  mollis  of  the  feventh 
iair  of  nerves,  whofe  pulp  is  beautifully  dif- 
:r-ibuted  in  the  veftibulum,  femicircular  Ca- 
lais, and  cochlea  of  the  ear.  Hearing  is  per- 
formed in  the  following  manner  : the  rays  of 
bund  emanating  from  a fonorous  body  al- 
ive at  the  ear,  which  by  its  elafticity  and  pe- 
:uliar  formation,  concentrates  them,  that  they 
nay  pafs  along  the  external  auditory  foramen, 
o the  membrana  tympani,  which  they  caufe 
o vibrate.  The  trembling  tympanum  com- 
nunicates  its  vibrations  to  the  malleus,  which 
s in  contact  with  it ; the  malleus  conveys 
hern  to  the  incus,  the  incus  to  the  os  orbicu- 
are,  and  the  os  orbiculare  to  the  ftapes.  The 

{tapes 


( 144  ) 

Itapes  adhering  to  the  feneftra  ovalis  caufes  it  to 
vibrate.  The  trembling  feneftra  ovalis  com- 
municates its  vibrations  to  the  water  contained 
in  the  veftibuium  and  femicircular  canals,  and 
caufes  very  gentle  motions  of  the  nervous  ex- 
panfion  contained  therein,  which  tranfmit 
them  to  the  fenforium  commune,  where  the 
mind  is  informed  of  the  prefence  of  found, 
and  judges  of  its  difference.  Gravity  and  ac- 
cutenefs  of  found  depend  upon  the  number  of 
vibrations  given  at  the  fame  time. 

o 

OF  TASTING. 

Tailing  is  a fenfation  by  which  we  diftin- 
•guifh  the  qualities  of  bitter,  fvveet,  four,  &c. 
fubftances.  The  nervous  papillae  of  the  ninth 
or  lingual  pair  of  nerves,  which  are  fituated 
in  the  apex  and  margins  of  the  tongue,  are 
the  chief  organs,  of  tafte.  The  parts  fubfervi- 
ent  to  tafte  are- — The  tongue , which  gives  a 
convenient  fttuation  to  the  nervous  papillae, 
and  by  its  extenfive  motion  applies  them  to 
the  fubftance  to  be  tafted- — The  epidermis  of 
the  tongue,  which  moderates  any  exceflive 
ftimuli — The  faliva  and  mucus  of  the  mouth, 
which  affift  the  organ  of  tafte  when  it  is  nec-^ 
efiary  that  the  fubftances  fhould  be  diffolved 
in  order  to  be  tafted,  and  which  alfo  keep  the 
nervous  papillae  rnoift. 

OF  TOUCHING. 

Touching  is,  a fenfation  by  which  we  dir 

tinguifh 


C *45  ) 

-tmguifh  the  qualities  of  hardnefs,  foftnefs, 
heat  and  cold,  &c.  of  fubftances,  and  by 
which  we  perceive  any  fubftance  that  comes 
in  contact  with  the  fkin,  particularly  at  the 
points  of  the  fingers.  The  organs  of  touch 
are  the  nervous  papillae  of  the  fkin,  which 
are  extremely  numerous  and  fenfible  at  the 
points  of  the  fingers. 

Too  great  a fenfation  is  moderated  by  the 
epidermis,  which  alfo  defends  the  papillae  from 
being  dried  by  the  air. 


ADENOLOGY, 

OR 

Doctrine  of  the  glands. 

A gland  is  a fmall  round'  body,  whic; 
ferves  for  the  fecretion  or  alteration  of  a fluid. 
Division,  into  folliculofe,  globate,  glomerate , 
and  conglomerate  ; they  are  alio  divided  from 
the  liquid  they  fecrete  or  change,  into  febace- 
ous,  muciparous,  lymphatic,  lachrymal,  fali- 
val,  bilious,  laflteal,  &c. 

A folliculofe  gland  confifis  of  an  hollow  vaf- 
cular  ' lembrane-,  having  an  excretory  duct  % 
as  the  muciparous  and  febaceous  glands. 

A globate  gland  confifis  of  a glorner  of  lym- 
phatic veflels,  connected  together  by  cellular 
membrane,  and  has  no  cavity  nor  excretory 
iuct,  as  the  lymphatic  glands  of  the  lymphat- 
c veflels. 

A glomerate  gland  is  formed  of  a glorner  of 
N fanguineous 


( ) 

fanguineous  veflels ; has  no  cavity,  but  is  fur- 
nilhed  with  an  excretory  dufr,  as  the  lachry- 
mal and  mammary  glands. 

A conglomerate  gland  is  a gland  compofed 
of  many  glomerate  glands,  whofe  excretory 
duels  unite,  and  form  one  large  canal,  or 
duel.  The  pancreas  and  falival  glands  be- 
long to  this  clafs. 

The  excretory  duel  of  glands  is  a thin  ca- 
nal, which  goes  out  of  the  gland,  and  excerns 
the  fecreted  fluid,  by  the  contractility  of  its 
coats. 

The  nerves  and  vejfcls  of  glands  are  numer- 
ous, and  come  from  the  neighbouring  parts. 

Glands  are  connected  with  other  parts  by 
cellular  membrane.  They  are  larger  in  in- 
fants than  in  adults,  Use,  to  fecrete  or 
change  a fluid. 

Glands  of  the  skin.  The  fubcutaneous 
glands  are  febaceous,  and  fituated  under  the 
inferior  furface  of  the  Ikin,  which  they  perfo- 
rate by  their  excretory  duds. 

Glands  in  the  cavity  of  the  crani- 
um. i.  Glands  of  the  dura  mater,  called  alfo, 
after  their  difcoverer,  Bacchonian , are  fituated 
near  the  fuperior  longitudinal  finus  of  the  du- 
ra mater,  in  peculiar  foveolas  of  the  os  fron- 
lis  and  parietal  bones.  They  appear  to  be 
globate.  2.  Glands  of  the  choroid  plexus  are 
globate,  and  fituated  in  the  choroid  plexus  of 
the  lateral  ventricles  of  the  brain.  3.  The; 
pituitary  gland , fituated  in  a duplicate  re  of  the 
dura  mater,  in  the  fella  turcica  of  the  fphte- . 

noid  1 


( M 7 ) 

nold  bone.  The  infundibulurh  of  the  brain 
terminates  in  this  gland. 

Glands  of  the  eyes*  i.  Meibomius’s 
glands.  Thefe  are  fmall  and  numerous  feba- 
ceous  glands, fituated  under  thefkin  of  the  eye- 
lids, near  their  margins*  Their  excretory 
duels  open  on  the  margins  of  the  tarfi,  and 
are  called  p unci  a ciliaria.  2.  The  lachrymal 
gland,  which  is  glomerate,  and  fituated  above 
the  external  angle  of  the  orbit,  in  a peculiar 
depreflion  of  the  os  fronds.  This  gland  has 
fix  or  eight  excretory  canals,  through  which 
the  tears  are  conveyed,  and  which  open  upon 
the  internal  furface  of  the  upper  eyelids.  3. 
The  caruncula  lachrymalis,  a fmall  and  red 
prominence,  obvious  in  the  internal  angle  of 
the  eye,  between  the  tarfi  of  the  eyelids.  It 
confifts  of  fmall  febaceous  glands,  which  fe- 
crete  a feculent  humour. 

Glands  of  the  nostrils.  The  pituita- 
ry membrane  lining  the  noftrils  and  its  fmuf- 
es,  is  every  where  furnilhed  with  muciparous 
glands , which  fecrete  the  mucus  of  the  nofef 

Glands  of  the  ear.  The  ceruminous 
glands  are  fituated  under  the  (kin  of  the  mea- 
tus auditorius  externus,  a.nd  fecrete  the  wax 
of  the  ears. 

Glands  of  the  mouth.  The  glands  of 
the  mouth,  which  fecrete  the  faliva,  are  called 
falival , and  are,  • 1 . The  parotid , two  large 
conglomerate  glands,  fituated  under  the  ear 
between  the  mamillary  procefs  of  the  tempo- 
ral bones  and  angle  of  the  lower  jaw.  The 

excretory 


( > 

excretory  canal  of  this  gland  opens  in  the 
mouth,  and  is  called,  from  its  difcoverer,  the 
Stenonian  duct.  2.  The  maxillary , which  are 
conglomerate  glands,  fituated  under  the  angles 
of  the  lower  jaw.  The  excretory  duds  of 
thefe  glands  are  alfo  called,  after  their  difcov- 
erer, Warthonian.  3.  The  fublingual  glands, 
fituated  under  the  tongue.  4.  The  glands  of 
the  cheek , fituated  on  the  internal  furface  of  the 
cheeks.  5.  The  labial  glands , on  the  internal 
furface  of  the  lips,  under  the  common  mem- 
brane of  the  mouth.  6.  The  molar  glands,  fit- 
uated  oh  each  fide  of  the  mouth,  between  the 
maifeter  and  buccinator  mufdes,  and  whofe 
excretory  duds  open  near  the  laft  dens  molaris. 

External  glands  of  the  neck. 
1 . The  jugular  glands , which  are  globate,  and 
found  under  the  ikin  of  the  neck  about  the  ex- 
ternal jugular  veins  : they  are  in  general  about 
20  in  number.  2.  The  fubmaxillary  glands , 
alfo  globate,  and  fituated  in  the  fat  under  the 
jaw.  3.  The  cervical , found  under  the  cutis 
in  the  fat  about  the  neck.  4.  The  thyroid , a 
large  gland  lying  upon  the  cricoid  cartilage, 
trachea,  and  horns  of  the  thyroid  cartilage. 
It  is  uncertain  whether  it  be  globate  or  con- 
glomerate. Its  excretory  dud  has  never  been 
deteded,  and  its  ufe  is  unknown. 

Glands  of  the  fauces.  The  glands  fit- 
uated under  the  membrane  which  lines  this 
cavity,  are  muciparous,  and  divided,  from  their 
fituation,  into  palatine,  uvular , tonfil , lingual , 
laryngeal,  and  pharyngeal. 


Glands 


( 149  ) 

Glands  of  the  breasts.  The  mamma- 
ry, or  latteal  glands,  are  fituated  under  the  fat 
of  the  breads.  Their  excretory  dufts  are  call- 
ed tubuli  lacliferi,  tabuli  galaclcferi,  and  run. 
from  them  to  the  nipple,  in  which  they  open. 

Glands  of  the  thorax,  i.  Th t thymus, 
a large  gland,  peculiar  to  the  foetus,  and  which 
difappears  foon  after  birth  : it  is  fituated  in  the 
anterior  duplicature  or  fpace  of  the  medialti- 
num,  under  the  fuperior  part  of  the  fternum, 
and  above  the  pericardium.  An  excretory  duel 
has  not  been  as  yet  detected,  but  lymphatics 
are  feen  going  from  this  gland  to  the  thoracic 
du£l.  2.  The  bronchial , which  are  large 
blackilh  glands  near  the  end  of  the  trachea, 
and  beginning  of  the  bronchia,  and  which  fe- 
crete  a blackilh  mucus.  3.  The  oefophageal 
glands,  found  under  the  internal  membrane  of 
the  cefophagus,  and  which  fecrete  the  mucus  of 
that  canal.  4.  The  dorfal glands,  fituated  up- 
on the  4th  or  5th  vertebra  of  the  back,  be- 
tween them  and  the  poilerior  furface  of  the 
cefophagus.  They  have  no  excretory  du<fts. 

Glands  of  the  abdomen-  i.  The  gaf- 
tric  glands,  which  are  muciparous,  and  fituated 
under  the  external  membrane  of  the  ftomach. 
2.  The  intejlinal glands,  which  are  alfo  mucip- 
1 arous,  and  found  under  the  internal  mem- 
brane of  the  inteftines,  efpecially  the  large.  3 
The  mej enteric  glands,  fituated  here  and  there 
in  the  cellular  membrane  of  the  mefentery.  The 
chyle  from  the  intehines  palfes  through  thefe 
glands  to  the  thoracic  duft,  4.  The  hepatic 
N 2 > glands. 


( 150  ) 

glands,  alfo  called  acini  bilioji , which  form  the 
fubftance  of  the  liver,  and  feparate  the  bile  in- 
to fmall  duds,  which,  at  length,  terminate  in 
the  duflus  hepaticus.  5.  The  cyjlic  glands , 
which  are  muciparous,  and  found  under  the 
internal  membrane  of  the  gall-bladder,  efpe- 
cially  about  its  neck.  6.  The  pancreatic  glands, 
which  conftitute  the  pancreas ; a fmall  dud  a- 
rifes  from  each  gland,  which  unite  to  form  the 
duclus  pancreaticus . See  Splanchnoiogy, 
7.  The  epiploic , or  omental  glands , which  are 
.globate,  and  fituated  in  the  omentum. 

Glands  of  the  loins,  i.  The fupra- 
renal  glands , fituated  in  the  adipofe  membrane, 
•one  above  each  kidney.  An  excretory  duct 
has  never  been  deteded,  and  their  ufe  is  un- 
known. 2.  The  kidneys.  See  Splanchnolo- 
gy.. 3.  The  lumbar  glands,  which  are  glo- 
bate, and  fituated  about  the  beginning  of  the 
thoracic  dud.  4.  The  iliac  glands,  found  a- 
bout  the  beginning  of  the  iliac  vefiels.  5.  The 
Jacral,  which  are  glokate.glands,  and  adhere 
to  the  os  facrum.  ' ..  is. 

Glands  of  the  organs  of  .genera- 
tion of  man.  1.  The -odorifewm. glands  o£ 
the  glans  penis,  which,  are  febaceous,  and  fitu-1 
a ted  around  the  corona-glandis.  2.  The  mu- 
cous glands  of  the  uMthra *,  fituated  under  the 
internal  membrane  of  the  urethra.  The  mouths 
of  their  excretory  duds  are  called  lacuna ?.  3. 
Gowpcr’s  glands  (fo  called  from  their  inventor) 
are  three  large  muciparous  glands,  two  of 
which  are  fituated  before  the  proflrate  gland 


C *5®  ) 

under  the  acceleratores  urinse,  and  the  third 
more  forward  before  the  bulb  of  the  urethra. 
4.  The  proftrate , a very  large,  heart-like,  firm 
gland,  fituated  between  the  neck  of  the  urina- 
ry bladder  and  bulbous  part  of  the  urethra.-  It. 
fecretes  a lacteal  fluid,  which  is  emitted  into  the 
urethra  by  ten  or  twelve  duds  near  the  veru- 
montanum,  during  coition. 

Glands  of  the  female  organs  of 
generation,  i.  The  odoriferous  glands  of 
the  labia  majora  and  nymphce , which  are  feba- 
ceous,  and  fituated  under  the  ikin  of  thofe 
parts.  2.  The  odoriferous  glands  of  the  clitoris , 
which  are  numerous,  fituated  about  the  bails 
©f  the  clitoris,  and  are  of  the  fame  nature  as 
the  former.  3,  The,  mucous  glands  of  the  ure- 
thra, fituated  under  the  internal  membrane  of 
the  female  urethra..  4.  The  mucous  glands  of 
the  vagina,  fituated  under  the  internal  mem- 
brane of  the  vagina*. 

Glands:  of  the  extremities.  The. 
glands  in  the  groin , o ^inguinal  glands , are  glo- 
bate,  are  fituated  in  great  num- 

bers in^Bj^Sj.uia-% membrane  of  the  inguinal 
region,  3jEJ(^eiva5he  lymphatic  veffels  from 
the  glans  penis,  atm  lo^er  extremities.  The 
fab  axillary  glands  are  ajjfo  globate,  and  are  fit- 
uated in  the  c^]lular^lfi|jBrane  of  the  arm- 
pit  : they  are  jdfo  •umerous,  and  receive  the 
lymphatic  veiieJs'^om  the  breads  and  fupe- 
rior  extremities. 

Glands  of  the  joints.  The  fmajj  fat- 
like makes,  fituated  within  the  moveable  joints, 

. arc 


C *52  ) 

hte  erroneously  called  fynovial  glands  : -their 
ftrufture  is  not  glandular,  they  are  compofed 
of  adeps  and  an  arrangement  of  the  internal 
vafcular  membrane  of  the  joint,  which  gives 
them  a fimbriated  appearance.  By  thefe  little 
mafles  the  fynovia  is  feparated  from  the  blood 
for  the  eafy  motion  of  the  joint. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  SECRETION. 


Secretion  is  a particular  function  in  an  ani- 
mal body,  by  which  a fluid  is  feparated  from 
the  blood,  different  in  its  properties  from  the 
blood. 

The  organs  which  fecrete  the  various  hu- 
mours are  the  glands.  The  proximate  or  im- 
mediate caufe  of  fecretion  is  a fpecific  action  of 
the  arteries  of  the  gland^ufor  gvdf^fecretion 
is  formed  from  the  ex  tr  e mm^  QM.ijl^es  (the 
fecretion  of  the  bile  is  fio  .m^e>pt,iinT|^is  Jaw, 


fcfunc- 
updfe  glands  fe- 
laB-dsfaliva,;  the  acini 
iceuwTthe  kidnies 


for  the  vena  portae  takes 
tion  of  an  artery);  thjjs'  tl? 

Crete  mucus,  the  faliv 
the  liver, 
urine,  See. 

The  fecreted  fluids  are  tnP^rop 
the  receptacles  and  duffs  through  which  the 
fecretion  is  to  pafs  to  its  place  of  deftination  ; 
fo  that  the  Accretions  move  akwag  the  excre- 
tory 


per  ftimuli  to 


( *53  ) 

tory  dads  by  means  of  the  contractility  of 
the  coats  of  the  duds  and  the  affift'ance  of 
neighbouring  moving  powers. 


SPLANCHNOLOGY, 

OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  VISCERA. 


Body,  divided  externally  into  head,  trunk, 
and  extremities.  Head,  divided  into  face. 


and  hairy  part.  Hairy  part,  into  vertex. 


or  crown,  finciput,  or  the  fore  part,  occiput, 
or  hinder  part,  and  hides.  Face,  into  fore- 
:ad,  temples,  nofe,  eyes,  mouth,  cheeks, 
chin,  and  ears.  Trunk,  divided  into  neck, 
thorax,  and  abdor^n.  Neck,  into  anterior 
and  pofteriorgjHjfc.  Thorax,  into  anterior 
and  Poftefts^filfeu*&£dp<:.  Abdomen,  in- 


born 
ichond) 
ng  the  n 
Hanks 
he  urinar 
:d  groins 
ler  the  abdo«j|gjt£ 
’ r the  pub 


d lateral  regions, 
ivided  into  three 
rhifch  lies  efoer  the 
the  hyp ~ 
■round- 
ed t|fc 
lies  over 
whofe  fides  are 
is  the  hairy  part 
»pt\#fcen  the  groins.  Un3 
the  jparts  of  generation—' 

in 


in.  men,  the  fcrotum  and  penis — an  women, 
the  labia  and  rinia  vulvae.  The  fpace  between 
the  genitals  and  anus  is  called  the  perinaunu 
Extremities,  divided  into  fuperior  and  in- 
ferior. Superior  extremity,  into  top  of 
the  humerus,  brachium,  fore  arm,  and  hand. 
Hand,  into  carpus,  metacarpus,  and  fingers. 
Fingers,  into  pollex,  index,  digitus  medius, 
digitus  annularis,  digitus  auricularis.  Infe- 
rior extremity,  divided  into  femur,  or 
thigh,  crus,  or  leg,  and  extremity  of  the  foot. 
Foot,  into  tarfus,  metatarfus,  and  toes. 

Internal  division  of  the  body,  into 
three  cavities,  viz.  cavity  of  the  cranium,  tho* 
rax,  and  abdomen. 


ENTS, 


COMMON  IN' 

m ► 

Thefe  are  fo  call 
Common  coverings 
they  confift  of  epi 
tis,  aK  * 


A thin,  pe.^ry^, 
jUfrg  the  external  fu 
^W^ion,  with  the  cuti 
inhaling  veffels.  Col 
cover  the  fenfible  cutaiieous 


RE  Til 


C 155  ) 


RETE  MUCOSUM. 

A mucous  fubftance,  difpofed  in  a net-like 
form,  between  the  epidermis  and  cutis.  Col- 
our, white  in  Europeans,  black  in  Ethiopi- 
ans, &c.  &c.  Use,  to  cover  the  fenfible  cu- 
! taneous  papillae,  to  conned  the  epidermis  with 
I the  cutis,  and  give  the  colour  to  the  body. 

■ Synonims.  Mucus  Malpighianus. 

CUTIS,  OR  TRUE  SKIN. 

A thick  membrane  between  the  rete  muco- 
»fum  and  adipofe  membrane,  covering  the 
iwhole  body.  Substance,  fibrous,  vafcular, 
and  nervous.  Use,  for  the  fituaticn  of  the 
iorgan  of  touch,  exhalation,  and  abforption. 
See  pages  128  and  144. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  PERSPIRATION. 


R NAILS, 


, fituated  in  the  extremi- 
ties 


Perfpiration 
he  blood  is 
d by  the 
livided 
Hie 
neans 
aid 
>art 
vill 


of  fecretion  by  which 
antitv  of  aquedus  flu- 
of  the  {kin.  It  is 
perfpiration  : * 
g on,  by  which 
is  kept  frnooth 
any 
vhic^p 

only  occafionally. 


( i J6  ) 


lies  of  the  fingers  and  toes.  Use,  to  defend 
the  nervous  papillae  from  contufion. 

PILI,  OR  HAIRS. 

Thin,  elaftic,  dry  filaments,  growing  out 
from  the  fkin.  Colour  and  situation, 
various.  Called  capilli  on  the  head  ; fu- 
percilia,  or  eye-brows,  above  the  eyes  ; cilia, 
or  eyelaflies,  on  the  margin  of  the  eyelids  ; 
vibrilfae  in  the  noftrils ; piii  auriculares  in  the 
meatus  auditorius  ; myftax  on  the  upper  lip  5 
fearba  on  the  lower  jaw,  &c.  &e. 


ADIPOSE  AND  CELLULAR  MEMBRANE. 


A membrane  formed  of  finall  membranous 
cells,  which  are  fometimes  diftended  with  fat. 
Situation,  under  the  cutis,  and  in  fome  foft? 
parts.  Use,  to  cover  and  defend  the  mufcles ; 
ru  unite  the  foft  parts ; and  to  render  the  muf- 
cular  fibres  flexile.  When  without  fat,  it  is 
called  tela  ccllulofa , or  cellar  mpmhranp. 
which  forms  the  fubflance  all  the 

membranes,  and  commits  vjBnBvarts  to- 
gether. 


OF  THE 


The  parts  which  form  the  head,  are  divid- 
ed into  external  and  nrornal.  The  external 
parts  are  the  common  integuments  ; hair  ; a 
tendinous  expanfion  ; three  pair  of  mufcles  $ 
pericranium ; and  cranium  itfelf.  The  Inter- 
nal 


( 157  ) 

nal  parts  are,  the  dura  mater  ; membrana  a- 
rachnoidea  ; pia  mater  ; cerebrum  ; cerebel- 
lum ; medulla  oblongata  ; nine  pair  of  nerves ; 
four  arteries,  and  twenty-two  venous  fmufes. 

DURA  MATER. 

A thick  membrane,  which  ftrongly  adhere? 
to  the  internal  furface  of  the  cranium,  efpe- 
cially  about  the  futures.  Processes.  The 
falciform  procefs , which  divides  the  hemifpheres 
of  the  brain  ; tertorium  cerebelli , which  fepa- 
rates  the  brain  from  the  cerebellum  ; and  fep- 
tum  cerebelli , which  feparates  the  two  lobes  of 
the  cerebellum.  Composed  of  two  ftrong 
membranous  layers  adhering  together  by  fi- 
brous texture.  Arteries.  Meningea  anterior, 
media  and  pofterior.  Veins  are  called  ve- 
nous fmufes  j in  number  they  are  twenty-two, 
the  principal  of  which  are  the  fuperior  longitu- 
dinal, lateral,  and  inferior  longitudinal  y ail  of 
which  evacuate  their  blood  through  the  fora- 
men lacernm  in  bafi  cranii,  into  the  internal 
jugular  veins.  -Nerves,  none.  Glands,  fit- 
uated  abotlt  the  longitudinal  fmus,  are  called 
Bacchonian.  Use,  to  form  the  internal  pe- 
riofteum  of  the  cranium,  and  to  contain  and 
defend  the  cerebrum  and  internal  parts  of  the 
brain  from  compreffion. 

MEMBRANA  arachnoidea. 

A very  delicate  and  tranfparent  membrane, 
situated  between  the  dura  and  pia  mater, 
arrpunding  the  cerebrum, cerebellum, medulla 
O oblongata, 

O J 


( 153  ) 

oblongata,  and  medulla  fpinalis.  Substance, 
very  thin  and  filamentous,  and  apparently  with- 
out veil  els  and  nerves.  Use,  not  known. 

PI  A MATER. 

A thin  membrane,  firmly  accreted  to  the 
convolutions  of  the  cerebrum,  cerebellum,  me 
dulla  oblongata  and  fpinalis.  Substance,  al 
moll  wholly  vafcular.  Use,  to  diftribute  the 
velfels  to,  and  contain  the  fubftance  of,  the 
cerebrum. 

CEREBRUM,  OR  BRAIN. 

A great  vifcus  in  the  cavity  of  tire  cranium 
Figure,  oval.  Size,  larger  in  man,  in  pro 
portion  to  his  fize,  than  in  any  other  anima 
Substance,  cortical  and  medullary.  Div 
ded  into  two  hemifpheres , right  and  left.  Eac 
hemifphere  fubdivided  on  its  inferior  furfac! 
into  three  lobes,  an  anterior,  middle,  and  po 
terior.  Principal  cavities,  two  antcru 
or  lateral  ventricles,  in  each  of  which  are  fe1 
eral  eminencies  and  a loole  vafcular  productic 
of  the  pia  mater,  called  the  plexus  chorofdes  ; 
third  and  fourth  ventricle.  Principal  part,' 
corpus  call  of um , feen  when  the  hemifpheres  a:1 
feparated  from  each  other  ; feptum  pellucidw 
w hich  divides  the  lateral  ventricles  j ihc  fo  ’ 
nix  ; the  digital  procefes  ; pedes  hippocampi 
corpora ftriata,  and  thalami  nervorum  opticorui 
which  are  found  in  the  lateral  ventricles ; vi 
vula  magna  cerebri ; ccmmifitra  anterior  et  p,  \ 
terior  ; corpora  quadrigemina,  i.  e.  nates  ah' 


( l59  ) 

(eftes ; gland  id  a pinealis ; glanchda  pituitaria  ; 
eminently  candicantes , and  the  crura  cerebri , all 
of  which  can  only  be  learnt  upon  the  fubject. 
Arteries,  branches  of  the  internal  carotids 
and  vertebrals.  Nerves,  none,  but  emits 
nine  pair.  Veins,  return  from  the  cortex  of 
the  cerebrum,  and  evacuate  themfelves  into 
[twenty-two  venous  finufes  of  the  dura  mater. 
iUsE.  It  is  the  organ  of  all  the  fenfes. 

CEREBELLUM,  OR  LITTLE  BRAIN. 

j A filial  1 brain  fituated  under  the  tentorium 
;n  the  inferior  occipital  depreflion.  Figure, 
I'ound.  Division,  into  a right  and  left  lobe. 
Substance,  externally  cortical ; internally 
ne  dullary.  Eminences,  two  crura  cerebelli ; 
m anterior  and  pofterior  ^vermiform  procefs^ 
md  the  arbor  vita.  Cavities,  none.  Ves- 
sels, common  with  the  cerebrum.  Use,  the 
lime  as  the  cerebrum. 

MEDULLA  OBLONGATA. 

A medullary  part  lying  upon  the  bafilary 
ir  cuneiform  procefs  of  the  occipital  bone, 
orraed  by  the  connexion  of  the  crura  of  the 
:erebrum  and  cerebellum.  Eminences,  pons 
jarolii  ; corpora  pyramidalia  ; and  corpora  oli- 
;aria.  Use,  the  fame  as  the  cerebrum. 

MEDULLA  SPINALIS. 

A continuation  of  the  medulla  oblongata, 
yhich  defeendsinto  the  fpecus  vertebralis,from 
he  foramen  magnum  occipitale  to  the  third 

vertebra 


( i Go  ) 


vertebra  of  the  loins,  in  which  courfe  it  trans- 
mits between  the  vertebras  thirty  pair  of  nerves. 
Figure,  cylindrical.  Terminates,  in  va- 
rious nerves,  which  form  the  cauda  equina. 
Integuments,  the  dura  mater  ; tunica  arach- 
noidea  ; and  pia  mater.  Substance,  exter- 
nally medullary;  internally  cortical.  Arte- 
ries, anterior  fpinal.  Use,  to  emit  thirty  pair 
of  nerves,  called  fpinal. 


OF  THE  ACTION  OF  THE  CEREBRUM,  CERE- 
BELLUM, MEDULLA  OBLONGATA,  AND 

MEDULLA  SPINALIS. 

The  moft  important  functions  of  an  animal 
body  are  thofe  of  the  brain.  In  order  to  ex- 
plain thefe  accurately,  it  is  neceffary  to  men- 
tion a few  experiments  which  have  been  made 
upon  animals. 

Upon  dividing,  compreffing,  or  tying  a 
nerve,  the  mufcles  to  which  the  nerve  goes  be- 
come paralytic.  If  the  nerve  thus  divided, 
compreffed,  or  tied,  had  any  particular  fen- 
fation,  that  fenfation  no  longer  exifts ; but  up- 
on untying  or  removing  the  compreffion,  its 
peculiar  fenfe  returns. 

If  the  cerebrum,  cerebellum,  or  medulla  ob- 
longata, be  irritated,  dreadful  convulfions  take 
place  all  over  the  body. 

If  any  part  of  the  brain  be  comprelied,  tort 
part  of  the  body  is  deprived  of  motion  which  ,! 
has  nerves  from  the  compreifed  part. 

From  thefe  phenomena,  it  is  evident  tear  j 

the 


the  caufe  of  every  fenfation  and  motion  in  an 
animal  body  arifes  from  the  brain  and  fpinal 
marrow,  and  that  from  thefe  parts  it  is  con- 
veyed to  every  fentient  part  through  the  me- 
dium of  the  nerves.  Hence  it  follows,  that 
the  nerves  are  the  organs  by  which  the  vari- 
ous fenfations  are  produced.  The  manner, 
however,  in  which  the  nerves  exercife  fenfe 
and  motion  ; how  the  will  is  conveyed  from 
the  brain  to  the  different  parts,  and  how,  from 
the  different  parts  fenfations  are  conveyed  to 
the  brain,  remains  involved  in  oblcurity  ; fev- 
eral  hypothefes  have  been  deduced  to  explain 
it,  but  none  appear  to  be  fatisfacfory.  See 
alfo  page  141. 


EYE.. 

The  parts  which  form  the  eye  are  divided 
into  external  and  internal.  The  external 
parts  are  the  fupercilia,  or  eyebrows  ; the 
palpebrae,  or  eyelids  ; the  cilia,  or  eyelafhes  ; 
the  lachrymal  gland  ; the  lachrymal  caruncle, 
a fmall  fleffiy  fubftance  at  the  inner  angle  of 
the  eye  5 the  punfta  lachrymalia,  two  fmall 
openings  on  the  nafal  extremity  of  each  eve- 
l'afti  ; the  canali.s  lachrymalis,  formed  by  the 
union  of  the  duffs  leading  from  the  puncta 
lachrymalia,  which  meet  and  conftitute  it  at 
the  internal  angle  of  the  eye  ; the  faccus  lach- 
rymalis, a dilatation  of  the  canalis  lachryma  - 
iis,  and  which  ends  in  the  ductus  nafalis,  a 
continuation  of  the  fame  canal,  which  con- 
O 2 veys 


( *62  ) 

vey's  the  tears  into  the  nofe  ; the  mufcles  of 
the  eyelids  ; the  mufcles  of  the  bulb  of  the 
eye,  and  the  fat  of  the  orbit.  The  bulb  of 
the  eye  confifls  of  eight  membranes,  two 
chambers,  and  three  humours.  The  bulb  is 
covered  anteriorly  by  an  exquifitely  fenfible 
and  delicate  membrane,  which  begins  from 
the  edge  of  the  eyelalh,  and  is  reflected  over 
the  eye  to  the  edge  of  the  other  eyelafh.  This 
membrane  is  the  feat  of  inflammations  of  the 
eye,  and  is  called  the  tunica  conjunctiva. 
Membranes.  i.  The  fclerotic , which  is 
white,  and  the  outermoft.  2.  The  choroid , 
which  is  highly  vafcular,  and  whofe  veflfels 
are  called,  from  their  direction,  the  vafa  vor- 
ticofa.  3.  The  retina , which  is  the  innermoft ; 
and,  4.  The  hyaloid , or  arachnoid , which  in- 
cludes the  vitreous  humour.  In  the  anterior 
part  are,  5.  The  cornea  tranfparens , which  is 
a part  of  the  fclerotic.  6.  The  iris , a part  of 
the  choroid  : it  is  of  various  colours  ; hence 
white,  black,  blue  eyes,  &c.  7.  The  uvea , 

which  is  the  posterior  part  of  the  iris ; and, 
8.  The  capfule  of  the  cryflalline  lens.  The 
chambers  of  the  eye  are  diftinguifhed  into 
anterior  and  pofterior.  The  anterior  is  the 
fpaoe  between  the  tranfparent  cornea  and  the 
fore  part  of  the  iris  ; the  pofterior  the  fpace 
between  th?  uvea  and  capfule  of  the  • cry/' al- 
ine lens.  The  humours  are  the  aqueous, 
the  cryflalline  lens,  and  the  vitreous.  See 
Uyprolopy.  Connexion  of  the  bulb.  An-, 
tcriorly,  it  is  connected  with  the  membra.  * a 

conjunct;'  a $ 


( ^3  ) 

conjun&iva  ; pofteriorly,  with  the  orbit,  by 
means  of  mufcles  and  the  optic  nerve.  Ar- 
teries, orbitalis  interna,  the  central,  and  the 
optic.  Veins,  empty  temfelves  into  the  ex- 
ternal jugulars. — Nerves.  The  optic,  or 
firft  pair,  and  branches  from  the  third,  fourth, 
fifth,  and  fixth  pair.  Use.  It  is  the  organ 
of  vifion.  See  Phyfiology  ofVifion , page  142. 

EAR. 

The  foft  parts  which  form  the  ear  are  di- 
vided into  external  and  internal.  The  ex- 
ternal soft  parts  are,  the  auricula,  in 
•which  are  various  prominences  and  fmufes,  as 
the  helix,  antihelix,  tragus,  antitragus,  concha 
auriculae,  fcapha,  feu  folia  navicuiaris,  and 
lobuius  ; the  meatus  aud'itorius  extern u'A  and 
membrana  tympani.  The  internal  soft 
parts  are  the  periofteum,  a proper  mem- 
brane, which  lines  every  part  of  the  internal 
ear,  and  the  Euftachian  tube,  which  begins  by 
!’  a large  opening  in  the  fauces,  and  gradually 
diminifhes  as  it  pafles  along  its  bony  canal  in- 
to the  ear.  Arteries,  auditoria  interna  and 
externa.  Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the 
external  jugular.  Nerves  of  the  external 
ear  are,  branches  of  the  feventh  pair,  or  ner- 
vus  auditorius  durus  5 and  thofe  of  the  inter- 
nal part  are  branches  alfo  of  the  feventh  pair, 
but  of  che  portio  mollis.  Use.  It  is  the  or- 
gan of  hearing.  See  Phyfiology  of  Hearing, 
page  143, 


NOSE, 


( 164  ) 


NOSE. 

A prominence  of  the  face  between  the  eyes 
■and  mouth.  Division,  into  root,  back,  apex, 
and  alte.  Soft  parts.  Common  integuments, 
mufcles,  cartillages,  periofteum,  perichondri- 
um. Soft  parts  of  the  nostrils.  A pi- 
tuitary membrane,  which  lines  the  internal 
furface  of  the  nofe  and  all  its  cavities,  contains 
the  mucous  glands,  and  has  diftributed  on  it 
the  olfadtory  nerves ; and  the  periofteum.  Ar- 
teries, branches  of  the  internal  maxillary. 
Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  internal  ju- 
gulars. Nerves,  branches  of  the  olfadtory, 
opthahnic,  and  fuperior  maxillary.  Mucip- 
arous glands,  fituated  every  where  in  the 
pituitary  membrane.  Use,  for  fmelling,  ref- 
piration  and  fpeech.  See  Phyfiology  of  fmelU 
ing,  page  1 42.. 

cavity  of  the  mouth., 

The  parts  which  form  this  cavity  are  exter- 
nal and  internal.  The  external  are  the 
lips,  the  philtrum,  .the  chin,  and  the  cheeks. 
Composition,  common  integuments  and  the 
mufcles  of  the  upper  and  under  jaw.  Arte- 
ries of  the  external  part  are  branches  of  the 
infra-orbital,  inferior  alveolar,  and  facial. 
Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  external  ju- 
gular. Nerves,  from  the  fifth  and  feventh 
pair.  The  internal  parts  of  the  mouth 
are  the  palate,  two  alveolar  arches,  the  gums, 
tongue,  cavity- of  the  cheeks,  and  three  pair  of 


C 1*5  ) 

falival  glands.  Use,  for  maflication,  fpeech, 
refpiration,  deglutition,  fudtion,  and  tafle. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MASTICATION. 

Maflication  is  the  comminution  of  the  food 
between  the  teeth,  effected  by  the  jaws,  the 
tongue,  cheeks,  and  lips.  The  powers  which 
move  thefe  parts  are  their  various  mufcles,  by 
which  the  lower  jaw  is  pulled  from  the  upper 
and  again  brought  to  it,  whilfl  the  tongue  per- 
petually puts  the  food  between  the  teeth,  and 
the  cheecks  and  lips  impede  it,  when  maflica- 
ted,  from  falling  out  of  the  mouth.  By  this 
procefs,  the  food  is  divided,  lacerated,  and,  as 
it  were,  ground,  and  mixed  with  the  faliva  and 
mucus  of  the  mouth  and  the  atmofpherical  air, 
and  thus  rendered  fit  to  be  fwallowed  and  di- 
gefled  ; fo  that  maflication  is  im  fadt  an  incip- 
ient digeflion. 

TONGUE. 

A mufcular  body,  moveable  in  every  direc- 
tion, fituafed  in  the  cavity  of  the  mouth.  Di- 
vision, into  bafis,  body,  fides,  apex.  Con- 
nexion, with  the  os  hyoides,  bottom  of  the 
infra-lingual  cavity,  and  lower  jaw.  The  ner- 
vous papillae,  which  are  fituated  at  the  apex 
of  the  tongue,  are  pyrimidal,  fungiform,  or 
conoid.  Substance,  flefliy,  covered  by  cu- 
ticle, rete  mucofum,  cutis,  and  ceilulur  mem- 
brane. ’Lingual  arteries,  branches  of  the 
external  carotid.  Veins,  empty  themfelves 
into  the  external  jugulars.  Nerves,  from 


( i66  ) 

the  fifth,  eighth,  and  ninth  pair.  Glands  are 
muciparous.  Use,  for  fpeech,  maftication,  de- 
glutition, fudtion,  and  tafte.  Seepage  144, 


OF  THE  NECK.- 

The  parts  which  form  the  neck  are  divided 
into  external  and  internal.  The  external 
parts  are  the  common  integuments ; the 
mufcles  of  the  neck  ; eight  pair  of  cervical 
nerves  ; two  carotid  arteries ; two  vertebral' 
arteries  ; two  external  jugular  veins ; two  in- 
ternal jugular  veins ; the  jugular  glands ; the 
thyroid  gland ; the  eighth  pair  of  nerves  of  the 
cerebrum ; and  the  great  intercoftak  The 
internal  parts  are,  the  fauces ; pharynx  5. 
cefophagus ; larynx,  and  the  trachea. 

FAUCES,' 

The  cavity  behind  the  tongue  and  the  cur- 
tain of  the  palate,  or  velum  palatinum,  Soft 
parts,  common  integuments  and  muciparous 
glands.  Arteries,  branches  of  the  external 
carotid.  Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the 
internal  jugular.  Muscles,  fee  Myology. 
Nerves,  from  the  fifth  and  eighth  pair.  Use, 
for  deglutition,  refpiration,  fpeech,  and  hear- 
ing. 

PHARYNX.' 

A mufcular  fac,  like  a funnel,  fituated  be- 
hind the  larynx,  adhering  to  the  fauces,  and 

terminating 


( l67  ) 


-terminating  in  the  oefophagus.  Co.nnected, 
by  means  of  mufcles,  with  the  cranium  ; ver- 
tebrae ; and  os  hyoides.  Use,  to  receive  the 
mafticated  food,  and  convey  it  into  the  cefoph- 
agus. 

(ESOPHAGUS.. 


A membranous  mufcular  tube,  defcending 
from  the  pharynx  to  the  ftomach.  Composed 
of  three  membranes,  viz.  a common,  mufcular, 
and  villous.  Arteries,  branches  of  the  aorta. 
-Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  vena  azygos. 
Nerves,  from  the  eighth  pair  and  great  in- 
tercoftal.  Muciparous  gla-nds, every  where. 
Use,  for  deglutition. 

physiology  of  deglutition. 

Deglutition  is  the  conveying  of  the  mafli- 
cated food  from  the  cavity  of  the  mouth  into 
the  fauces,  and  from  the  fauces  through  the 
oefophagus  into  the  ftomach.  This  is  per- 
formed by  the  jaws  fhutting,  fo  as  to  prevent 
the  food  from  falling  out  or  the  mouth  ; the 
tongue  is  then  applied  to  the  palate,  by  which 
the  food  lying  upon  the  back  of  the  tongue 
is  prefled  into  the  cavity  of  the  fauces,  where 
it  is  received  by  the  dilated  pharynx-.  The 
pharynx  then  is  irritated  to  contract,  by  which 
the  food  is  expelled  into  the  oefophagus,  by 
the  contraction  of  whofe  mufcular  fibres  it  is 
conveyed  through  the  cardia  into  the  ffom- 
,ach. 

The  pharynx  is  dilated  by  its  dilatatory 
mufcles,  and  by  the  root  of  the  tongue,  os 

hyoides, 


( i68  ) 

hyoides,  and  larynx  being  drawn  forwards 
and  backwards  by  their  proper  mufcles. 

The  food  is  prevented  during  the  a£t  of 
fwallowing  from  palling  into  the  pofterior 
opening  of  the  noftrils,  the  Euftacian  tube, 
and  larynx,  by  the  velum  pendulum  palati  and 
uvula  being  prefled  againft  the  former,  and 
the  epiglottis  being  bent  backwards  over  the 
glottis. 

When  a fluid  is  to  be  drank,  the  head  in- 
clines backwards,  the  fame  actions  take  place, 
and  the  fluid  pafles  on  each  fide  of  the  epiglot- 
tis. During  deglutition  the  food  is  covered 
with  the  mucus  of  the  fauces  and  oefcpha- 
gus. 

LARYNX. 

A cartilaginous  cavity,  fituatcd  behind  the 
tongue  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  fauces. 
Composed  of  five  cartilages  ; various  muf- 
cles ; and  an  internal  nervous  membrane. 
Cartilages,  the  epiglottis , at  the  root  of  the 
tongue  ; the  thyroid , or /cut form,  which  is  the 
largeft,  and  two  arytenoid  cartilages  ; and  the 
cricoid  cartilage,  which  is  below  the  thyroid. 
A < very  fenfible  membrane  covers  their  internal 
furface.  The  fuperior  opening  of  the  larynx, 
through  which  the  air  pafles,  is  called  the  glot- 
tis-. Arteries,  branches  of  the  external  car- 
otid. Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  ex- 
ternal jugular.  Serves,  branches  ct  the. 


( l69  ) 


eighth  pair.  Glands,  the  thyroid.  Use.  It 
is  the  organ  of  the  voice,  and  ferves  alfo  for 
refpiration. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  VOICE. 

The  voice  is  caufed  by  the  found  of  the  air 
propelled  through  the  glottis ; fo  that  the  or- 
gan of  the  voice  is  the  larynx  and  its  mufcles. 

The  Ihrillnefs  and  roughnefs  of  the  voice 
depends  on  the  diametre  of  the  glottis,  its 
elafticity,  mobility,  and  lubricity,  and  the  force 
with  which  the  air  is  expelled  : thus  when 
the  diameter  is  increafed,  the  voice  is  more 
bafs,  and  vice  verfa. 

SPEECH 

Is  the  modification  of  the  voice  in  the 
cavity  of  the  mouth  and  noftrils.  • 


VENTRILOQUISM 

Confifls  in  the  motion  of  the  uvula,  epiglot- 
tis, and  fauces,  by  which  the  founds  are  modu- 
lated without  the  lips,  teeth,  or  palate.  The 
mouth  being  nearly  fhut,  and  the  voice  re- 
founding between  the  larynx  and  cavity  of  the 
nofe,  the  found  is  returned  as  if  emitted  by 
fome  one  at  a diftance. 

TRACHEA. 

A tube,  compofed  of  cartilaginous  rings 
continued  from  the  larynx,  and  fituated  before 
the  cefophagus.  It  defeends  to  the  feernum, 
and  there  divides  into  two  branches  called 
P bronchia. 


C I7°  ) 

bronchia.  The  bronchia,  entering  the  fub- 
ftance  of  the  lungs,  divide  into  innumerable 
little  branches,  which  terminate  in  the  veficu ■* 
la  pulmonale s,  or  air-cells.  The  cartilaginous 
rings  of  the  trachea  and  bronchia  are  not 
completely  cartilaginous,  but  flefhy  on  the 
back  part.  The  internal  furface  is  lined  by 
a very  fenjible  membrane  continued  from  the 
larynx.  Vessels  and  nerves,  common  with 
the  larynx.  Use,  for  refpiration  and  fpeech. 


OF  THE  THORAX. 


The  cavity  Ctuated  between  the  neck  and 
abdomen  is  called  the  thorax .,  or  breaft.  The 
external  parts  are,  the  common  integu- 
ments ; the  rnammre,  or  breafts  ; various 
mufcles  and  bones.  The  internal  parts 
are,  the  pleura  ; lungs  ; heart  j thymus 
gland  ; cefophagus  ; thoracic  duct  ; the  arch 
of  the  aorta  ; branches  of  the  vena  cava  j the 
vena  azygos  ; the  eight  pair  of  nerves,  and 
part  of  the  great  intercoftal  nerve. 

MAMMjE,  or  breasts,. 

Two  foft  hemifpheres  adhering  to  the  an. 
terior  and  lateral  region  of  the  thorax,  moll 
confpicuous  in  females.  On  the  middle  of 
the  external  furface  is  the  papilla , around 
which  is  the  coloured  orb  or  difc  of  the  pa. 

pilla,  j 


( ) 

pjlla,  Called  areola.  Substance,  common, 
integuments  ; adipofe  fubitance  \ lacteal 
glands  and  veilels.  Arteries,  external  and 
internal  mammary.  Veins,  empty  themfelves 
into  the  axillary  and  fubclavian  vein.  Nerves, 
branches  of  the  coftalis  Superior.  Lymphat- 
ics, empty  themfelves  into  the  fubaxiilary 
glands.  Use,  to  fuckle  new-born  infants. 

PLEURA. 

A membrane  lining  the  internal  furface  of 
the  thorax,  and  covering  its  vifcera.  It  forms 
a great  procefs,  called  the  mediafdnum , which 
is  a membranous  feptum  to  the  cavity  of  the 
thorax,  dividing  it  perpendicularly  into  two 
cavities,  arifing  from  the  duplicature  of  the 
pleura.  It  is  connected  with  the  ribs,  muf- 
cles,  fternum,  bodies  of  the  dorfal  vertebrae, 
pericardium,  and  diaphragm.  Substance, 
fibrous  and  va  fcular.  Arteries,  from  the 
intercoftals.  Veins,  empty  themfelves  into 
the  intercoftals.  Nerves,  very  few.  Use,  to 
divide  the  thorax  into  two  cavities,  and  render 
the  furface  moift  by  the  vapour  it  exhales,  and 
to  give  a membrane  to  the  lungs  and  pericar- 
dium. 

diaphragm. 

A defliy  and  tendinous  divifion,  feparating 
the  cavity  of  the  thorax  from  the  cavity  of  the 
abdomen.  Adhesion,  anteriorly  with  the 
fternum  and  ribs,  pofteriorly  with  the  verte- 
brae. Substance,  in  the  centre,  tendinous 

in 

p - 


C 172  ) 

in  the  ambit,  fleihy  ; its  fuperior  furface  is  cov- 
ered by  the  pleura  ; its  inferior  by  the  perito- 
neum. Apertures,  a right  foramen,  through 
which  the  vena  cava  afcendens  paffes  to  the 
right  auricle  of  the  heart,  a left  foramen , 
through  which  the  cefophagus  and  the  par  va- 
gum  pafs  into  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen,  and 
a pofterior  opening,  which  tranfmits  the  aorta 
into  the  abdomen,  and  the  thoracic  duel  and 
vena  azygos,  into  the  thorax..  Arteries, 
from  the  defeending  aorta.  Veins,  empty 
themfelves  into  the  vena  azygos.  Nerves. 
The  diaphragmatic,  or  phrenic  nerves,  arife 
from  the  fpinal  nerves  of  the  neck.  Use,  for 
refpiration,  fituation  of  the  heart,  expulfion 
of  feces,  and  parturition. 

LUNGS. 

Two  vifeera,  fituated  in  the  cavities  of  the 
thorax,  by  which  we  breathe.  Division,  in- 
to right  and  left  lung  ; the  right  has  three 
lobes , the  left  only  two.  Connexion,  with 
the  neck  and  heart.  Substance,  veficular, 
vafcular,  and  bronchial,  connected  together 
by  a parenchymatous  fubftance.  It  has  an 
external  membrane  from  the  pleura.  Ves- 
sels, pulmonary  and  bronchial.  Nerves, 
from  the  eighth  pair  and  great  intercoftal. 
Lymphatics,  are  to  be  feen  on  its  external 
furface.  Glands,  called  bronchial.  Use, 
for  refpiration,  fanguification,  and  voice. 


PHYSIOLOGY 


( i73  ) 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  RESPIRATION. 

Refpiration  conhifts  of  inspiration , or  the  in- 
grefs  of  the  air  into  the  lungs,  and  expiration , 
cr  the  egrefs  of  the  air  from  the  lungs. 

During  deep,  refpiration  is  performed  with- 
out our  knowledge,  and  therefore  termed 
Spontaneous  ; but  when  it  can  be  augmented  or 
diminifhed  according  to  our  will,  it  is  termed 
•voluntary..  The  exciting  cauSe  of  infpiration  is 
the  air  ruffing  into  the  lungs  and  irritating  its 
nerves,  which  irritation  is  by  confent  of  parts 
communicated  to  the  diaphragm  and  intercof- 
tal  mufcles,  and  compels  them,  to  contract. 
The  contraction  of  the  intercoffal  mufcles  and 
diaphragm,  and  the  preffure  of  the  elaflic 
air,  therefore  dilate  the  chelL.  The  air  being 
deprived  of  its  ftimulus,  the  intercoffal  muf- 
cles and  diaphragm  become  relaxed,  the  car- 
tilages of  the  ribs  and  abdominal  mufcles, 
before  expanded,  return  to  their  former  date, 
and  thus  the  air  is  expelled  from  the  lungs. 
The  fmall  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
form  a beautiful  net-work  oS  veSels  on  the  in- 
ternal membrane  of  the  air  vehicles.  During 
expiration,  the  air-veffels  are  collapfed ; con- 
fequently.the  blood- veffels become  tortuous, and 
the  blood  is  prevented  palling.  In  infpiration 
then, the  air  vehicles  being  dilated, the  tortuous 
veffels  are  elongated,  and  a free  paffage  afford- 
ed to  the  blood : the  very  delicate  coats  of 
thefe  veffels  are  alfo  rendered  ho  thin  as  to  buf- 
fer a chemical  action  to  take  place  between  the 
P 2 air 


C *7  4 ) 

air  in  the  veficles  and  the  blood  in  the  veffels. 
This  conflitutes  the  primary  ufe  of  refpiration ; 
viz.  the  blood  abforbing  the  oxygen  from  the 
atmofpheric  air,  by  which  the  nervous  energy 
is  increafed,  and  it  is  generally  believed,  heat 
generated ; but  this  fubjeft  is  yet  undeter- 
mined. 

PERICARDIUM. 

A membranous  fac  furrounding  the  heart. 
Adhesion,  with  the  diaphragm,  pleura,  fler- 
num,  cartilages  of  the  ribs,  cefophagus,  aorta 
defcendeiis,  and  the  veins  and  great  arteries 
going  to  and  from  the  heart.  Arteries, 
branches  of  the  internal  mammary  and  medi- 
aftinal.  Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the 
internal  mammary.  Nerves,  from  the  fu- 
perficial  cardiacs.  Use,  to  contain  the  heart, 
and  to  feparate  a fluid,  which  may  lubricate 
and  preferve  it  from  concretion  with  the  peri- 
cardium. 

HEART. 

A mufcular  vifcus  fituated  in  the  cavity  of 
the  pericardium,  which  ferves  for  the  motion 
of  the  blood.  Division,  externally  into  bafe, 
furfaces,  and  margins  ; internally,  into  auri- 
cles and  ventricles.  Situation,  oblique,  not 
tranfverfe.  The  cavities  of  the  heart 
are  called  auricles  and  ventricles.  The  auri- 
cles are  fituated  upon  the  bafe  of  the  heart, 
and  are  fo  named  from  their  refemblance  to 
do.es’  ears.  They  are  compofed.  of  mufcular 

fibres,  • 


( 175  ) 

fibres,  which  are  very  delicate,  and  are  lined 
by  an  extremely  fenfible  and  contractile  mem- 
brane. They  furround  the  origin  of  the  aor- 
ta and  pulmonary  arteries,  when  diftended, 
and  are  feparated  from  each  other  by  the  fep- 
tum  auricularum. 

The  right  auricle  has  opening  into  it, 
at  its  upper  part,  the  vena  cava  fuperior,  at  its 
lower  part  the  vena  cava  inferior,  and  at  one 
fide  the  large  coronary  vein ; fo  that  its  office 
is  that  of  receiving  the  blood  from  every  part 
of  the  body.  Befides  thefe  openings , it  has 
one  much  larger,  communicating  with  the 
right  ventricle,  from  the  margin'  of  which 
there  hangs  into  the  right  ventricle,  connected 
with  the -chordae  tendinese,  a valve,  called, from 
its  fhape,  xho*tricufpid , or  triglochine  valves. 

The  left  auricle  is  compofed  of  the 
fame  materials  as  the  right ; it  has  opening  in- 
to it  the  four  pulmonary  veins ; fo  that  the 
blood  of  the  pulmonary  artery  paffies  through 
the  lungs  into  the  left  auricle.  Befides  the 
openings  of  the  four  pulmonary  veins,  the  left 
auricle  has  a communication  with  the  left  ven- 
tricle, and  from  the  margin  of  this  opening 
there  hangs  into  the  left  ventricle  a valve, 
which,  from  its  refemblance  to  a bifhop’s  mi- 
tre, is  termed  the  mitral  -valve.  It  is  alfo  con- 
nected to  the  chordee  tendinese  of  the  ventricle. 

The  ventricles  are  fituated  in  the  fubfiance 
of  the  heart,  and  are  divided  from  each  other 
by  a thick  mufcular  feptum,  called  fepturn  cor- 
dis, The  parietes  of  the  ventricles  are  very 

thick* 


( *7$  ) 

thick,  and  compofed  of  ftrong  mufcular  fibres. 
In  the  ventricles  are  a number  of  flefhy  cords, 
running  in  various  directions  ; thefe  are  called 
came  # column# , and  many  of  them  are  con- 
nected with  the  valves  of  the  auricular  open- 
ings by  tendinous  cords,  termed  chord#  tendi- 
7iea.  The  ventricles  are  lined  by  a fimilar 
membrane  to  that  which  lines  the  auricLes. 

The  right  ventricle  has  a communi- 
cation with  the  right  auricle,  as  before  men- 
tioned, in  order  to  receive  its  blood  ; it  has 
alfo  an  opening  into  the  pulmonary  artery,, 
which  arifes  from  it,  and'  through  which  or- 
gan the  blood  is  expelled  from,  the  ventricle. 
At  the  origin  of  the  artery  three  large  valves 
are  placed,  called,  from  their  fhape,  femilunarr 
valves ; 

The  left  ventricle  is  much  ftronger 
than  the  right : befdes  the  opening  for  the  en- 
trance of  the  blood  from  the  left  auricle,  it  has 
alfo  an  Opening  through  which  it  tranfmits  its 
blood,  and  this  is  into, the  aorta,  which  arifes 
from  it,  and  has,  like  the  pulmonary  artery,, 
three femilunar  valves  placed  at  is  origin. 

Vessels  are  common  and  proper  ; the  coin - 
iron  are  the  aorta,  pulmonary  artery  and  veins, 
and  the  vena  cavas  ; the  proper  are  the  coro- 
nary arteries  and  veins.  Nerves,  branches 
of  the  eighth  pair  and  great  intercoftal.  Use, 
It  is  the  primary  organ  of  the  motion  of  the 
bleed. 


CIRCULATION 


C r77  ) 


CIRCULATION  OF  THE  BLOODr 

The  blood  is  continually  in  motion,  palling' 
from  the  auricles  of  the  heart  into  the  ven- 
tricles ; from  the  ventricles  into  all  the  arte- 
ries of  the  body,  and  from  the  arteries  into 
the  veins,  which  return  it  again  to  the  au- 
ricles. The  blood  is  brought  from  every  part 
' of  the  body  to  the  heart  by  the  two  venae  ca- 
vae  (the  fuperior  bringing  it  from  the  head, 
upper  extremities,  and  thorax,  and  the  inferi- 
or from  the  abdomen  and  inferior  extremities,) 
which  terminate  in  the  right  auricle.  The 
right  auricle,  when  diflended  with  blood,  con- 
tracts, and  empties  itfelf  into  the  right  ven- 
tricle ; the  right  ventricle  then  contracts,  and 
propels  the  blood  into  the  pulmonary  artery, 
the  opening  between  the  ventricle  and  auricle 
being  fhut  by  the  tricufpid  valves.  The  pul- 
monary artery  conveys  the  blood  by  its  nu- 
merous ramifications  into  the  fmall  branches 
of  the  air-cells  of  the  lungs,  where  it  under- 
goes a change,  and  paffes  into’  the  veins  which 
bring  it  by  four  trunks  into  the  left  auricle  of 
the  heart.  It  is  prevented  returning  from  the 
pulmonary  artery  into  the  right  ventricle,  by 
the  three  femiiunar  valves  which  are  placed  at 
its  origin.  The  blood  having  thus  palled 
through  the  lungs,  and  become  of  a florid 
colour,  diftends  the  left  auricle,  which  is  then 
ftimulated  to  contract,  and  pours  the  blood 


( *7®  ) 

into  the  left  ventricle.  The  left  ventricle 
next ‘contracts,  and  propels  the  blood  through 
the  aorta,  to  be  conveyed  by  its  branches  to 
every  part  of  the  body.  The  mitral  valves, 
which  are  placed  at  the  auricular  opening  in- 
to the  left  ventricle,  prevent  the  blood  from 
returning,  when  the  ventricle  contracts,  into 
the  auricle  : and  left  the  blood  fhould  be 
prevented  by  any  impediment  palling  immedi- 
ately along  the  aorta,  the  three  femilunar 
valves  placed  at  its  origin  prevent  its  regurgi- 
tating into  the  ventricle.  From  the  numerous 
arteries  of  the  aorta  the  blood  is  conveyed  in- 
to the  veins,  where  it  lofes  its  florid  colour, 
and  becomes  darker,  to  be  returned,  in  the 
way  above  mentioned,  to  the  right  auricle. 
Thus  the  blood  of  the  right  auricle  and  ven- 
tricle, and  of  the  pulmonary  arteries,  is 
cf  a dark  colour  ; and  that  of  the  pulmonary 
veins,  left  auricle,  ventricle,  and-  all  the  arte- 
ries (except  the  pulmonary,)  of  a florid  hue. 

From  what  has  been  faid,  it  is  evident  that 
the  adtion  of  the  heart  confifts  in  the  alternate 
contraction  and  dilatation  of  its  auricles  and 
ventricles. 

The  dilatation  cf  the  heart  is  termed  dlaf- 
iole , and'  the  contraction  fyjlole . The  excef- 
iive  fenfi'bility  of  the  membrane  which  lines 
the  auricles  and  ventricles  difpofes  then!  to 
contraction,  which  is  effected  by  the  irritation 
of  the  ftimulus  of  the  blood,  and  by  that  of 
the  diftenfion  of  its  cavities. 


OF 


( 'i79  ) 


OF  THE  ABDOMEN. 

A cavity  fituated  between  the  thorax  and 
pelvis.  Divided  into  feveral  regions,  as  has 
already  been  mentioned.  The  external 
Parts  are  the  common  integuments,  five  pair 
of  abdominal  mufcles,  and  the  peritoneum. 
The  internal  parts,  or  viscera.,  are  the 
omentum,  ftomach,  fmall  and  large  inteflines, 
liver,  gall-bladder,  mefentery,  lacteal  veffels, 
fpleen,  pancreas,  kidneys,  fupra-renal  glands, 
aorta  defcendens,  and  vena  cava  afcendens. 

peritoneum. 

A membrane  lining  the  internal  furface 
of  the  abdomen,  and  covering  all  its  vifcera. 
Connected,  by  means  of  cellular  membrane, 
with  the  diaphragm,  abdominal  mufcles,  ver- 
tebrae of  the  loins,  bones  of  the  pelvis,  urina- 
ry bladder,  uterus,  inteftinum  rectum,  and  all 
the  vifcera  of  the  abdomen.  Vessels  of  the 
peritoneum,  from  the  adjoining  parts.  Use, 
to  contain  and  flrengthen  the  abdominal  vif- 
cera, and  to  exhale  a vapour  to  lubricate 
them, 

omentum,  or  epiploon. 

An  aclipofe  membrane,  a production  of  the 
peritoneum,  attached  to  the  ftomach,  and  ly- 
ing on  the  anterior  furface  of  the  inteflines. 

Division, 


( 180  ) 

Division,  into  large  and  j mall  omentum. 
The  former  hangs  pendulous  from  the  great 
curvature  of  the  ftomach.  The  fmall  omen- 
tum fills  up  the  fpace  between  the  fmall  cur- 
vature of  the  fiomach,  liver,  &c.  Immediate- 
ly behind  the  biliary  dudts  there  is  an  opening 
which  will  admit  the  finger,  called  the  fora- 
men of  Window.  Arteries,  branches  of 
the  cceliac.  Veins,  empty  themfelves  into 
the  vena  portae.  Use,  to  lubricate  the  intef- 
tines  j keep  them  warm  ; and  to  preferve  them 
from  concretion. 

STOMACH. 

A membranous  receptacle,  which  receives 
the  ingefta  from  the  oefophagus.  Situated 
in  the  epigaftric  region.  Divided,  when  emp- 
ty, into  an  anterior  and  a pofterior  furface  ; 
a great  and  little  curvature  ; the  cardia,  or  fu- 
perior  opening  ; and  the  pylorus,  or  inferior 
opening.  Connexion,  with  the  oefophagus, 
duodenum,  omentum,  and  pancreas.  Com- 
posed of  three  membranes,  or  coats,’  viz.  a 
common,  mufcular,  and  villous  coat.  Ar- 
teries, branches  of  the  cceliac — the  corona- 
ria,  which  goes  to  the  fmall  curvature — the 
gaftrica  finiflra,  which  is  diftributed  to  the 
great  and  arifes  from  the  fplenic  artery, — gaf- 
trica dextra,  which  paffes  to  the  great  curva- 
ture, and  the  pylorica,  fupplying  the  pylorus  ; 
all  of  which  unite  with  each  other,  and  form 
a net-work  of  blood-veflals.  Gastric  veins 
empty  themfelves  into  the  vena  ports,  cor  ref- 

ponding 


C 181  ) 

ponding  with  the  trunks  of  the  arteries. 
Nerves,  branches  of  the  par  vagum.  Ab- 
sorbents, thofe  of  the  fmall  curvature  ter- 
minate in  thoracic  du£t,  where  the  coeliac  ar- 
tery is  given  off,  and  thofe  palling  along  the 
great  curvature  join  with  the  abforbents  of  the 
fpleen.  Glands,  muciparous,  under  the  in- 
ternal tunic.  Use,  to  receive  the  ingefla  from 
the  cefophagus,  and  to  retain,  mix,  digeft,  and 
expel  it  into  the  duodenum. 

DIGESTION,  OR  CHYMIFIC ATION. 

Digeflion,  or  chymification,  is  the  change 
which  food  undergoes  in  the  Itomach,  by 
which  it  is  converted  into  chyme. 

The  circumftances  neceifary  to  effect  a 
healthy  digeftion  of  the  food  are — 

1.  A certain  degree  of  heat  of  the  flomach, 

2.  A free  mixture  of  faliva  with  the  food 
in  the  mouth. 

3.  A certain  quantity  of  healthy  gaftric 
juice. 

4.  The  natural  periftakic  motion  of  the 
flomach. 

5.  The  preffure  of  the  contraction  and  re- 
laxation of  the  abdominal  mufcles  and  dia- 
phragm. From  thefe  circurn  fiances,  the  par- 
ticles of  the  food  are  foftened,  dilfolved,  dilut- 
ed, and  intimately  mixed  into  a foft  pap,  call- 
ed chyme,  which  paffes  through  the  pylorus 
of  the  flomach  into  the  duodenum. 

Q,  INTESTINES# 

' Jk 


( 1 84  ) 


INTESTINES. 

The  membranous  tube,  Tix  times  longer 
than  the  body,  in  the  cavity  of  the  abdomen, 
varioufly  contorted  from  the  pylorus  of  the 
flomach  to  the  anus,  is  fo  called.  Division, 
into  fmall  and  large.  The  small  are  the 
duodenum , which  begins  at  the  pylorus  of  the 
flomach,  and  is  reflected  over  the  fpine  under 
the  peritoneum.  It  is  about  twelVe  -fingers- 
breadth  in  length,  and  has  an  oblique  perfora- 
tion near  it*  middle,  which  is  the  common 
opening  to  the  pancreatic  dud  and  dudus 
communis  choledochus.  The  jejunum  and 
ileum  com  pole  the  remainder  .of  the  fmall  in- 
teflines.  They  always  hang  from  the  mefen- 
tery  into  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis.  There  is 
no  alteration  of  hr u dure  in  any  part  of  the 
fmall  inteflines,  the  termination  of  the  one  and 
beginning  of  the  .other  is  imaginary.  The  je- 
junum conilitutes  the  firfl  naif  from  the  duo- 
denum, the  other  half  is  ileum.  The  fmall 
inteflines  have  internally  a number  of  anular 
folds,  which  augment  the  furface  for  the  fitua- 
tion  of  the  ladeal  and  other,  veifels ; thefe  are 
called  valvules  conniventes.  They  are.  peculiar 
to  the  fmall  inteflines.  The  large  intellines 
are  divided  into  the  caecum,  colon,  and  rec- 
tum. The  cacum  lies  upon  the  right  hip  over 
the  iliacus  internus  mufcle,  to  which  it  is  at- 
tached by  cellular  membrane  : it  is  a large 
cul  defhc  : the  fmall  intefline  opens  obliquely 
jnto  it,  in  fuch  a manner  as  to  form  a valve  to 

• • imne 

v 


' C 1S3  ) 

impede  the  return  of  the  feces ; and  nearly 
oppofite  to  this  valve  there  arifes  from  the 
caecum  a fmall  vermiform  canal,  imperforated 
at  its  extremity,  called  the  appendicula  cad 
verfor'mis.  The  inteftine  is  now  called  colon; 
it  afcends  towards  the  liver,  and  is  called  the 
afcending  portion  of  the  colon , and  having  reach- 
ed the  liver,  forms  a tranfuere  arch  acrofs 
to  the  other  fide.  The  colon  then  defcends, 
forming  what  is  termed  its  figmoid  flexure  into 
the  pelvis,  where  the  gut  is  termed  the  rectum , 
which  terminates  in  the.  anus.  The  large  in- 
teftines  are  tabulated,  have  fometimes  little 
fat  portions  adhering  to  them  called  appendic- 
ula epiploica , and  alio  three  longitudinal  bands 
upon  their  external  furface.  Composed  of 
three  membranes,  or  coats,  one  common,  a 
fnufcular  one,  and  the  third  villous.  Con- 
nexion, with  the  mefentery,  kidnies,  os 
coccygis,  arid  urinary  bladder,  and  in  women 
with  the  vagina.  Arteries,  branches  of  the 
fuperior  and  inferior  mefenteric,  duodenal, 
and  internal  haemorrhoidal.  Veins,  run- into 
the  meferaic.  Their  nerves  are,  productions 
of  the  eighth  pair  and  intercoftals.  Lacteal 
vessels..  Thefe  arife  from  the  fmall  intef- 
tines,  and  run  into  the  mefenteric  glands. 
Glands,  muciparous,  under  the  villous  coat. 
Use,  to  receive  the  chyme,  and  retain  it  for 
a time  ; to  mix  it  with  the  enteric  juice  and 
bile  ; to  feparate  and  propel  the  chyle  into  the 
lafteal  velfels ; and  to  eliminate  the  feces. 

• C II VI. IFI CATION*. 


C 184  3 


CHYLIFICATION. 

This  is  the  change  of  the  chyme  in  the 
finall  inteftines  into  chyle.  The  chyme  in  the 
duodenum  is  mixed  with  the  pancreatic  juice, 
the  bile,  and  enteric  juice  ; from  which  mix- 
ture, effected  by  the  continual  periftaltic  mo- 
tion of  the  inteftines,  a milk-like  fluid  is  fepa- 
rated,  which  is  termed  chyle,  and  is  abforbed 
by  the  pendulous  opening  of  the  lacteals,  and 
conveyed  through  the  mefentery  into  the  tho- 
racic du£t,  to  be  fent  into  and  mixed  with  the 
blood,  to  form  new  blood.. 

Chylification  is  performed  quicker  than 
chymification,  and  both  are  efleCted  within 
three  hours. 

The  excrementious  particles  of  the  food, 
called  the  fseces,  are  propelled  into  the  cae- 
cum, through  the  colon,  and  where  they  ac- 
quire a peculiar  fmell,  into  the  reCtum,  to  be 
expelled. 

EXPULSION  OF  THE  FVECES. 

The  irritation  of  the  feces  in  the  reCtum 
induces  it  to  contract,  the  fphincter  relaxes, 
and  the  feces  are  protruded  through  the  ap- 
erture of  the  anus,  by  the  preflure  of  the  ab- 
dominal mufcles,  and  the  anus  clofed  again  by 
the  contraction  of  its  fphinCter  and  levator 
mufcles. 

MESENTERY. 

A membranous  duplicature,  formed  of  a 
production  of  the  peritoneum,  to  which  the 

inteftines 


C 185  ) 

inteftines  adhere.  Division,  into  mefentery, 
to  which  the  inteftines  adhere,  and  mefocolon, 
to  which  the  colon  adheres.  Connexion, 
with  the  lumbar  vertebrae.  Arteries,  infe- 
rior and  fuperior,  mefenteric,  branches  of  the 
aorta  defcendens.  Veins,  empty  themfelves 
into  the  vena  portae.  Nerves,  branches  of 
the  eighth  pair  and  intercoftals.  The  glands, 
which  are  lituated  in- the  mefentery,. are  called 
mefenteric  glands.  The  lafteals  proceed  to 
the  glands, and  from  them  to  the  thoracic  duel. 
Use,  to  ftrengthen  the  inteftines,  and  afford  a 
fituation  to  the  lacleal  veffels,  glands,  and 
nerves,  blood-velfels,  &c.  of  the  inteftines,. 

LIVER. 

The  largeft  of  the  abdominal  vifeera,  placed; 
in  the  right  hypochondriac  region,  and  fome- 
what  in  the  epigaftric.  Division,  into  three 
lobes ; the  great,. fmall,  and  a lefts  one,  called 
the  Spigelian.  Connexion,  with  the  dia- 
phragm, by  means  of  the  fufpenfory  and  other 
ligaments.  Substance,  vafcular.  The 
glands  which  compofe  the  fubftance  of  the- 
liver  are. called  acini  blliofi . The  excretory 
ducts  of  the  glands  are  termed  port  bili- 
ari : They  arife  from  the  acini  of  the  liver, 
form  larger  trunks,  called  ductus  hepatici , 
which  converge  together,  and  conftitute  a 
common  canal,  the  dudus  kepaticus , which 
unites  with  the  cyftic  dufl,  and  forms  the 
duff  us  communis  choledochus.  Use,  to  fe- 
crete  bile, 

Q^2  GALL-BLADDER 


C 186  ) 


GALL-BLADDER. 

An  oblong  membranous  receptacle,  fituated 
under  the  liver,  in  the  right  hypo chondri urn* 
Division,  into,  bottom,  body,  and  neck, 
which  terminates  in  the  du£tus  cyfticus.  The 
dudus  cyfticus  arifes  from  the  gall-bladder, 
proceeds  to  the  duodenum,  and  unites  with 
the  ductus  hepaticus,  to  form  the  ductus  com* 
munis  choledochns , which  perforates  the  duode- 
num, and  conveys  the  bile  into  the  inteftines. 
The  gall-bladder  is  composed  of  three  mem- 
branes, a common,  fibrous,  or  mufcular  and 
villous.  Arteries,  branches  of  the  hepatic. 
Veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  vena  portae. 
Absorbents,  very  numerous.  Nerves,  from 
the  eighth  pair  and  intercoftals,  Glands, 
muciparous.  Use,  to  retain  the  gall,  which 
regurgitates  from  the  hepatic  duft,  there  to 
become  thicker,  more  bitter,  and  acrid. 

spleen. 

A fpongy  vifcus,  fituated  in  the  left  hypo- 
chondrium,  near  the  fundus  of  the  flomach,. 
under  the  ribs.  Figure,  ovak  Connex- 
ion, with  the  omentum,  diaphragm,  pancreas, 
and  colon.  Arteries,  the  fplenic  artery  is  a 
branch  of  the  cceliac.  Veins,  empty  them- 
felves  into  the  vena  portae.  Absorbents, 
very  numerous.  Nerves,  from  the  par  va- 
gi, im  and  great  intcrcoftal.  Use,  unknown. 


PANCREAS, 


C 187  ) 


PANCREAS. 

A glandular  body,  of  a long  figure,  com- 
pared to  a dog’s  tongue,  fituated  in  the  epi- 
gallric  region,  under  the  ftomach.  Compos- 
ed of  innumerable  fmall  glands,  the  excreto- 
ry duds  of  which  unite  and  form  the  pancre- 
atic dud.  Its  external  membrane  is  from  the 
mefocolon.  Arteries,  from  the  neighbour- 
ing parts  and  fplenic  artery.  Veins,  evacu- 
ate themfelves  into  the  fplenic.  The  pancre- 
atic dud  perforates  the  duodenum  with  the 
dudus  communis  choledochus,  and  conveys 
its  fecretion  into  the  inteftines..  Use,  to  fe- 
crete  a humour  ftmilar  to  faliva,  and  carry  it 
into  the  duodenum. 

LACTEAL  VESSELS. 

The  abforbing  veftels  of  the  mefentery  are 
fo  termed,  becaufe  they  convey  the  chyle,  a 
milk-like  fluid,  from  the  inteftines  into  the 
thoracic  dud.  Origin,  from  the  furface  of 
the  duodenum,  jejunum,  and  ileum.  Ter- 
mination, in  the  thoracic  dud,  or  trunk  of 
the  abforbents,  which  runs  near  the  aorta  on 
the  fpine,  and  empties  its  contents  into  the 
jugular  vein.  As  they  run  through  the  mef- 
entery, they  pafs  through  a number  of  glands, 
in  which  the  chyle  is  altered,  and  then  pro- 
ceed to  their  trunk.  Use.  To  carry  the 
chyle  from  the  inteftines  into  the  blood.  See 
the  Phyfiology  of  Abforption  and  the  Abforbents ,, 
pages  124.  128, 


SIDNEYS,. 


( 1 88  ) 


KIDNEYS. 

Two  vifcera,  which  fecrete  the  urine.  Sit- 
uated behind  the  fac  of  the  peritoneum,  near 
the  bodies  of  the  fuperior  lumbar  vertebrae 
Substance,  of  three  kinds  ; cortical,  tubu- 
lar, and  papillous.  Integuments,  or  cov- 
erings, adipofe  membrane,  and  a membrana 
propria.  The  renal  arteries.;  or  emul- 
gents,  are  branches  of  the  aorta  defcendens. 
The  veins  empty  themfelves  into  the  cava  in- 
ferior. The  nerves  of  the  kidneys  are 
branches  of  the  eighth  pair,  and  intercoftal. 
The  excretory  ducts  of  the  kidneys  are  called 
the  ureters,  canals  which  convey  the.  urine 
from  the  kidneys  into  the  bladder.  Use,  to 
fecrete  urine... 

EXCRETION  OF  THE  URINE., 

The  urine  is  feparated  from  the  blood  by 
the  extremities  of  the  renal  arteries,  which 
open  in  the  fubftance  of  the  kidney  into  the. 
tubuli  uriniferi,. from  whence  it  is  . received  in-, 
to  the  pelvis  of  the  kidney,  and  palfes  along 
the  ureter  into  the  urinary  bladder  guttatim, 
where  it  ufually  remains  a few  hours,  in  con- 
fequence  of  the  fphincter  of  the  bladder  being 
contrafted.  It  is  prevented  returning  into, 
the  ureters  by  their  entrance  being  oblique 
. and  valvular.  The.  urine  having  remained  a . 
'few  hours  in  the  bladder,  excites  a defire  to 
void  it,  by  which  ftimulus  the  fphinfrer  be- 
comes 


C 189  ; 

comes  relaxed,  the  mufcular  flrudture  of  the 
bladder  contracts,  and  by  the  afliftance  of  the 
abdominal  mufcles  and  the  acceleratores 
urinae  the  urine  is  propelled  along  the  urethra. 

SUPRA-RENAL  GLANDS. 

Two  triangular  flat  bodies,  situated*  one 
above  each  kidney.  Use,  not  known. 


OF  THE  PELVIS. 

The  pelvis  is  a cavity  below  the  abdomen 
and  under  the  pubes,  containing  the  urinary 
bladder,  redtum,  and  organs  of  generation. 

URINARY  BLADDER. 

A membranous  fac  under  the  peritoneum, 
in  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis.  Situation,  in 
men,  between  the  pubes  and  rectum  ; in  wom- 
en, between  the  pubes  and  uterus.  Divis- 
ion, into  fundus,  body,  and  neck.  Compos- 
ed of  three  membranes,  like  the  inteftines. 
Arteries,  branches  of  the  hypogaftric  and 
haemorrhoidal.  Veins,  empty  themfelvesinto 
the  hypogaftric.  Nerves,  branches  from  the 
intercoftal  and  facral  nerves.  Glands,  mucip- 
arous. Use,  to  receive,  retain,  and  expel 
the  urine. 


THE 


( *9°  ) 


THE  MALE  ORGANS  OF  GENERATION. 

Thefe  are,  the  penis,  tefticles,  and  veftculae 
feminales. 

PENIS." 

Alfcv  called  membrum  virile,  or  yard,  vs 
that  cylindrical  part  which  hangs  under  the 
mons  V eneris, -before  the  fcrotum.  Division, 
into  root,  body,  and  head,  called  glans.  The 
hairy  prominence,  which  covers  the  pubes,  is 
called  v ions  Veneris.  Substance.  It  confifts  of 
common  integuments,  t'\yo  corpora  cavernofa  ; 
the  corpus  fpongiofum  urethrae  ; and  the  ure- 
thra. The  corpora  cavernofa,  which  form  the 
chief  bulk  of  the  penis,  are  compofed  of  a cel- 
lular and  very  elaftic  fubftance,  and  arife  by 
two  crura,  one  from  each  amending-  ramus  of 
the  ifehium.  The  corpus  fpongiofum  begins’ 
before  the  proftrate  gland,  and  furrounds  the 
urethra.  Atitsbeginning.it  forms  the  bul- 
bous part  of  the  urethra,-  and  then  proceeds 
forwards,  to  be  expanded  at  the  extremity  of 
the  penis  into  a very  vafcular  fubftance,  call- 
ed g/ans- penis,  which  is  naturally  covered  by 
a fold  of  the  Ikin,  called  the  prepuce . The 
urethra  is  a membranous  canal,  which  pro- 
ceeds from  t'he  bladder  through  the  corpus 
fpongiofum  urethrae  to  the  meatus  or  opening 
in  the  glans  penis.  It  is  endowed  with  a high 
degree  of  fenftbility  and  contractility.  The 

verumantanUm , 


< I9I  ) 

%'trumontanum,  or  gallimginis , is  a cuta- 

neous eminence  in  the  uretha,  before  the  neck 
of  the  bladder.  Glands,  muciparous  ; odo- 
riferous’; Gowper’s  glands  ; and  the  proftrate. 
See  Adenology.  The  penis  is  connected  with 
the  uretha,  pubes,  and  ifchium;  Arteries  are 
branches  of  the  hypogaftric  and  ifchiatic.  The 
dorsal  vein  of  the  penis,  called  vena  magna 
ipfius  penis , empties  itfeif  into  the  vena  hypo- 
gaflrica.  Absorbents,  run  under  the  conj- 
mon  integuments,  to  the  inguinal  glands. 
Nerves,  branches  of  the  facral  nerves  and 
ifchiatic.  Use,  for  erection,  coition,  effufion 
of  femen,  and  of  urine. 

TESTICLES. 

Two  oval  bodies  contained  in  the  cavity  of 
the  fcrotum.  The  epididymis  is  an  hard 
vafcular  fubflance,  formed  of  convoluted  vas 
deferens,  lying  on  the  tefticle.  Integuments 
of  the  tefticle  are,  the  fcrotum  ; tunica  albu- 
ginea, which  is  fmooth,  and  adheres  very  firm- 
ly to  the  body  of  the  tefticle  ; and  the  tunica 
vaginalis , which  defcends  with  the  fpermatic 
chord,  and  furrounds  the  tefticle,  as  the  peri- 
cardium does  the  heart.  Composed  of  white 
{lender  canals,  which  terminate  in  the  epididy- 
mis, and  form  into  one  great  canal,  the  vas 
deferens,  which  proceeds  from  the  tefticle  in- 
to the  abdomen,  over  the  os  pubis,  and  then 

defcend# 


C *92  ) 

defcends  into  the  pelvis,  to  be  inferted  into 
the  veficulae  feminales.  Spermatic  arte- 
ries, are  branches  of  the  aorta.  Spermatic 
veins,  empty  themfelves  into  the  vena  cava, 
and  left  vena  renalis.  Nerves,  branches  oi 
the  lumbar  and  great  intercoftal.  Absor. 
bents,  afcend  from  the  tefticle  through  the 
chord.  The  funiculus  fpermaticus , or  fper- 
matic  chord,  confifts  of  the  vas  deferens,  fper- 
matic artery  and  vein,  fpermatic  nerves,  ab- 
forbent  veflels,  and  tunica  vaginalis,  which 
the  cremafter  mufcle  furrounds.  Use,  to  fe- 
Crete  and  prepare  femen. 

SECRETION  AND  EXGRETION  OF  THE  SEMEN. 

The  femen  is  fecreted  by  minute  branches 
of  the  fpermatic  arteries,  that  depofit  it  into 
correfponding  feminal  veflels,  which  compofe 
the  great  eft  part  of  the  body  of  the  tefticle. 
The  femen  is  the  proper  ftimulus  to  thefe  vef- 
fels,  which  are  therefore  ftimulated  to  con- 
tract, and  by  a very  flow  motion  convey  it  in- 
to the  epididymis  and  vas  deferens,  by  which 
it  is  carried  through  the  inguinal  ring  into  the 
pelvis,  to  be  deposited  in  the  veficulae  femi- 
nales, where  it  excites  a defire  to  emit  it.  The 
cells  of  the  corpora  cavernofa  penis  are  dif- 
tended  with  blood  by  the  venereal  famulus ; 
hence  the  penis  fwells,  and  is  inclined  for  co- 
ition, during  which  action,  at  the  time  of  the 
czflrum  venereum,  the  veficulae  feminales  con- 

trad. 


( i93  ) 

traCt,  and  the  femen  is  thrown  with  an  immenfe 
force,  through  the  ejaculatory  ducts,  opening 
into  the  urethra,  where  it  is  mixed  with  the 
fecretion  from  the  proftrate  gland,  which  is 
expelled  at  the  fame  moment,  and  palfes  with 
it  along  the  urethra,  to  be  propelled  by  the 
contraction  of  the  ejaculatory  mufcles  into  the 
cavity  of  the  uterus* 

VESICULiE  SEMINALES. 

Two  membranous  receptacles,  which  re- 
ceive and  contain  the  femen  from  the  vafa  def- 
‘erentia.  -They  are  situated  on  the  back 
part  of  the  bladder,  above  its  neck.  Sub- 
stance, membranous,  white,  and  covered 
with  a fibrous  fubftance.  The  ejaculatory 
duels  are  fome  lines  long,  and  enter  the  cavity 
of  the  urethra  from  each  veficle,  by  a pecu- 
liar orifice  at  the  top  of  the  verumontanum. 
Vessels  and  nerves,  from  the  neighbouring 
parts.  Absorbent  vessels,  arife  from  the 
veficulas  feminales,  and  run  to  the  lymphatic 
glands  about  the  loins.  Use,  to  contain,  re- 
tain, infpifiate,  and  excern  the  femen  into  the 
urethra. 


THE  ORGANS  OF  GENERATION  IN 
WOMEN. 

The  parts  which  ferve  for  generation  in 
women  are  divided  into  external  and  internal. 

R The 


C 194  ) 

The  external  parts  are  the  mons  Veneris  ; 
the  labia  najora , two  cutaneous  folds,  fituat- 
ed  externally  ; the  labia  minora , or  nymphie , 
alfo  two  cutaneous  folds,  like  a cock’s-comb, 
placed  at  the  fides  of  the  vagina  ; the  clitoris , 
a fmall  glandiform  body,  like  a penis  in  mini- 
ature, placed  under  the  fuperior  commilfure 
of  the  nymphse  ; and  the  hymen , a membrane 
for  the  molt  part  femilunar,  fituated  at  the 
entrance  of  the  virgin  vagina.  The  inter- 
nal parts  are  the  vagina  $ uterus  ; Fallo- 
pian tubes  ; ovaria  j broad  and  round  liga- 
ments of  the  uterus  ; and  the  urethra. 

VAGINA. 

An  elaftic  canal  leading  from  the  external 
opening  of  the  vulva  to  the  uterus.  Com- 
posed of  three  membranes  ; the  outermoft 
is  cellular,  the  middle  mufcular,  and  the  in- 
ternal rugous.  Glands,  mucous  ; fituated 
under  the  internal  membrane.  Use  to  re- 
ceive the  penis,  and  for  the  palfage  of  the  child 
in  delivery. 

UTERUS,  OR  WOMB, 

A fpongy  receptable,  like  a flattened  pear  ; 
fituated  in  the  pelvis  between  the  urinary  blad- 
der and  rectum.  Division,  into  fundus, 
body,  neck,  and  orifice,  called  os  tinea.  Sub- 
stance of  the  uterus,  fpongy,  interwoven 
with  mufcular  fibres.  Arteries,  the  fper- 
matic  which  are  branches  of  the  aorta  ; and 
the  uterine,  which  are  from  the  hypogaitn,; 


( *95  ) 

and  haemorrhoidal.  Uterine  Veins  are 
without  valves,  and  empty  themfeives  into  the 
fpermatic,  hypogaftric,  and  external  haemor- 
rhoidal veins.  Absorbents  run  into  the  iliac 
glands.  Nerves  are  branches  of  the  facral 
and  ifchiatie.  Gtands,  mucous.  Use,  for 
conception,  nutrition  of  the  foetus,  parturi- 
tion, and  menftruation. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MENSTRUATION. 

By  a law  of  nature  women  menftruate  in 
this  climate  from  about  the  age  of  fifteen  to 
forty-five,  Menftruation  is  the.  efflux  (by 
fome  thought  to  be  a fecretion)  of  blood  from 
veffels  opening  into  the  cavity  or  the  uterus:. 
During  pregnancy,  the  catamenia , or  r.tcnjls, 
for  fo  the  difcharge  is  called,  lftop,  except  in 
fome  few  inftances,  where  it  is  fupplied  by  the 
veffels  of  the  vagina. 

The  nature  of  menftrual  blood,  if  women 
be  healthy,  differs  only  from  other  blood  in  its 
not  coagulating,  which  may  be  caufed  by  its 
flow  exit,  and  its  mixture  with  the  fecretions 
of  the  uterus  and  vagina.  It  differs,  however, 
in  quantity,  the  period  of  its  lirft  appearance, 
its  duration,  and  the  fymptoms  which  precede 
and  accompany  it,  according  to  the  age,  tem- 
perament, habit  of  body,  climate,  feafon  of 
the  year,  mode  of  living,  and  other  circum- 
ftances. 

Women  are  faid  to  be  moft  fufceptible  af 

the 


( i9*  )' 

addon  of  the  vivifying  principle  of  the  femen 
. during  the  period  of  menftruation. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  CONCEPTION. 

The  congrefs  between  man  and  woman  is 
called  coition,  which  is  fo  well  known  as  to 
require  no  defeription. 

During  coition  the  nymphs  and  clitoris  are 
tumid  with  blood,  and  the  fimbriae  of  the  Fal- 
lopian tubes,  by  a power  inherent  in  them, 
are  ftretched  out,  and  applied  over  the  furface 
of  an  ovum  in  the  ovarium. 

The  pleafure  which  women  experience  dur- 
ing coition  is  very  great,  and  a quantity  of  mu- 
cus is  fuddenly  emitted  from  the  glands  of  the 
vagina,  during  the  venereal  orgafm,  which  in 
former  times  was  erroneoufiy  fuppofed  to  be 
the  femen  of  the  female,  but  now  it  is  the  o- 
pinion  of  phyfiologifts  that  women  have  no 
lenten,  as  anatomy  cannot  detedt  any  organ  by 
which  it  can  be  fecreted. 

In  order  that  a woman  may  conceive , it  is  req- 
uisite that  fhe  (hall  have  menftruated  ; that 
the  ovum  in  the  ovarium  fhall  have  arrived 
at  a date  of  maturity,  and  that  the  fimbriae  of 
the  Fallopian  tube  fhall  be  ftretched  around 
the  mature  ovum,  fo  as  to  let  the  cavity  of  the 
Fallopian  tube  come  immediately  over  it.  In 
this  ftate,  the  male  femen  is  emitted  into  the 
uterus,  and  its  vivifying  part,  which  is  ex- 
tremely fubtile,  and  called  the  aura  '/minis , 


( *97  ) 

flies  through  the  cavity  of  the  uterus  along 
the  Fallopian  tube  to  the  mature  ovum,  to 
which  it  imparts  a principle  by  wh  ich  it  begins 
to  circulate  its  fluids  and  is  animated.  The 
ovum  being  thus  vivified,  enlarges  and  rup- 
tures the  flender  tunic  of  the  ovarium,  in 
which  it  was  enclofed.  At  the  time  of  its 
rupturing,  the  fimbriae  of  the  Fallopian  tube 
embrace  it,  and  it  is  rolled,  by  the  periftaltic 
motion  of  the  latter,  into  the  cavity  of  the  u- 
terus,  there  to  be  perfected,  and  at  the  expira- 
tion of  nine  months  to  be  fent  into  the  world,. 


OF  THE  GRAVID  UTERUS. 

The  parts  of  the  gravid  uterus  are,  the  u- 
terine  placenta,  the  umbilical  chord,  the  mem- 
branous ovum  of  the  foetus,  the  liquor  amnii, 
and  the  foetus. 

UTERINE  PLACENTA. 

A fpongy  mafs,  like  a cake,  generally  adher- 
ing to  the  fundus  of  the  gravid  uterus,  coin- 
pofed  of  a net-work  of  very  numerous  veffels. 
Substance,  cellular,  like  afponge  filled  with 
veffels.  Absorbents  have  been  lately  dis- 
covered. Nerves,  nine.  Use,  to  receive 
and  prepare  the  blood  from  the  uterus  for  the 
foetus,  and  give  off  branches  to  the  umbilical 
vein. 

R 2 


funiculus 


( r98  ) 


FUNICULUS  UBILICALIS,  OR  UMBILICAL 
CHORD. 

A chord  of  an  inteftinal  form,  which  runs 
from  the  navel  of  the  foetus  to  the  centre  of 
the  placenta.  Length,  moftly  about  half  a 
yard.  Composed  of  a cutaneous  vagina,  or 
fheath,a  cellular  fubflance,  one  umbilical  vein, 
and  two  umbilical  arteries.  Use.  The  um- 
bilical vein  of  the  foetus  conveys  the  blood 
from  the  placenta  to  the  foetus,  and  the  two 
umbilical  arteries  return  it  from  the  foetus  to 
the  placenta. 

MEMBRANOUS  OVUM  OF  THE  FOeTUS. 

The  foetus  is  inclofed  in  a membranous 
ovum  or  bag  within  the  cavity  of  the  uterus. 
The  ovum  confifts  of  three  membranes  ; an 
outer,  or  filamentous,  called  decidua  ; a mid- 
dle one,  called  the  chorion  ; and  an  inner  one, 
termed  the  amnion.  Use,  to  include  the  liq- 
uor amnii,  to  prevent  its  flowing  into  the 
uterus,  and  at  the  commencement  of  parturi- 
tion, to  affift  in  dilating  the  os  uteri. 

LIQUOR  AMNII,  OR  LIQUOR  OF  THE  AMNION, 

A lymphatic  liquid,  enclofed  in  the  cavity 
of  the  ovum  furrounding  the  foetus,  fecreted 
by  the  exhaling  arteries  of  the  membranes  of 
the  ovum.  Quantity,  about  the  time  of 
parturition,  two  or  three  pounds.  Proper- 
ty, 


C 199  3 

TY,  gelatinous,  like  turbid  ferum  of  milk. 
Use,  to  defend  the  foetus  from  the  preifure  of 
the  uterus,  to  give  it  nourilhment,  to  dilate  the 
orifice  of  the  uterus  in  labour,  and  to  lubri- 
cate the  vagina. 

FCeTUS. 

During  the  firft  month  of  pregnancy,  the 
ovum  is  about  the  fize  of  a pigeon’s  egg  ; the 
foetus  fwims  in  the  middle  of  the  liquor  amnii, 
and  reprefents  a little  cloud,  which  gradually 
enlarges,  and  its  parts  become  more  firm  and 
perfect.  The  parts  of  the  foetus  at  birth  dif- 
fer from  the  adult,  in  having  a foramen  ovale , 
a canalis  arteriofus , and  a canalis  venofus.  The 
lungs  are  black,  collapfed,  and  fink  in  water. 
The  liver  is  large.  AH  the  fmall  glands  are 
alfo  proportionately  large,  and  the  large  intef- 
tines  are  filled  with  meconium.  All  the  can- 
als and  velfels  peculiar  to  the  foetus  are  oblite- 
rated after  birth,  and  become  ligaments. 

PECULIARITIES  IN  THE  ARTERIAL  AND 
VENAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  FCfiTUS. 

The  foetus  has — -an  umbilical  vein , which 
goes  to  the  liver,  and  two  umbilical  arteries 
which  arife  from  the  internal  iliac-— a canalis 
venofus , or  vein,  which  proceeds  from  the 
finus  of  the  vena  portae  into  the  vena  cava  in- 
ferior— an  opening  in  the  feptum  of  the  auri- 
cles, called  the  foramen  ovale,  and  a canalis  ar- 
teriofus, or  artery  which  arifes  from  the  pul- 
monary 


( 200'  ) 

moftary  artery,  and  paffes  obliquely  into  the 
aorta.  After  birth  thefe  veffels  gradually  be- 
come impervious,  and  at  length  are  removed 
by  the  abforbents. 

CIRCULATION  OF  THE  BLOOD  IN  THE  FCeTUS. 

The  fcetus  receives  its  blood  from  the  moth- 
er through  the  umbilical  vein  of  the  funis, 
which  tranfmits  it  along  the  dudtus  venofus 
into  the  vena  cava,  to  be  carried  to  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart  ; from  the  right  auricle  it 
paffes  partly  through  the  foramen  ovale  into 
the  left  auricle,  and  partly  into  the  right  ven- 
tricle. From  the  right  ventricle  it  is  propell- 
ed into  the  pulmonary  artery,  which  fends  a 
very  fmall  proportion  through  the  lungs  and 
the  remainder  through  the  canalis  arteriofus 
into  the  aorta.  The  blood  is  returned  from 
the  foetus  by  the  two  umbilical  arteries,  along 
the  chord,  to  the  mother. 


HYGROLOGY, 


OR 

DOCTRINE  OF  THE  FLUIDS. 

The  ffuids  of  the  body  are  divided  into 
crude , as  the  chyle  ; fanguineous,  as  the  blood  ; 
lymphatic  as  the  lymph  of  the  lymphatic  vef- 
fels ; fecreted , or  thofe  feparated  from  the 
blood  3 and  excrement  Uious,  as  urine,  farces, 


C 201  3 

The  fecreted  fluids  are  fubdivided  into  lac- 
teal, as  the  juice  of  the  proftrate  gland  ; a- 
qeous , as  the  aqueous  humour  of  the  eye  ; mu- 
cous, as  the  mucus  of  the  noftrils ; albuminous , 
as  the  ferum  of  the  blood  ; oleous , as  the  oil  of 
the  adipofe  membrane  ; and  bilious , as  the  bile. 

Fluids  are  alfo  divided,  from  their  motion, 
into  circulatory , which  continually  circulate  in 
the  veflels  ; cormorant , which  circulate  with  a 
flow  motion,  as  the  femen,  oil  of  the  adipofe 
membrane  ; Jlagnant , which  remain  for  a cer- 
tain time  in  any  receptacle,  as  cyftic  bile,  Sc c. 


FLUIDS  COMMON  TO  THE  WHOLE 
BODY. 

THE  BLOOD. 

A red  fluid,  which  circulates  in  the  cavities 
of  the  heart,  arteries,  and  veins.  Colour, 
in  the  arteries,  of  a Jlorid  hue  ; in  the  veins 
darker , except  in  the  pulmonary  veins,  in 
which  it  is  of  a lighter  call.  Blood  expofed 
to  the  atmofphere  fpontaneoufly  feparates  by 
degrees  into  two  parts,  viz.  the  ferum  a yel- 
low and  fomewhat  greeniih  fluid  ; and  a cake , 
called  alfo  the  cruor , or  craffamentum , which 
refembles  a red  mafs  fwimming  like  an  ifland 
in  the  ferum.  Use,  to  flimulate  the  cavities 
of  the  heart  and  veflels  to  contraction  ; to  gen- 

erate 


( 203  ) 

fcrate  the  heat  of  the  body,  and  propagate  it 
to  every  part ; to  nourifh  every  part ; and  to 
fupply  all  the  fecretions,  they  being  all  fepa- 
rated  from  the  blood. 

The  lymph  of  the  lymphatic  vessels. 

A taftelefs  cryftalline  liquid,  contained  in 
the  lymphatic  veflels.  Absorbed  from  the 
furface  ; tela  cellulofa  ; vifeera  ; and  cavities 
of  the  vifeera  of  the  whole  body  j and  con- 
veyed into  the  thoracic  dud.  Use,  to  re- 
turn the  fuperfluous  nutritious  fluid,  the  va- 
pours of  cavities,  and  fubftances  applied  to 
the  ikin,  to  the  thoracic  dud. 

THE  VAPOUR  OF  THE  SHEATHS  OF  THE 
NERVES. 

The  aqueous  vapour  contained  in  the  vag* 
inae  and  between  the  fibrils  of  the  nerves.  Se- 
cretory organ,  the  arteries  of  the  fheath. 
Use,  to  moiften  the  nervous  fibrils. 


FLUIDS  PROPER  TO  EACH  PART. 

IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  CRANIUM. 

The  vapour  in  the  ventricles  cf 
the  brain.  A thin  vapour  contained  in  the 
cavity  of  the  ventricles  of  the  brain,  and  se- 
creted by  the  exhaling  arteries  of  the  cho- 
roid plexus.  Use,  to  prevent  the  concre- 


C 203  ) 

don  of  the  ventricles,  and  keep  the  medulla 
moifl. 

IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  NOSTRILS. 

The  mucus  of  the  nostrils.  The  mu- 
cus secreted  by  the  muciparous  glands  of 
the  pituitary  membrane,  lining  the  feptum  and 
conchas  of  the  noftrils.  Use,  to  preferve  the 
nervous  papillae  of  the  olfa&ory  nerves  moift, 
and  to  moderate  exceflive  fenfibility. 

IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  MOUTH. 

The  saliva.  A fluid  fecreted  by  the  fal- 
ivary  glands  into  the  mouth.  The  secre- 
tory organ  is  compofed  of  the  parotid  ; 
fub-maxillary  ; and  fub-lingual  glands.  Use, 
to  augment  the  tafle  of  the  food  ; to  mix 
with,  diffolve,  and  refolve  the  food  into  its 
principles  ; and  to  moderate  third. 

IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  FAUCES. 

The  mucus  of  the  fauces.  A mucus 
fecreted  by  the  muciparous  glands  of  the  ton- 
fils,  pharynx,  &c,  Use,  to  lubricate  the  fau- 
ces. 

IN  THE  EYES. 

The  aqueous  humour  of  the  eye.  The 
very  limpid  water  which  fills  the  anterior  and 
poiterior  chambers  of  the  eye.  Secretory 
organ 5 the  floating  veffels  of  the  corpus  cili- 
are,  and  exhaling  veffels  of  the  iris.  Use,  to 
did  end  the  cornea  retain  the  cryftalline  lens 

and 


( 204  ) 

and  vitreous  humour  in  their  places  ; and  to 
tranfmit  the  focus  of  the  rays  of  light  to  the 
cryftalline  lens. 

The  crystalline  lens.  A lentiform, 
pellucid,  cellular  body,  diftended  by  a very 
limpid  aqueous  fluid,  enclofed  in  a membra- 
nous capfule,  and  fituated  in  a deprellion  in 
the  anterior  furface  of  the  vitreous  humour. 
Use,  to  tranfmit  and  refradt  the  focus  of  the 
rays  of  light  to  the  vitreous  humour. 

The  vitreous  humour.  The  pellucid 
vitriform  body,  which  fills  the  whole  bulb  of 
the  eye  behind  the  cryftalline  lens.  Compos- 
ed of  fmall  cells  diftended  with  a limpid  wa- 
ter. Use,  to  expand  the  bulb,  and  tranfmit 
and  moderately  augment  the  focus  of  the 
rays  of  light  from  the  cryftalline  lens  to  the 
retina. 

The  water  in  the  capsule  of  the 
CRYSTALLINE  LENS.  SECRETED  by  the  pel- 
lucid  branches  of  the  artery  of  the  cryftalline 
lens.  Use,  to  prevent  the  concretion  of  the 
cryftalline  lens  with  its  capfule. 

The  pigment  of  the  iris.  The  colour- 
ed mucus,  w'hich  covers  the  anterior  and  pof- 
terior  furface  of  the  iris.  Use,  to  refledt  the 
rays  of  light. 

The  pigment  of  the  choroid  mem- 
brane. The  black  or  brownifh  mucus,  which 
covers  the  anterior  furface  of  the  choroid 
membrane,  and  the  interior  of  the  corpus  cili- 
are. 

The 


( 20  5 ) 

The  tears.  A limpid  fluid  fecreted  by 
the  lachrymal  gland,  and  flowing  on  the  fur- 
face  of  the  eye.  Use,  to  moiften  the  furface 
of  the  eye  and  eyelids. 

The  juice  of  Meibomius’s  glands. 
The  unctuous  humour  fecreted  by  the  febace- 
ous  glands  of  Meibomius,  and  lubricating  the 
tarfi  of  the  eyelids.  Use,  to  lubricate  the 
tarfi  of  the  eyelids,  and  -involve  the  faline  ac- 
ridity of  the  tears. 

IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  -EARS. 

The  cerumen,  or  wax  of  the  ears. 
The  bitter  ceraceous  fluid  fecreted  by  the  ce- 
ruminous glands  of  the  meatus  auditorius  ex- 
ternus.  Use,  to  lubricate  the  fenfible  mem- 
brane of  that  canal,  and  to  prevent  infers 
from  entering. 

The  water  of  the  labyrinth.  An  in- 
fipid  water  contained  in  the  cavity  of  the  tym- 
panum. Use,  to  preferve  the  nervous  fib- 
rils of  the  auditory  nerve  feft  and  moift,  and 
to  moderate  -the  tremors  of  founds. 

IN  THE  NECK. 

The  juice  of  the  thyroid  gland.  Of 
a yellowifh  white  colour,  efpecially  in  infants. 
Use,  not  known. 

The  mucus  o'e  The  ccsophagus.  Secret- 
ed  by  the  muciparous  glands,  fxtuated  in  the 
cellular  membrane.  Use,  to  lubricate  the 
cavity  of  the  cefophagus,  and  prevent  the  con- 
cretion of  its  fides. 

IN 


>s 


( 2o6  ) 


IN  THE  CAVITY  OF  THE  THORAX. 

'The  mucus  lining  the  internal  furface  of 
die  trachea , bronchia , and  veficula  pul  monales. 
Secretory  organ,  the  muciparous  glands 
fituated  under  the  internal  membrane  of  thofe 
parts.  Use,  to  prevent  the  furface  of  the 
trachea,  bronchia,  and  veficulse  pulmonales 
from  becoming  dry  by  the  continual  palling 
of  the  air. 

The  vapour  in  the  cavity  of  the 
thorax.  A vapour  which  exhales  from  the 
exhaling  veflels  of  the  pleura  of  the  lungs  and 
ribs,  into  the  cavity  of  the  thorax.  Use,  to 
.preferve  the  pleura  foft,  mo, ill,  and  flexile  ; 
and  to  defend  and  prevent  it  from  the  fri&ion 
of,  and  concretion  with,  the  lungs. 

, The  vapour  or  liquor  pericardii. 
Secreted  by  the  arterious  exhaling  vefleln 
which  open  upon  the  external  furface  of  the 
heart  and  internal  of  the  pericardium.  Use, 
to  prevent  the  concretion  of  the  heart  with' 
the  pleura  ; to  diminifh  the  friftion ; and  pre- 
ferve the  parts  foft. 

The  juice  of  the  thymus  gland.  A 
milky  juice  fecreted  by  the  arteries  opening 
into  the  cells  of  this  gland.  Use,  not  known= 

IN  THE  BREASTS. 

The  milk  of  the  breasts.  A white, 
Jwcxufh  fluid,  fecreted  by  the  glandular  fab- 
ric 


( 207  ) 

fic  of  the  breafts  of  women.  Use,  to  be  arf 
alhiient  to  new-born  children. 

IN  THE  ABDOMEN.’ 

The  gastric  juice.  A limpid  colourlefs 
fluid,  fecreted  by  the  exhaling  veffels  of  the 
very  numerous  arteries,  which  bedew  every 
part  of  the  ftomach.  Use,  to  digeft  the  food. 

The  pancreatic  juice.-  The  limpid 
juice  fecreted  by  this  gland,  and  conveyed 
through  its  excretory  du£t  into  the  duode- 
num. Use,  to  aflift  in-  the  formation  of  chyle. 

Bile.  A yellowiih-green  bitter  juice,  fe- 
creted by  the  glandular  fubftance  of  the  liver, 
and  conveyed  by  the  biliary  du<Ss,  in  part,  in- 
to the  duodenum,  and  in  part  into  the  gall- 
bladder ::  hence  cyftic  and  hepatic  byle.  Use, 
to  extricate  the  chyle  from  the  digefted  mafs 
cf  food  ; to  ftimulate  the  inteftines  ; and  to 
prevent  the  abundance  of  mucus  and  acidity 
in  the  primge  vise.- 

Chyle.  A white  fluid,  feparated  from  the 
food  in  the  primse  vise;  and  obferved  forne 
hours  after  eating  in  the  lafteal  veflels  of  the 
mefentery,  and  in  the  thoracic  duft.  Use, 
to  form  the  blood. 

The  enteric  juice.  A limpid  liquor, 
fecreted  by  the  exhaling  arteries  in  the  whole 
courfe  of  the  fmall  and  large  inteftines.  Use,  . 
to  aflift  in  digeftion  ; and  to  cleanfe  and  moif- 
ten  the  inteftines. 

The 


C so  8 ) 

The  mucus  of  the  prim  hi  vi  je.  Secret- 
ed by  the  muciparous  glands  fituated  under 
the  villous  coat  of  the  primae  vise.  Use,  to 
lubricate  that  canal. 

The  vapour  or  fluid  in  the  cavity 
of  the  abdomen.  An  aqueous  vapour,  fe- 
cerned  by  tire  exhaling  arteries  of  the  perito- 
neum. Use,  to  preferve  moilt  and  prevent 
the  concretion  of  the  abdominal  vifcera. 

Urine,  A faline  liquid,  of  a citrine  colour, 
ferreted  in  the  kidneys,  and  dropping  down 
from  them  guttatim  through  the  ureters  into 
the  cavity  of  the  urinary  bladder.  Use,  to  lib- 
erate the  body  from  the  fuperfluous  wa- 
' ter,  &c.. 

The  mucus  of  the  bladder.  Secreted 
by  the  muciparous  glands  fituated  under  the 
inner  moil  membrahe.  Use,  to  lubricate  and 
defend  the  internal  and  very  fenfible  furface 
of  the  urinary  bladder. 

IN  THE  PARTS  OF  GENERATION  IN  MEN. 

The  mucus  of  the  urethra.  Secreted 
by  the  muciparous  glands  fituated  under  the 
internal  membrane.  Use,  to  lubricate  and 
defend  the  very  fenfible  furface  of  the  urethra 
againft  the  acridity  of  the  urine. 

The  smegma  of  the  glans  penis.  An 
un&uous  humour,  fecreted  by  the  febaceous 
follicles  on  the  furface  of  the  glans  and  pre- 
puce 


C 209  ) 

puce.  Use,  to  lubricate  and  defend  the  fen- 
fibie  furface  of  the  glans,  and  prevent  its  con- 
cretion  with  the  prepuce. 

The  vapour  of  the  tunica  vaginalis 
testis.  The  aqueous- vapour, which  exhales 
from  the  arteries  into  the  cavity  of  the  tunica 
vaginalis  teflis.  U se,  to  prevent  the  concre- 
tion of  the  teftes  with  .the  tunica  vaginalis,  and 
prefer ve  them  moilL- 

The  liquor  of  the  pp.ostate  gland. 
A milky  juice,  feparated  by  the  arteries  ef  the 
proftate  gland,  andfent  through  its  du£ts,yk3> 
coitu,  into  the  urethra  with  the  femen.  Use, 
to  ferve  as  a vehicle  to  the  femen.  ■ 

The  semen.  The  prolific  liquor  fecreted 
in  the  teftes,  and  carried  through  the  epididy- 
mis and  vas  deferens  into  the  veficulas  femina- 
les.  Use,  to  be  emitted,  fub  coitu,  into  the 
female  vagina,  and  there,  by  its  aura,  to  pene- 
trate to,  and  impregnate,  the  ovulum  in  the 
female  ovarium, 

2N  THE  PARTS  OF  GENERATION  IN  WOMEN. 

The  smegna  of  the  labia  and  vulva. 
The  unftuous  juice  fecreted  by  the  febaceous 
glands,  and  covering  the  internal  furface  cf  the 
labia  and  nymphas.  Use,  to  lubricate  their 
fenfible  furface,  and  prevent  any  irritation /o/2 
njiclum. 

The  mucus  of  the  vagina.  Secreted 
by  the  muciparous  glands  under  the  internal 
membrane.  Use,  to  lubricate  the  vagina,  left 
S 2 ^ 


( 210  ) 

it  be  pained  by  {viQiion,fub  coitu,  and  to  pre- 
vent the  concretion  of  its  tides. 

The  liquor  6f  the  cavity  of  the  ute- 
rus. Secreted  into  it  by  the  exhaling  arteri- 
ous  veffels.  Consistence,  in  the  virgin  ute- 
rus, ferous  and  turbid  ; in  the  gravid,  milky. 
Use,  to  moiflen  the  cavity,  and  prevent  its 
concretion. 

in  the  articulations. 

The  synovia.  An  un&uous  fluid,  fecret- 
ea  by  the  internal  membrane  of  the  capfular 
ligaments  furrounding  the  articulations  of  the 
bones.  Use,  to  lubricate  the  cartilaginous, 
furfaces  of  the  articulatory  bones,  and  facili- 
tate their  motions, 

The  juice  of  the  bursae  mucosae.  An 
unfituous  and  fomewhat  mucilaginous  juice,, 
fecreled  by  the  veffels  of  the  internal  mem- 
brane of  the  burfte  mucofte.  Use,  to  fabric 
cate  the  tendons  for  motion,. 

IN  THE  BONES'* 

The  marrow  of  bones.  The  oily  fub- 
/tance  fecreted  by  the  arteries  of  the  internal 
periofteum,  and  contained  in  the  medullary 
cavities  of  the  long  bones,  and  fpongy  fub- 
flance  of  others. 

FLUIDS  OF  THE  COMMON  INTEGUMENTS. 

The  mucus  of  Malpighi,  or  rete  mu* 
~ ->sum.  The  mucus  fituated  between  the 

epidermis 


( 211  ) 

epidermis  and  cutis  of  the  whole  body,  and 
fecreted  by  the  arterious  veflels  of  the  ikin. 
Use,  to  conglutinate  the  epidermis  to  the 
cutis  ; to  moderate  the  fenfe  of  touch ; to 
moiften  the  nervous  cutaneous  papillse  ; and- 
give  the  external  colour  to  the  body  ; hence  it 
is  white  in  Europeans,  black  in  Ethiopians, &c. 
The  oil  of  the  adipose  membrane.  Se- 
creted by  the  arteries  of  the  cellular  mem- 
brane. Use,  to  facilitate  mufcular  motion. 

Sweat.  The  aqueous  perfpirable  matter 
excreted  through  the  exhaling  arteries  of  the 
(kin.  Use,  to  keep  the  ikin  moilL 


. 


M ■ : i';.  --v'-:'.  ft 

■ iv7/a 


A 


GLOSSARY, 


OR. 

EXPLANATION 

er 

ANATOMICAL  TERMS. 


A. 

J^VbDoMEN.  The  cavity  of  the  belly  ; from  aMo  to 
hide,  as  including  the  inteftines  and  ether  vifeera. 

Acetabulum.  The  cavity  which  receives  the  head  of  the 
thigh  hone  ; from  acetiim  vinegar  ; fo  called,  becaufe 
it  reprefents  the  acetabulum  or  faucer  of  the  ancients, 
in  which  vinegar  was  held  for  the  ufe  of  the  table. 

Acini.  The  glands  of  the  liver  ; from  acinus  a grape* 

Acromion.  A procefs  of  the  fcapula  ; from  ax^o?  ex- 
tremity, and  upoi  the  fhoulder. 

Adenology.  The  dottrine  of  the  glands  ; from  aow  a 
gland,  and  Aoyoj  a difeourfe. 

Amnion.  A membrane  that  furrounds  the  fetus , which 
is  fft  and  fiaggy  ,*  from  ccpno;  a lamb’s  {kin. 

Amphyarthrofis.  A fpecies  of  connexion  of  hones , which 
admits  of  an  olfeure  motion  ; from  both,  and 

an  articulation. 

Anallomolis.  The  communication  of  veffels  with  one 
another  ; from  wx  through,  and  ?opx  a mouth. 

Anatomy. 


( 214  ) 

Ailatomy.  The  dijfeftion  of  the  human  body  ; from  apx, 
and  refctw  to  diileft. 

Ancon.  The  elbow  ; from  ayxav,  from  uyuftpitt  to 
embrace,  uno  ns  osyr-nAou  mga  cna>  to  enov,  becanfe 
the  bones  meeting,  and  being  there  united,  are  fold- 
ed one  into  another. 

Anconeus.  A mvfcle ; fo  called,  from  xyzm  the  elbow. 

Anconoid.  Procefs  of  the  cubit  ; from  ctynuv  the  el- 
bow, and  abet-  ftiape. 

Angiology.  The  dottrine  of  the  vsjfels  j from  ctyyiiai  a 
velfel,  and  Xoyog  a difcourfe. 

Aorta.  Aogrvi  ; from  air,  and  mgeai  to  keep  : an 
artery , fo  called,  becaufe  the  ancients  fuppofed  that 
only  air  was  contained  in  it.  It  may  rather  be  de- 
rived from  to  convey,  as  ferving  to  convey  the 
blood  to  the  reft  of  the  body. 

Aponeurofis.  A tendinous  expanfion  ; from  xtto  from,  ■ 
and  vsi/gev  a nerve  ; from  an  erroneous  fuppofition 
of  the  ancients,  that  it  was  formed  by  an  expanfion 
of  a nerve.  • 

Apophyfis.  A procefs  of  a bone  ; from  anotp va  to  pro- 
ceed from.  A fynonym  of  procefs.  • 

Arachnoiides.  A net-like  membrane  ; from  Kexyj-,i  a 
fpider,  and  idog  likenefs.  ■ 

Artery.  From  air,  and  r/i^ea  to  keep  ; becaufe 
the  ancients  fuppofed,  - that  only  air  was  contained 
in  them.- 

Arthrodia.  A fpccies  of  connexion  of  bones  ; from1 
a.  pp  go  a to  articulate. 

Arytaenoides.  The  name  of  two  cartilages  of  the  la-  • 
rynx  ; ■ alfo  applied  to  fame  mufcles  of  the  larynx 
from  ccpyTxsva  a funnel,  and  idog  fhape. 

iWlfagalus.  A lone  of  the  tar fas  ; fo  called,  from  its- 
refemblance  to  a die,  ufed  in  ancient  games,  from 
a cockal  or  die. 

Atlas.  The  first  vertebra  of  the  ?ieck  ; fo  called,  be-, 
caufe  it  fuftains  the  head  ; from  the  fable  of  Atlas 

being 


( ^5  ) 

being  fuppofed  to  have  fupported  the  world  ; or 
from  ecT^xa  to  fuftain,  becaufe  it  fuftains  the  head. 

Azygos.  A tenji  applied  to  parti  without,  a fellow  ; 
from  <&  priv.  and  a yoke,  becaufe  it  has  nc 
fellow. 

B. 

Brachium.  The  arm  ; hence  os  Irachii,  Irachialis  ex- 
ternal, See.  from  fliort,  becaufe  in  a well- 

proportioned  man  it  is  fhorter  from  the  fhoulder  to 
the  hands  than  from  the  hip  to  the  feet. 

Bronchia.  The  ratnif cations  of  the  trachea,  or  wind- 
pipe j from  Petx>u  to  PourJ  becaufe  the  ancients  be- 
lieved, that  the  fluids  were  conveyed  into  the  itom- 
ach  by  the  bronchia. 

Burfa.  A bag ; from  p.vgrct : generally  applied  to  the 
burfle  mucofle. 

Bursalogy.  The  do&rine  of  the  burfa  muctfe  ; from 
(Sygcrc*  a bag,  and  Aoyos  a difeourfe. 

€. 

Calvaria.  The  top  of  the  cranium  ; from  cahus  bald. 

Cancelli.  Lattice  work  ; generally  applied  to  the  re- 
ticular fubftance  in  bones. 

Cardia.  The  fuperior  opening  of  the  fiomach  ; from 
Kccfna  the  heart,  be-caufe  it  is  fltuated  near  it. 

-Carotid.  The  name  of  fine  arteries  of  the  neck  and 
head ; from  x-agoa  to  caufe  to  fleep  ; for,  if  tied  with 
a ligature,  the  animal  becomes  comatofe,  or  has 
the  appearance  of  being  afleep. 

Carpus.  Karros  j the  wrjfi. 

Chorion.  The  external  membrane  of  the  fetus  in  utero. 
Xapo/x,  from  yyrfia.  to  efcape,  becaufe  it  always  ef- 
capes  from  the  uterus  with  the  foetus. 

Choroid  membrane  and  plexus  ; from  yc^iov  the  chori- 
on, and  eiJo*  likenefs  ; fo  called,  on  account  of  its 
many  blood  yeffels  refembling  the  chorion. 

Clavlcuia. 


( 21 6 ) 

Clavlcula.  The  clavicle , or  collar  lorn,  a diminutive 
of  clavis  a key  ; fo  called,  from  its  refemblance  to 
an  ancient  key. 

Clinoid.  ■ Four  procejjes  of  the  fella  turcica  of  the  eth - 
raid  hone  ; are  fo  called,  from  y.'Air/,  a bed,  and 
likenefs,  from  their  iuppofed  refemblance  to  a couch. 

Cl  i Lor  1 3.  A pari  of  the  female  pudenda,  enclofed  by  the 
'al;a  jfiajora  ; from  xAua  to  cnclofe  or  hide. 

Colon.  The  firft  of  the  large  intefin.es  ; from  xaAev, 
quad  koiMv,  from  y.mAo;  hollow  ; it  generally  being 
found  empty,  and  full  of  wind,  in  the  dead  body. 

Condyle.  An  eminence  in  any  of  the  joints  ; kovIvAcc, 
from  y.clho  an  ancient  cup,  fhaped  like  a joint. 

Coraco.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong 
to  mnfcles,  which  are  attached  to  the  coracoid 
procefs  of  the  fcapula  ; as  coraco-hyoideus,  &c. 

Coracoid  procefs  of  she  fcapula  ; from  a crow, 

and  n’hoi  refemblance,  it  being  fiiaped  like  the  beak 
of  a crow. 

Coronary.  From  corona  a crown.  The  veffels  of  the 
heart , fomach , &c.  are  fo  called,  becaufe  they  fur- 
round  the  parts  in  the  manner  of  a crown. 

Coronoid.  A procefs , fo  called,  from  xo^r.i  a crow, 
and  likenefs,  from  its  refemblance  to  a crow’s 
beak. 

Cotyloid  cavity  of  the  os  innominatum,  'which  receives 
the  head  of  the  thigh  hone  ; from  x<tjM  the  name  of 
an  old  meafure,  and  refemblance. 

•Cranium.  The  Jhull ; ygy.hov,  quad  xaganov,  from  xete#, 
the  head. 

•Crem after.  A mufcle,  fo  called  ; from  ygipaa  to  fuf- 
pend,  becaufe  it  fufpends  the  tefticle. 

Cribriform,  or  ethmoid  hone  of  the  full ; from  cnbrum 
a fieve,  it  being  perforated  like  a fieve. 

Cricoid.  Annular,  round,  like  a ring  ; from  a 

ring,  and  ei5«}  likenefs. 


Craw* 


( 2X7  ) 

Crura.  The  plural  of  crus , a leg  or  root  ; applied 
to  fome  parts  of  the  body,  from  their  refemblance 
to  a leg  or  root,  as  crura  cerebelli,  See. 

Cuboldes.  A bone  of  the  foot ; from  a cube,  and 
eih;  likenefs  ; becaufe  it  refembles  a cube. 

Cuneiform.  Some  bones  are  fo  called ; from  cuneus  a 
wedge,  and  forma  likenefs  ; being  fliaped  like  a 
wedge. 

D. 

Dartos.  A mufcle  of  the  ferotum  ; from  hga  to  ex- 
coriate. 

Deltoid.  A mufcle  refembling  the  Greek  letter  A ; from 
A,  and  iuios  refemblance. 

Diaphragm.  The  mufcle  which  feparates  the  thorax 
from  the  abdomen  ; from  ’bia<pgttP\ 01  to  divide. 

Diarthrofis.  A moveable  connexion  of  bones  ; from 
to  articulate. 

Digaftric  mufcle  ; from  twice,  and  a belly  j 
having  two  bellies. 

Diploe.  The  fpongy  fubftance  between  the  two  tables  of 
the  full  ; from  ^raXoa  to  double. 

Duodenum.  The  firfl  portion  of  the  fmall  intefine  z 
fo  called,  becaufe  the  ancients  fuppofed,  that  it  did 
not  exceed  the  breadth  of  twelve  fingers  ; from  dn~ 
odenus , confifiing  of  twelve. 

Dura  mater.  The  outennojl  membrane  of  the  brain  e 
called  dura , becaufe  it  is  much  harder  than  the 
other  membranes,  and  mater , from  the  ancients 
fuppofing  it  was  the  fource  of  all  the  other  mem- 
branes. 

E. 

Embryo.  The  child  in  the  womb  is  fo  called  before  the 
fifth  month,  after  which  it  is  termed  fetus  ; from 
to  bud  forth. 

Enarthiofis.  A n articulation  of  the  bones  ; from  ev  1E3 
and  a joint  or  articulation. 

T 


Enteric; 


( 2J«  ) 

Enteric.  Belonging  to  the  interims  ; from  surety  a* 
entrail  or  mteftine. 

Epidermis  The  fcarf  or  outcnnof  Jhin's  from  Bn  up. 
on,  and  the  fkin. 

Epididymis.  The  fmall  oblong  body,  'which  lies  above 
the  tcjlicles  ; from  ssn  upon,  and  a t chicle. 

Epigaftric.  The  fuperior  part  of-  the  abdomen  ; from 
S7s-t  upon,  and  y*c-/g  the  ftomach. 

Epiglottis.  A cartilage  of  the  larynx,  fo  called  ; from 
upon,  and  yXvd\i?  the  aperture  of  the  larynx, 
being  fituated  upon  the  glottis. 

Eplphyfis.  A portion  of  bone  groining  upon  /another 
bone,  but  feparated  from  it  by  cartilage  ; from  tort 
upon,  and  i pvu  to  grow. 

Epiploon.  The  membranous  vifcus  of  the  abdomen , 
'■which  covers  the  intefines,  and  hangs  to  the  bottom  of 
the  fomach  ; from  ithtcMu  to  fwim  upon. 

Epiftrophreus.  The  fecpnd  vertebra  of  the  neck  ; from 
to  turn  round,  becaufe  the  head  is  turned 

upon  it. 

Ethmoid  bone  of  the  cranium  ; fo  called,  from  a 
fieve,  and  si^os  refemblance,  it  being  perforated  like 
a fieve. 

F.  • 

Fafcia.  An  expanfion  of  a mufcle,  enclofing  others  like  a 
band  ; from  paoKia  a band. 

Falciform.  Shaped  like  a fcythe  ; from  falx  a fcythe, 

Fafciculus.  ' A little  bundle. 

Fauces.  The  plural  of  faux,  the  top  of  the  throat, 

G. 

Ga'lactophorous  duffs  of  the  breafts  of  women  ; from 
yah*  milk,  and  fga  to  carry,  becaufe  they  convey 
the  milk  to  the  nipples. 

Ganglion.  TayyhiM,  a knpt  m the  courfe  of  a nerve. 

Gaftrocnemius.  The  mufcle  which  forms  the  thick  c; 
the , leg  s*  from  yuree  a belly,  and  r.ny.n  the  leg. 

Geniev 


( 219  ) 

Genio.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong: 
to  mufcles  which  are  attached  to  the  chin  ; as  Gen* 
io-gloflus — 'Genio-hyoideus — Genio-pharyng'eus,  8c  c. 
from  yi'/uov  the  chin. 

Genu.  The  knee  ; from  y«y,  •srx^ct  to  no  yw  avuv,  be* 
caufe  by  it  the  body  is  bent  towards  the  earth. 

Ginglymus.  An  articulation  ; from  ytyyXvftot  a hinge. 

Glenoid  cavity  > from  yXm  a cavity,  and  refem- 
blance.- 

Glomer.  A convoluted  bundle  of  vejfels  ; generally  ap- 
plied’ to  the  lymphatic  glands. 

Gloffo.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong 
to  mufcles,  from  their  being  attached  to  the  tongue  ; 
as  Glolfo-pharyngeus — Gloifo-ftaphylinus,  & c.  from 
yXo<r<rM  the  tongue. 

Glottis.  The  fuperior  opening  of  the  larynx  at  the  bot- 
tom of  the  tongue  ; from'  yXoiria.  the  tongue. 

Glutreus.  The  name  of  a'  mufcle  ; from  yAaro;  the 
buttocks; 

Gompholis.  r of/faxrts  inclavation,  a fpecies  of  immove- 
able connexion  of  bones  ; from  youpo^  a nail,  becaufe 
one  bone  is  fixed  in  another  bone,  like  a nail  in  a 
bo.ard. 

H. 

Harmonia.  A fpecies  of  immoveable  connexion  of  bones  ; 
from  It^i  to  fit  together. 

Helix.  The  onward  circle  of  the  ear  ; from  uXa  t® 
turn  about. 

Hepar.  The  liver.  'H;r<zg,  an  abdominal  vifcus. 

Hyaloid  membrane  of  the  eye  ; from  vxXog  glafs,  and 
ilboo  likenefs  ; fo  called,  from  its  tranfparent  and. 
glaffy  appearance. 

Hygrology.  The  dofirine  of  the  fluids  ; from  byg?;  a 
fluid,  and  Aoya;  a difcourfe. 

Hymen.  The  membrane  fituated  at  the  entrance  of  the 
virgin  vagina  ; from  f-A'>  hymen. 

Hyo. 


( 220  ) 

Hyo.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong  toe 
mufcles,  which  are  attached  to  the  os-hyoides  ; as 
hyo-gloifus — hy o-pharyngeus — hyo-thyroides ; from 
veu$ a the  os-hyoides. 

Ilyoides.  A hone  of  the  tongue , fo  called , from  its  re - 
fmblance  to  the  Greek  v ■,  from  v and  uho  refem- 
blance. 

I iypochondnuni.  That  part  of  the  body,  which  lies 
under  the  cartilages  of  the  fpurious  ribs  j from  vjm 
under,  and  a cartilage. 

Hypogaftric.  The  lower  region  of  the  fore  part  of  the 
abdomen  ; from  vao  under,  and  y«f«g  the  ftomach. 

I. 

Ileum.  A portion  of  the  fmall  intefines  ; from  £<As<« 
to  turn  ; being  always  convoluted. 

Ilium.  Part  of  the  os  innominatum , fo  called,  becaufe 
it  fupports  the  tiXna  or  fmall  intedines. 

Ifchnim.  The  part  of  the  os  innominatum  upon  which  we 
ft  ; from  i<r%va  to  fudaim 

L. 

Lacuna.  The  excretory  duct  of  the  glands  of  the  urethra 
and  vagina  ; from  lacus  a channel. 

Lamoidal  future  ; fo  called,  becaufe  it  is  fiiaped  like 
the  letter  A ; from  A,  and  u3o?  refemblance. 

Larynx.  The  fuperior  part  of  the  windpipe  ; A«guy| 
the  larynx. 

M. 

Mafseter.  A mufcle  of  the  face,  which  afifls  in  the  ac- 
tion of  chewing  ; from  y.x.aoaoy.o'A  to  chew. 

jVlaftoid  procefs  ; fo  called*  from  pacoc  a bread,  and 
u2o;  likenefs,  being  fhaped  like  a nipple  or  bread. 

Mediadlnum.  The  produdlion  of  the  pleura,  which  di- 
vides the  thorax  into  two  cavities  ; from  medium  the 
middle,  quafi  in  viedio  fare. 


Mefentery. 


( 331  1 

Mefentery.  The  membranes,  to  which  the  intejlines  are' 
attached  ; from  yisoo  the  middle>  and  svr.^ov  an  in- 
teftine,  becaufe  it  is  in  the  middle  of  the  inteftincs. 

Mefocolon.  That  part  of  the  mefentery  in  the  middle  f 
the  colon  ; from  yvrao  the  middle,  and  y.c>.™  the  colon. 

Metacarpus.  That  part  of  the  hand  between  the  carpus 
and  fingers  ; from  yna  after,  and  tutgxot  tire 
wrift. 

Metatarfus.  That  part  of  the  foot  between  the  tarfus 
and  toes  ; from  y-ra  after,  and  resgs-o;  the  tarfus. 

Mylo.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong  to 
mufcles,  which  are  attached  near  the  grinders  ; as 
mylo-hyoides  ; mylo-pharyngeus,  &c.  ; from  yvM  a 
grinder  tooth. 

Myology.  The  doctrine  of  the  mufcles  } from  yoo  a 
inufcle,  and.  Aoyaj  a difeourfe, 

N. 

Neurology.  The  doctrine  of  the  nerves  ; from  vivcps 
a nerve,  and  a «yoj  a difeourfe. 

a 

Odontoid,  or  tooth-like  procefs  ; from  cons  a tooth,  and 
iihc<;  refemblance. 

CEfophagUS.  The  canal  leading  from  the  pharynx  to 
the  Jiomach  ; from  c.a  to  carry,  and  py.ya  to  eat  ; 
becaufe  it  carries  the  food  into  the  flomach. 

Olecranon.  The  elbow,  or  head  of  the  ulna  ; from 
the  cubit,  and  the  head. 

Omentum.  An  abdominal'  vifeus  ; fo  called,  from 
omen  a guefs  ; becaufe  the  foothfayers  prophelled 
from  the  infpeftion  of  this  part. 

Omo.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong  to 
mufcles  which  are  attached  to  the  fcapula  ; as  omo- 
hyoidcus , &c.  from  the  ilioulder. 

Omoplata  The  fcapula , or  Jhoulder  blade  ; from  mu? 

th$  Ilioulder,.  and  bro&d. 

T 3 Grgafiru 


( 222  } 

Ol'gafm.  A violent  falacioufnefs , attended  with  tnrgcf- 
cence  in  the  parts  ; from  t^ycta  to  defire  vehemently. 

Ofteology.  The  doClrine  of  the  hones  ; from  oj-sw  a. 
bone,  and  Aoy«s  a difcourfe. 

P. 

Pancreas.  A vifcus  of  the  abdomen  ; fo  called,  from 
its  flefliy  confidence  ; from  7ro.v  all,  and  flefh. 

Parenchyma.  The  fubfiance  connecting  together  the  vef- 
fls , &c.  of  the  lungs,  is  fc  called,  from  7r<t^yxvu 
to  pour  through. 

Parotid  gland  ; from  near,  and  evs  the  ear  ; be- 
caufe  it  is  fituated  near  the  ear. 

Pelvis.  A botiy  cavity  f taped  like  a hafon  ; from  srsAvj. 
a bafon. 

Pericardium.  The  membrane  which  furrmmds  the  heart  > 
from  mey  around,  and  xxfiiz.  the  heart. 

Pericranium.  The  membrane  which  covers  the  hones  of 
the  full ; from  jrsgr  around,  and  x^aviav  the  cranium 
or  head. 

Periofteum,  The  membrane  which  furrov.nds  the,  hones  ; 
from  mqy  around,  and  owt  a hone. 

Periftaltic  motion  of  the  intefines  ; from  to. 

contrafl. 

Peritoneum.  The  membrane  lining  the  abdomen , and’ 
covering  its  vifcera  ; from  jrsgmoai  to  extend  around. 

Phalanx.  The  hones  of  the  fingers  and  toes  are  called, 
phalanxes, from  their  regular  fituation,  like  a <p«A«yf, 
or  army  of  foldiers. 

Pharynx.  A membranous  bag  at  the  end  of  the  tnouth  ; 
u,77 a to  Oiejit,  becaufe  it  conveys  the  food  into  the 
ftomach. 

Phrenic  cr  diaphragmatic  nerve.  C’gsvej  the  dia- 
phragm ; from  i the  mind  ; becaufe  the  an- 
cients fuppofed  it  to  be  the  feat  of  the  mind. 

Phyfiplogy.  That  part  of  natural  hi/lory  which  treats 
of  the  actions  and  functions  of  an  animated  body  ; 
from  pjni  nature,  and  a <70;  a difcourfe. 

Pia  mater. 


( 223  ) 

Pfa  mater.  The  innermofl  membrane  of  the  Irani  / fa: 
called,  becaufe  it  embraces  the  brain  as  a good 
mother  folds  her  child. 

Placenta.  The  after  birth  ; from  nXxrras  a cake,  from, 
its  refemblance  to  a cake. 

Platyfma-myoides.  A ?nufcle  of  the  neck  ; from 
broad,  pus  a mufcle,  and  refemblance. 

Pleura.  The  membrane  lining  the  thorax  ; 7rXsugct  the< 
fide. 

Plexus.  A kind  of  net-work  of  veffels  or  nerves  ; front 
plcfto,  to  weave  together. 

Prsepuce,  or  forejkin  of  the  penis  ; from  praeputo,  to, 
cut  off  before,  becaufe  the  eaftern  nations  ufually 
cut  it  off. 

Pfoas.  A mufcle,  fi>  called; ; from  fox  the  loin,  being 
fituated  in  the  loins. 

Pterygoid  procefs  ; from  A\igv\  a pen,  or  wing,  and 
likenefs  ; fo  called,  from  its  likenefs  to  a pen, 
or  wing. 

Pylorus.  The  lower  orifice ..  of  the  ftomacb,  which  opens 
into  the  inteftines  ; from  wXooi  to  guard  an  entrance,, 
becaufe  it  guards,  as  it  were,  the  entrance  of  the 
bowels. 

R. 

Raphe.  A future.  from  gxA  to  few. 

Renes.  The  kidneys,  cvxo  rs  gift,  becaufe  through, 
them  the  urine  flows. 

Retina.  The  net-like  expanfon  of  the  optic  nerve,  on  the 
inner  furface  of  the-  eye  ; from  rets  a,  net. 

Rhomboides.  A mufcle,  fa  called  from  its  Jhape  ; from 
goftGog  a geometrical  figure,  whofe  tides  are  equal 
but  not  right-angled,  and  eio?  a likenefs. 

Rotula.  The  knee  pan  ; a dim.  of  rota  a wheel,  from, 
its  fhape. 

S. 

• Sacrum.  A lone,,  fo  called ; from  facer  facred,  be« 
caufe  it  was  once  offered  in  facrifiees. 


Salyatellsk 


I 224  ) 

Salvatella.  A vein  of  the  foot  ; fo  called,  becaufe  it 
was  thought  the  opening  it  preferved  health,  and 
cured  melancholy  ; from  falvo  to  preferve. 

Sanguis.  ‘The  blood  ; cctto  rs  <rai iv  yui x,  becaufe  it  pre- 
ferves  the  body. 

Sartorius.  A mufcle , fo  called , becaufe  taylors  crofs 
their  legs  with  it  ; from  fartor  a taylor. 

Scapha.  The  depreffion  of  the  outer  car  before  the  anti - 
helix  ; from  er-atpy  a little  boat  or  fluff ; from  <rx.0t.7t la 
to  dig,  becaufe  fluffs  were  formerly  only  trees  made 
hollow. 

Scaphoides.  A bone  of  the  carpus , fo  called,  from  its 
refemblance  to  a fluff-;  from  cxap,-,  a fluff,  and 
a likenefs. 

Sclerotic.  A tenn  applied  to  the  outermoft  or  hardejl 
membrane  of  the  eye  ; from  ex-X-^oa  to  make  hard. 

Sella  Turcica.  Part  of  the  fphasnoid  is  fo  called, 
from  its  fuppofed  refemblance  to  a Turkifh  faddle. 

Sesamoid  bones  ; from  catc/ma  an  Indian  grain,  and 
ii'bog  a likenefs,  from  their  refemblance  to  the  femen- 
fefami. 

Sigmoid.  Parts  are  fo  called,  from  their  refemblance  to 
the  letter  2 ; from  2 the  letter  Sigma,  and  ubo$ 
likenefs. 

Sphrenoid  bone  ; from  e-Qw  a wedge,  and  like- 
nefs, it  being  fhaped  like  a wedge. 

Sphincter.  The  name  of  feveral  mufcles , whofe  office  it 
is,  to  font,  up  the  aperture  around  which  they  are  placed  /• 
from  cpiyyo  tO  fllUt  Up. 

Splanchnology.  The  dottrine  of  the  vifcera  ; from 
< TTthctyxyv)  an  entrail,  and  a eye;  a difcourfe. 

Symphyfis.  A connexion  of  bones  ; from  evpQya  to 
grow  together,. 

Synarthrofis.  A connexion  of  bones  ; from  <rw  with, 
and  aftfov  a joint. 

Synchondvoas.  A fpecies  of  union  of  bones  by  one  an  s of • 
cartilage  ; front  <rvi  with,  and  a cartilage* 

Syndcfmology,. 


k 


( 325  } 

Syndefmology.  The  dottrine  of  the  ligaments  ; fronJ 
f-ytthrpos  a ligament,  and  Myos  a difcourfe. 

Syndefmofis.  A fecks  of  union  of  hones  by  means  of 
ligament  ; from  troyhc-fMo  a ligament. 

Syneurofis.  A f peeks  of  connexion  of  bcj-ies  by  means  of 
membrane  ; from  cuv  with,  and  vtvf>ov  a nerve  ; be- 
caufe  membranes,  ligaments,  and  tendons,  were 
by  the  ancients  confidered  as  nerves. 

Syfiarcofis.  A fpecies  of  connexion  of  bones  by  means  of 
mufcle  ; from  <rvv  with,  and  eaf.  fiefh. 

Syftole.  The  contradiile  motion  of  the  heart  and  arte* 
ries  ; from  cvfeAAa  to  contrail. 

T. 

Tendon.  From  rwu  to  extend. 

Theca.  The  fpinal  canal  is  called  theca  vertebralis  z 
from  from  -fui  to  put. 

Thorax.  ©*yg«|.  The  breajl  or  chef  ; from  itoga  to 
leap,  becaufe  in  it  the  heart  beats. 

Thyro.  Names  compounded  with  this  word  belong 
to  mufcles,  which  are  attached  to  the  thyroid  car- 
tilage. 

Thyroid  cartilage  ; from  3-ugee;  a Afield,  and  ubo;  like— 
nefs,  becaufe  it  is  fhaped  like  a fhieid. 

Trachea.  The  wind-pipe  ; fo  called,  from  its  rough- 
nefs,  from  -rgs^vs  rough. 

Trapezoid  bones  of  the  carpus  ; from  ay.nfo'i  a four- 
fided  figure,  and  udo;  likenefs. 

Trochanter.  A procefs  of  the  thigh  boney  fo  called, 
from  to  run,  becaufe  the  mufcles  inferted  in 

thefe  parts  perform  the  office  of  running. 

Trochlea.  A kind  of  cartilaginous  pulley , through 
which  the  tendon  of  one  of  the  mufcles  of  the  eye 
pafies  ; from  T^%ato  run. 

Trochoides.  A fpecies  of  articulation  of  bones  ; from 

* a wheel,  and  ado?  likenefs  ; becaufe  one  bone 

moves  round  upon  another,  like  a wheel  upon  its 
axle-tree. 


Ulna. 


u. 

XJlna.  A name  for  the  cubit ; from  the  cubit. 

Ureter.  The  canal  which  conveys  the  urine  from  the  hid"-' 
ney  to  the  bladder  j from  urine. 

Urethra.  The  paffage  through  which  the  urine  pajfes' 
from  the  bladder  ; from  sgav  the  urine. 

Uvea.  The  poferior  lamina  of  the  iris,  fo  called,  be- 
caufe  in  beads  (which  the  ancients  chiefly  diflefted) 
it  is  of  the  colour  of  unripe  grapes  ; from-  uva  an 
unripe  grape. 

Uvula.  The  glandular  fibfiance  which  hangs  down' 
from  the  middle  of  the  foft  palate  ;■  fo  called,  from 
its  refemblance  to  a grape.  A dim.  of  uva  a grape. 

V. 

Valves.  Little  tiieiiibranes,  that  prevent  the  retilrn  of 
the  blood  in  the  veins  and  arteries  ; from  valvx  fold- 
ing doors. 

Vertebra;.  The  bones  of  the  fpine  are  fo  called,  from 
verto:  to  turn. 

Vomer.  A bone  of  the  nofe r fo  called,,  from  its  refem- 
blance to  a ploughlhare  ; from  vomo  to  turn  up. 

X. 

Xiphoid  cartilage,  fo  called,  from  its  refemblance  to  a 
fword  ; from  |<p«s  a fword,  and  ueo$  likenefs. 

Z. 

Zygoma.  The  cavity  under  the  zygomatic  proccfs  of  the- 
temporal  bone  ; from  a yoke,  becaufe  it  tranf- 

mits  the  tendon  cf  the  temporal  mufcle  like  unt® 
a yoke. 


. 

tn  V ! . ■' ; 7 Si  'jfjtilb  ' 

. 


* • ' ■■’  - 
■■  ■■  •'■  ■ - 


■ t , 

\ Vv" 


’ 

' 


u.rr.  , .v  ,:n-  me  ,r.  • ■ ';> 


>,  i 4,0  -is;  =•?  r- 


>•  '?• 


r 


1 


y/ 


-• 


>•  — '•  •. 


